DDW-2024-006457

Project Manual

Oakley City
Oakley Weber-Well

Project Manual | Review Set

March 2024

Project Manual

Oakley-Weber Well
Review Set
March | 2024

Project Owner: Oakley City
P.O. Box 129
Oakley, UT 84055

Engineer: AQUA Engineering
533 W 2600 S, Ste 275
Bountiful, UT 84010

Prepared by:

533 W 2600 S Suite 275
Bountiful, Utah 84010
Ph: [phone] | www.aquaeng.com

AQUA Project No. 001990.C

© 2023, AQUA Engineering
03/06/2024
- i -
SECTION 00050 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

Section Title
C-111 Advertisement for Bids
C-200 Instructions to Bidders For Construction Contract
C-410 Bid Form For Construction Contract
C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)
C-451 Qualifications Statement
C-510 Notice of Award
C-520 Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract
(Stipulated Price)
C-610 Performance Bond
C-615 Payment Bond
C-620 Application for Payment
C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion
C-626 Notice of Acceptability of Work
C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
C-800 Supplementary General Conditions of the Construction Contract
C-940 Work Change Directive
C-941 Change Order
C-942 Field Order

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section Title
011000 Summary of Work
011500 Measurement and Payment
013300 Contractor Submittals
014000 Quality Requirements
014200 Abbreviations and Reference Standards
015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
015050 Mobilization
015300 Protection of Existing Facilities
015600 Project Environmental Controls
016000 Materials and Equipment
016100 Product Requirements
016600 Equipment Testing and Startup
017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
017700 Closeout Procedures
017823 Operation and Maintenance Data
017839 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section Title
031000 Concrete Forming
032000 Concrete Reinforcing
032900 Joint in Concrete
033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
- ii -
034100 Precast Structural Concrete
036000 Grouting Mortar

DIVISION 5 – METALWORK
Section Title
055200 Miscellaneous Metalwork

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section Title
079200 Sealants, Caulking, and Below Grade Waterproofing

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Section Title
220050 General Pipes and Fittings
220523 Valves
221030 Ductile Iron Pipe
221040 PVC Pipe
221050 High Density Polyethylene Piping and Fittings
221066 Pipeline Testing

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Section Title
310519.17 HDPE Geomembrane
311000 Site Clearing
312000 Earth Moving
312219 Finish Grading
312319 Dewatering
315000 Excavation Support and Protection

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Section Title
330112 Protecting and Relocation of Utilities
330112.11 Testing for Water Pipelines and Concrete Tanks
331136 Submersible Well Pump

EJCDC® C-111, Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 2
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Oakley City
Oakley City, Utah
Oakley-Weber Well
General Notice
Oakley City (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of the following Project:
Oakley-Weber Well
8322102
Bids for the construction of the Project will be received at the Oakley City Town Hall located at 960 W.
Center Street, until Monday, February 5, 2024 at 2:00 p.m. local time. At that time the Bids received
will be publicly opened and read.
The Project includes the following Work:
This work consists of demolition of an existing valve house and construction of new waterline
piping and a well house pump station located in Oakley City, Utah east of the Cottonwood Tanks
just off the Weber Wild Road. Across from the 250,000 gallon Cottonwood Tank.
Bids are requested for the following Contract: Oakley-Weber Well
Owner anticipates that the Project’s total bid price will be approximately $[insert amount]. The Project
has an expected duration of 120 days.
Obtaining the Bidding Documents
Information and Bidding Documents for the Project can be found at the following designated website:
The Project Documents will be available beginning Wednesday, October 19, 2022 and may be
downloaded under QuestCDN Project # 8322102 at www.questcdn.com for a non-refundable charge
of $25.00. For assistance in viewing or downloading this digital project information contact
QuestCDN.com at 952-233-1632 or [e-mail].
Bidding Documents may be downloaded from the designated website. Prospective Bidders are urged to
register with the designated website as a plan holder, even if Bidding Documents are obtained from a
plan room or source other than the designated website in either electronic or paper format. The
designated website will be updated periodically with addenda, lists of registered plan holders, reports,
and other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. All official notifications, addenda, and
other Bidding Documents will be offered only through the designated website. Neither Owner nor
Engineer will be responsible for Bidding Documents, including addenda, if any, obtained from sources
other than the designated website.
Pre-bid Conference
A mandatory pre-bid conference for the Project will be held on [day, date] at [time] at Oakley City
Town Hall, 960 W. Center Street Oakley, Utah, 84055. Bids will not be accepted from Bidders that do
not attend the mandatory pre-bid conference.

EJCDC® C-111, Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 2 of 2
Instructions to Bidders.
For all further requirements regarding bid submittal, qualifications, procedures, and contract award,
refer to the Instructions to Bidders that are included in the Bidding Documents.
American Iron and Steel

Section 746 of Title VII of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A - Agriculture, Rural
Development, Food and Drug Administration, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act, 2017) and
subsequent statutes mandating domestic preference applies an American Iron and Steel requirement
to this project. All iron and steel products used in this project must be produced in the United States.
The term “iron and steel products” means the following products made primarily of iron or steel: lined
or unlined pipes and fittings, manhole covers and other municipal castings, hydrants, tanks, flanges,
pipe clamps and restraints, valves, structural steel, reinforced precast concrete, and Construction
Materials.

The following waivers apply to this Contract:
De Minimis,
Minor Components,
Pig iron and direct reduced iron, and

This Advertisement is issued by:
Owner: Oakley City
By: Amy Rydalch
Title: City Recorder/Administrator
Date: [Date of initial publication of advertisement]

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
TOC Page1 of 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1— Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1
Article 2— Bidding Documents ..................................................................................................................... 1
Article 3— Qualifications of Bidders ............................................................................................................. 2
Article 4— Pre-Bid Conference ..................................................................................................................... 3
Article 5— Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program;
Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 4
Article 6— Bidder’s Representations and Certifications............................................................................... 5
Article 7— Interpretations and Addenda ..................................................................................................... 6
Article 8— Bid Security ................................................................................................................................. 6
Article 9— Contract Times ............................................................................................................................ 7
Article 10— Substitute and “Or Equal” Items ............................................................................................... 7
Article 11— Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ..................................................................................... 8
Article 12— Preparation of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 8
Article 13— Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................ 9
Article 14— Submittal of Bid ....................................................................................................................... 10
Article 15— Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ....................................................................................... 10
Article 16— Opening of Bids ....................................................................................................................... 11
Article 17— Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ................................................................................... 11
Article 18— Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract .............................................................................. 11
Article 19— Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 12
Article 20— Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 12
Article 21— Sales and Use Taxes ................................................................................................................ 12
Article 22— Contracts to Be Assigned ........................................................................................................ 12

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 12
ARTICLE 1—DEFINED TERMS
1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions
and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the
meanings indicated below:
A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued, and which
registers plan holders.
ARTICLE 2—BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.01 Bidder shall obtain a complete set of Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents
(together, the Bidding Documents). See the Agreement for a list of the Contract Documents. It is
Bidder’s responsibility to determine that it is using a complete set of documents in the preparation
of a Bid. Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use
of incomplete documents, by Bidder itself or by its prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers.
2.02 Bidding Documents are made available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of
the Project and permission to download or distribution of the Bidding Documents does not confer
a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. Authorization to download
documents, or other distribution, includes the right for plan holders to print documents solely for
their use, and the use of their prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers, provided the plan holder
pays all costs associated with printing or reproduction. Printed documents may not be re-sold
under any circumstances.
2.03 Owner has established a Bidding Documents Website as indicated in the Advertisement or
invitation to bid. Owner recommends that Bidder register as a plan holder with the Issuing Office
at such website, and obtain a complete set of the Bidding Documents from such website. Bidders
may rely that sets of Bidding Documents obtained from the Bidding Documents Website are
complete, unless an omission is blatant. Registered plan holders will receive Addenda issued by
Owner.
2.04 Bidder may register as a plan holder and obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents, in the
number and format stated in the Advertisement or invitation to bid, from the Issuing Office.
Bidders may rely that sets of Bidding Documents obtained from the Issuing Office are complete,
unless an omission is blatant. Registered plan holders will receive Addenda issued by Owner.
2.05 Plan rooms (including construction information subscription services, and electronic and virtual
plan rooms) may distribute the Bidding Documents, or make them available for examination.
Those prospective bidders that obtain an electronic (digital) copy of the Bidding Documents from
a plan room are encouraged to register as plan holders from the Bidding Documents Website or
Issuing Office. Owner is not responsible for omissions in Bidding Documents or other documents
obtained from plan rooms, or for a Bidder’s failure to obtain Addenda from a plan room.
2.06 Electronic Documents
A. When the Bidding Requirements indicate that electronic (digital) copies of the Bidding
Documents are available, such documents will be made available to the Bidders as Electronic
Documents in the manner specified.

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 2 of 12
1. Bidding Documents will be provided in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) (.pdf)
that is readable by Adobe Acrobat Reader Version [insert version number] or later. It is
the intent of the Engineer and Owner that such Electronic Documents are to be exactly
representative of the paper copies of the documents. However, because the Owner and
Engineer cannot totally control the transmission and receipt of Electronic Docum ents
nor the Contractor’s means of reproduction of such documents, the Owner and
Engineer cannot and do not guarantee that Electronic Documents and reproductions
prepared from those versions are identical in every manner to the paper copies.
B. Unless otherwise stated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder may use and rely upon
complete sets of Electronic Documents of the Bidding Documents, described in
Paragraph 2.06.A above. However, Bidder assumes all risks associated with differences
arising from transmission/receipt of Electronic Documents versions of Bidding Documents
and reproductions prepared from those versions and, further, assumes all risks, costs, and
responsibility associated with use of the Electronic Documents versions to derive information
that is not explicitly contained in printed paper versions of the documents, and for Bidder’s
reliance upon such derived information.
C. After the Contract is awarded, the Owner will provide or direct the Engineer to provide for
the use of the Contractor documents that were developed by Engineer as part of the Project
design process, as Electronic Documents in native file formats.
1. Electronic Documents that are available in native file format include:
a. Nothing at this point.
2. Release of such documents will be solely for the convenience of the Contractor. No such
document is a Contract Document.
3. Unless the Contract Documents explicitly identify that such information will be available
to the Successful Bidder (Contractor), nothing herein will create an obligation on the
part of the Owner or Engineer to provide or create such information, and the Contractor
is not entitled to rely on the availability of such information in the preparation of its Bid
or pricing of the Work. In all cases, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to
verify that any electronic/digital information provided in Electronic Documents is
appropriate and adequate for the Contractor’s specific purposes.
4. In no case will the Contractor be entitled to additional compensation or time for
completion due to any differences between the actual Contract Documents and any
related document in native file format.
ARTICLE 3—QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, after submitting its Bid and within 5
days of Owner’s request, Bidder must submit the following information:
A. Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience,
and present commitments.
B. A written statement that Bidder is authorized to do business in the state where the Project
is located, or a written certification that Bidder will obtain such authority prior to the
Effective Date of the Contract.

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 3 of 12
C. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.
D. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information.
E. Other required information regarding qualifications.
3.02 Deleted
3.03 Bidder is to submit the following information with its Bid to demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications
to perform the Work:
A. Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience,
and present commitments.
B. A written statement that Bidder is authorized to do business in the state where the Project
is located, or a written certification that Bidder will obtain such authority prior to the
Effective Date of the Contract.
C. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.
D. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information.
E. Other required information regarding qualifications.
3.04 A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information within the times indicated may
disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract.
3.05 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek
additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.
ARTICLE 4—PRE-BID CONFERENCE
4.01 Deleted.
4.02 Deleted.
4.03 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the
Advertisement or invitation to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to
discuss the Project. Proposals will not be accepted from Bidders who do not attend the
conference. It is each Bidder’s responsibility to sign in at the pre-bid conference to verify its
participation. Bidders must sign in using the name of the organization that will be submitting a
Bid. A list of qualified Bidders that attended the pre-bid conference and are eligible to submit a
Bid for this Project will be issued in an Addendum.
4.04 Information presented at the pre-Bid conference does not alter the Contract Documents. Owner
will issue Addenda to make any changes to the Contract Documents that result from discussions

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 4 of 12
at the pre-Bid conference. Information presented, and statements made at the pre-bid
conference will not be binding or legally effective unless incorporated in an Addendum.
ARTICLE 5—SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S
SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
5.01 Site and Other Areas
A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-way,
easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional
lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of
materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be
obtained and paid for by Contractor.
5.02 Existing Site Conditions
A. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings,
pursuant to Paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions, and not in the drawings referred to in
Paragraph 5.02.A of these Instructions to Bidders. Information and data regarding the
presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified,
or defined as Technical Data.
5.03 Other Site-related Documents
A. In addition to the documents regarding existing Site conditions referred to in
Paragraph 5.02.A, the following other documents relating to conditions at or adjacent to the
Site are known to Owner and made available to Bidders for reference:
1. Nothing Available.
Owner will make copies of these other Site-related documents available to any Bidder on
request.
B. Owner has not verified the contents of these other Site-related documents, and Bidder may
not rely on the accuracy of any data or information in such documents. Bidder is responsible
for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from the other Site-related documents.
C. The other Site-related documents are not part of the Contract Documents.
D. Bidders are encouraged to review the other Site-related documents, but Bidders will not be
held accountable for any data or information in such documents. The requirement to review
and take responsibility for documentary Site information is limited to information in (1) the
Contract Documents and (2) the Technical Data.
E. No other Site-related documents are available.
5.04 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders
A. Bidder is required to visit the Site and conduct a thorough visual examination of the Site and
adjacent areas. During the visit the Bidder must not disturb any ongoing operations at the
Site.
B. A Site visit is scheduled following the pre-bid conference. Maps to the Site will be available
at the pre-Bid conference.

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 5 of 12
C. A Site visit is scheduled for [designate, date, time and location]. Maps to the Site will be
made available upon request.
D. Bidders visiting the Site are required to arrange their own transportation to the Site.
E. All access to the Site other than during a regularly scheduled Site visit must be coordinated
through the following Owner or Engineer contact for visiting the Site: Nick Graue, Project
Manager, AQUA Engineering, Phone: [phone] or email [e-mail].
Bidder must conduct the required Site visit during normal working hours.
F. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site
conditions.
G. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the
Owner will provide Bidder general access to the Site to conduct such additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for
preparing and submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such
access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns,
or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site. Bidder is responsible for establishing
access needed to reach specific selected test sites.
H. Bidder must comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and
location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established
by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to
schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety
programs.
I. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.
5.05 Owner’s Safety Program
A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. If an Owner
safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.06 Other Work at the Site
A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the
general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the
Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the
Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for
such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such
contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.
ARTICLE 6—BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
6.01 Express Representations and Certifications in Bid Form, Agreement
A. The Bid Form that each Bidder will submit contains express representations regarding the
Bidder’s examination of Project documentation, Site visit, and preparation of the Bid, and
certifications regarding lack of collusion or fraud in connection with the Bid. Bidder should
review these representations and certifications, and assure that Bidder can make the
representations and certifications in good faith, before executing and submitting its Bid.

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 6 of 12
B. If Bidder is awarded the Contract, Bidder (as Contractor) will make similar express
representations and certifications when it executes the Agreement.
ARTICLE 7—INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 Owner on its own initiative may issue Addenda to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the
Bidding Documents.
7.02 Bidder shall submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents to
Engineer in writing. Contact information and submittal procedures for such questions are as
follows:
A. Submit through website noted in Advertisement for Bid.
7.03 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions
will be issued by Addenda delivered to all registered plan holders. Questions received less than
seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered.
7.04 Only responses set forth in an Addendum will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or
clarifications will be without legal effect. Responses to questions are not part of the Contract
Documents unless set forth in an Addendum that expressly modifies or supplements the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 8—BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent of
Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the
form of a Bid bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General
Conditions. Such Bid bond will be issued in the form included in the Bidding Documents. Bid
security must be at least 5% of the Bidder’s maximum Bid price.
8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the
contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract, furnished the required
Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid
security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract and
furnish the required Contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may
consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder
will be forfeited, in whole in the case of a penal sum bid bond, and to the extent of Owner’s
damages in the case of a damages-form bond. Such forfeiture will be Owner’s exclusive remedy if
Bidder defaults.
8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 7 of 12
Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will
be released.
8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award will be released within 7 days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) substantially
completed and (b) ready for final payment, and (c) Milestones (if any) are to be achieved, are set
forth in the Agreement.
9.02 Delected
9.03 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial
Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the
Agreement.
ARTICLE 10—SUBSTITUTE AND “OR EQUAL” ITEMS
10.01 Deleted
10.02 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified
or described in the Bidding Documents, and those “or-equal” or substitute or materials and
equipment subsequently approved by Engineer prior to the submittal of Bids and identified by
Addendum. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” or
substitute unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder and has been
received by Engineer within 10 days of the issuance of the Advertisement for Bids or invitation to
Bidders. Each such request must comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.05 and 7.06 of
the General Conditions, and the review of the request will be governed by the principles in those
paragraphs. Each such request shall include the Manufacturer’s Certification for Compliance
with AIS. Refer to the Manufacturer’s Certification form provided in these construction Contract
Documents. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s
decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any such
proposed item, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all registered Bidders.
Bidders cannot rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Substitutes and “or-equal”
materials and equipment may be proposed by Contractor in accordance with Paragraphs 7.05
and 7.06 of the General Conditions after the Effective Date of the Contract. Each such request
shall include Manufacturer’s Certification letter to document compliance with AIS requirements
of Section 746 of Title VII of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A -
Agriculture, Rural Development, Food and Drug Administration, and Related Agencies
Appropriations Act, 2017) and subsequent statutes mandating domestic preference, if
applicable. Refer to Manufacturer’s Certification Letter provided in these Contract Documents.
10.03 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid will be based on the presumption that the Contractor will
furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 8 of 12
supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Bid approvals of
“or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.
ARTICLE 11—SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
11.01 Deleted
11.02 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, must submit to Owner a list
of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work within five
days after Bid opening:
A. Building Contractor.
11.03 If requested by Owner, such list must be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent
information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
Subcontractor or Supplier. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection
to any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given,
request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent
Successful Bidder will submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by
the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price
adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.
11.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors and Suppliers.
Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security
of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor or Supplier, so listed and against which Owner or Engineer
makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable
to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in
Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions.
11.05 – The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s) in excess of the limits stated in SC
7.07A.
ARTICLE 12—PREPARATION OF BID
12.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.
A. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures
or alterations must be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price must be
indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item
listed therein.
B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is
optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder
may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”
12.02 If Bidder has obtained the Bidding Documents as Electronic Documents, then Bidder shall prepare
its Bid on a paper copy of the Bid Form printed from the Electronic Documents version of the
Bidding Documents. The printed copy of the Bid Form must be clearly legible, printed on 8½ inch
by 11-inch paper and as closely identical in appearance to the Electronic Document version of the
Bid Form as may be practical. The Owner reserves the right to accept Bid Forms which nominally

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 9 of 12
vary in appearance from the original paper version of the Bid Form, providing that all required
information and submittals are included with the Bid.
12.03 A Bid by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title
must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate
address and state of incorporation must be shown.
12.04 A Bid by a partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose
title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official
address of the partnership must be shown.
12.05 A Bid by a limited liability company must be executed in the name of the firm by a member or
other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation
of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown.
12.06 A Bid by an individual must show the Bidder’s name and official address.
12.07 A Bid by a joint venture must be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer
in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture must have been formally established
prior to submittal of a Bid, and the official address of the joint venture must be shown.
12.08 All names must be printed in ink below the signatures.
12.09 The Bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must
be filled in on the Bid Form.
12.10 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must
be shown.
12.11 The Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project
is located, or Bidder must certify in writing that it will obtain such authority within the time for
acceptance of Bids and attach such certification to the Bid.
12.12 If Bidder is required to be licensed to submit a Bid or perform the Work in the state where the
Project is located, the Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s licensure, or Bidder must certify in
writing that it will obtain such licensure within the time for acceptance of Bids and attach such
certification to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, must also be shown on
the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 13—BASIS OF BID
13.01 Deleted
13.02 Deleted
13.03 Deleted
13.04 Deleted
13.05 Unit Price
A. Bidders must submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price
section of the Bid Form.
B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item
will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity”, which Owner or its representative has set

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 10 of 12
forth in the Bid Form, for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the
Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total
will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price
will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.
C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures
and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
13.06 Deleted
13.07 Deleted
ARTICLE 14—SUBMITTAL OF BID
14.01 The Bidding Documents include one separate unbound copy of the Bid Form, and, if required, the
Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid
security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 2 of the
Bid Form.
14.02 A Bid must be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in
the Advertisement or invitation to bid and must be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the
Project title, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is
submitted, the name and address of Bidder, and must be accompanied by the Bid security and
other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope
containing the Bid must be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the
notation “BID ENCLOSED.” A mailed Bid must be addressed to the location designated in the
Advertisement.
14.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the
correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the
Bidder unopened.
ARTICLE 15—MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
15.01 An unopened Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same
manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted
prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid
will be returned to the Bidder.
15.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the
manner specified in Paragraph 15.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the
opening of Bids.
15.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner
and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a
material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, the Bidder may withdraw its Bid,

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 11 of 12
and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, the Bidder will be
disqualified from further bidding on the Work.
ARTICLE 16—OPENING OF BIDS
16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and,
unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids
and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.
16.02 Bids will be opened privately.
ARTICLE 17—BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner
may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this
period.
ARTICLE 18—EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming,
nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor
Bid informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.
18.02 Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation,
to not be responsible.
18.03 If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the
Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of
the Bid, whether in the Bid itself or in a separate communication to Owner or Engineer, then
Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive.
18.04 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Bidder
submitting the lowest responsive Bid.
18.05 Evaluation of Bids
A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether the Bids comply with the prescribed
requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the
Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
B. Deleted
C. Deleted
D. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids
will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each
item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.
E. Deleted
F. Deleted
18.06 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder
and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for

EJCDC® C-200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 12 of 12
those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be
submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.
18.07 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility,
qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers.
ARTICLE 19—BONDS AND INSURANCE
19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets
forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds, other required bonds (if any),
and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must
be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.
19.02 Article 8, Bid Security, of these Instructions, addresses any requirements for providing bid bonds
as part of the bidding process.
ARTICLE 20—SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as
identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder must execute and
deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and any bonds and insurance
documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents to Owner. Within 10 days
thereafter, Owner will deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful
Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in
Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 21—SALES AND USE TAXES
21.01 Owner is NOT exempt from Utah state sales and use taxes on materials and equipment to be
incorporated in the Work. (Exemption No. N/A). Said taxes shall be included in the Bid. Refer to
Paragraph SC-7.10 of the Supplementary Conditions for additional information.
ARTICLE 22—CONTRACTS TO BE ASSIGNED
ARTICLE 23 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

23.01 If the contract price is in excess of $100,000, provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act at 29 CFR 5.5(b) apply.

23.02 Federal requirements at Article 19 of the Supplementary Conditions apply to this Contract.

23.03 American Iron and Steel requirements apply to this project.

EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 10
BID FORM FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to
Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
ARTICLE 1—OWNER AND BIDDER
1.01 This Bid is submitted to:
Oakley City
Oakley-Weber Well
Oakley City Town Hall
960 W. Center Street
P.O. Box 129
Oakley, Utah 84055

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement
with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or
indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2—ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID
2.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:
A. Required Bid security;
B. List of Proposed Subcontractors;
C. List of Proposed Suppliers;
D. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain
such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids;
E. Contractor’s license number as evidence of Bidder’s State Contractor’s License or a covenant
by Bidder to obtain said license within the time for acceptance of Bids;
F. Required Bidder Qualification Statement with supporting data; and
G. If Bid amount exceeds $10,000, signed Compliance Statement (RD 400-6). Refer to specific
equal opportunity requirements set forth in the Supplementary Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC C-800);
H. If Bid amount exceeds $25,000, signed Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions (AD-1048);
I. If Bid amount exceeds $100,000, signed RD Instruction 1940-Q Exhibit A-1, Certification for
Contracts, Grants, and Loans.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 2 of 10
ARTICLE 3—BASIS OF BID—LUMP SUM BID AND UNIT PRICES
3.01 Lump Sum Bids
A. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following
lump sum (stipulated) price(s), together with any Unit Prices indicated in Paragraph 3.02:
1. Lump Sum Price (Single Lump Sum)
Lump Sum Bid Price $
2. Lump Sum Price (Base Bid and Alternates)
Lump Sum Bid Price for Base Bid $
Alternate A [Add] [Deduct] $
Alternate B [Add] [Deduct] $
3. Lump Sum Price (Sectional Lump Sum Bids)
Lump Sum Bid Price for Section I only $
Lump Sum Bid Price for Section II only $
Lump Sum Bid Price for Section I and II $
B. All specified cash allowance(s) are included in the price(s) set forth below, and have been
computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.
Lump Sum for Cash Allowance 1 $
Lump Sum for Cash Allowance 2 $
Lump Sum for Cash Allowance 3 $
Total for all Lump Sum for Cash Allowances $
C. All specified contingency allowances are included in the price(s) set forth below, and have
been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.
Lump Sum Contingency Allowance 1 $
Lump Sum Contingency Allowance 2 $
Lump Sum Contingency Allowance 3 $
Total for all Lump Sum Contingency Allowances $
3.02 Unit Price Bids
A. Bidder will perform the following Work at the indicated unit prices:
Item
No.
Description Unit Estimated
Quantity
Bid Unit Price Bid Amount
$
$
$
$
$
Total of All Unit Price Bid Items $
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 3 of 10
B. Bidder acknowledges that:
1. each Bid Unit Price includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to cover
Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item, and
2. estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities,
determined as provided in the Contract Documents.
3.03 Total Bid Price (Lump Sum and Unit Prices)
Total Bid Price (Total of all Lump Sum and Unit Price Bids) $
ARTICLE 4—BASIS OF BID—COST-PLUS FEE
Deleted
ARTICLE 5—PRICE-PLUS-TIME BID
Guidance Notes
1. Most competitive bidding processes do not use Price-Plus-Time as a method of determining the
Successful Bidder. Delete this article if Price-Plus-Time is inapplicable.
2. The following (either Paragraph 5.01 or 5.02) are suggested formats for using a Price-Plus-Time Bid to
determine the Successful Bidder. Such a format may be used to supplement either the stipulated price
bidding process (see Article 3), or the bidding process for a cost-pus-fee contract (see Article 4).
3. If Paragraph 5.01 is used:
a. Line Item 1, Total Bid Price, should be entered by Bidder; the amount must be the same as
determined in Article 3, the lump sum bid article. This is the price variable (“A”) for purposes of
competition among bidders.
b. Line Item 2, Total number of calendar days to reach Substantial Completion, is to be filled in by
Bidder.
c. Line Item 3, Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement), is filled in by the Owner or other drafter
of the Bid Form. The monetary value of each calendar day to complete the Work will typically be
the liquidated damages amount set forth in the Agreement for failing to achieve Substantial
Completion. In appropriate cases (for example, if there are no liquidated damages stated in the
Agreement) alternate wording to “Liquidated Damages Rate” can be used, such as “Monetary
Value for each Calendar Day.” Regardless of the label, as noted above the per-day amount should
be specified in the Bid Form by Owner or its representative before distribution of the Bid Form to
Bidders.
d. Line Item 4, Adjustment Amount (2 x 3), is calculated by Bidder by multiplying Item 2 by Item 3.
The Adjustment Amount is the time-based variable (“B”) for purposes of competition among
bidders.
e. Line Item 5, Amount for Comparison of Bids, is calculated by Bidder by adding line Items 1 and 4
(A+B).
f. Delete Paragraph 5.02.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 4 of 10
4. If Paragraph 5.02 is used:
a. Line Item 1, Guaranteed Maximum Price, should be entered by Bidder; the amount must be the
same as determined in Article 4, the cost-plus-fee bidding article. This is the price variable (“A”)
for purposes of competition among bidders.
b. Line Item 2, Total Number of Calendar Days to Reach Substantial Completion, is to be filled in by
Bidder.
c. Line Item 3, Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement), is filled in by the Owner or other drafter
of the Bid Form. The monetary value of each calendar day to complete the Work will typically be
the liquidated damages amount set forth in the Agreement for failing to achieve Substantial
Completion. In appropriate cases (for example, if there are no liquidated damages stated in the
Agreement) alternate wording to “Liquidated Damages Rate” can be used, such as “Monetary
Value for each Calendar Day.” Regardless of the label, as noted above the per-day amount should
be specified in the Bid Form by Owner or its representative before distribution of the Bid Form to
Bidders.
d. Line Item 4, Adjustment Amount (2 x 3), is calculated by bidder by multiplying Item 2 by Item 3.
The Adjustment Amount is the time-based variable (“B”) for purposes of competition among
bidders.
e. Line Item 5, Amount for Comparison of Bids, is calculated by Bidder by adding line Items 1 and 4
(A+B).
f. Delete Paragraph 5.01.
5.01 Price-Plus-Time Contract Award (Stipulated Price Contract)
A. The Bidder to which an award of the Contract will be made will be determined in part on the
basis of the Total Bid Price and the total number of calendar days to substantially complete
the Work, in accordance with the following:
Description Amount
A 1. Total Bid Price $[number]
2. Total number of calendar days to substantially
complete the Work
[number] days
3. Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement) $[number]/day
B 4. Adjustment Amount (2 x 3) $[number]
A+B 5. Amount for Comparison of Bids $[number]
B. The purpose of the process in the table above is only to calculate the lowest price-plus-time
(A+B) bid amount for bid comparison purposes. The price for completion of the Work (the
Contract Price) is the Total Bid Price.
C. Bonds required under Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions will be based on the Contract
Price.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 5 of 10
5.02 Price-Plus-Time Contract Award (Cost Plus Fee with Guaranteed Maximum Price Contract)
A. The Bidder to which an award of Contract will be made will be determined in part on the basis
of the Guaranteed Maximum Price and the total number of calendar days to substantially
complete the Work, in accordance with the following:
Description Amount
A 1. Guaranteed Maximum Price $[number]
2. Total number of calendar days to substantially
complete the Work
[number] days
3. Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement) $[number]/day
B 4. Adjustment Amount (2 x 3) $[number]
A+B 5. Amount for Comparison of Bids $[number]
B. The purpose of the process in the table above is only to calculate the lowest price-plus-time
(A+B) bid amount for bid comparison purposes. The price for completion of the Work (the
Contract Price) is based on the cost of the Work, plus a fee, subject to a guaranteed maximum
price, as set forth in the Agreement.
C. Bonds required under Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions will be based on the Contract
Price.
Deleted
ARTICLE 6—TIME OF COMPLETION
Guidance Notes
1. Bid Form language regarding time of completion (Contract Times) should follow exactly the language
of the Agreement. In most cases the time for completion will be determined by the Owner and set
forth in the Agreement, prior to distribution of the Bidding Documents to prospective Bidders.
2. For some projects it may be desirable to include space for Bidders to indicate variations in completion
times, but note that in most jurisdictions it is required that an award be made to the responsible
bidder submitting the lowest bid, based on a standard time for completion established by Owner.
When Owner establishes a standard time for completion, use Paragraph 6.01 below.
3. When the basis of award is a price—plus-time (A+B) Bid, these time-of-completion provisions must
be carefully coordinated with the criteria for Bid comparisons.
4. Paragraph 6.04 should be retained in all cases in which the Contract provides for liquidated damages
for late completion. Provisions for liquidated damages should appear in the Agreement and may be
cross-referenced in other places in the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents. It is
unwise to repeat liquidated damages provisions in the Bid or to summarize or paraphrase them here
or elsewhere.
Notes to User—Select appropriate paragraph for the Project:
1. Use Paragraph 6.01 if the Contract Times are designated by Owner. Use of this wording, which refers
to the Contract Times in the Agreement, will avoid a potential conflict with the Agreement.
2. Use Paragraph 6.02 if Bidders are permitted to designate the Contract Times by calendar date.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 6 of 10
3. Use Paragraph 6.03 if Bidders are permitted to designate the Contract Times by calendar days.
4. Delete the paragraphs not used. Do not delete Paragraph 6.04.
6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for
final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the
dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.
6.02 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete on or before [Bidder inserts date], and
will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General
Conditions on or before [Bidder inserts date].
Deleted
6.03 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete within [Bidder inserts number]
calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in
Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and will be completed and ready for final payment in
accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within [Bidder inserts number]
calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
Deleted
6.04 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.
ARTICLE 7—BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: ACCEPTANCE PERIOD, INSTRUCTIONS, AND RECEIPT OF
ADDENDA
Guidance Notes
1. Paragraph 7.01.A contains a 60-day bid acceptance period. Bid acceptance periods may vary,
particularly if funding agency reviews and approvals are required. Bid acceptance periods may also be
set by statute.
2. Bid acceptance periods should be coordinated with Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. See the
section commenting on Article 4 of the General Conditions in EJCDC® C-001, Commentary on the 2018
EJCDC Construction Documents (2018), for additional information.
3. It is important that all Bidders receive and acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (Paragraph 7.03). To
be certain that Bidders receive all Addenda, use of methods providing proof of receipt, such as courier
services or return receipt requested mail, is suggested. If email is used, Bidders should be requested
to confirm receipt by the same means. Ensure any specific requirements of the Owner concerning
issuance and receipt of Addenda are reviewed and addressed. Note also the definition of Addenda in
Article 1 of General Conditions, indicating that by definition Addenda are documents issued prior to
the opening of Bids.
4. When the Contractor is required to accept assignment of a procurement contract, previously entered
into by the Owner (as Buyer) with a supplier or manufacturer (as Seller) for the direct purchase of
goods and special services, insert at this location in the Bid Form language regarding the assignment.
For model language, refer to EJCDC® P-200, Instructions to Bidders for Procurement Contract. See also
the Lump Sum for Purchase of Assigned Goods for this assignment, in the Guidance Notes for Article 3.
For additional information on assigning a procurement contract, refer to EJCDC® P-001, Commentary
on the EJCDC Procurement Documents.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 7 of 10
7.01 Bid Acceptance Period
A. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer
period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
7.02 Instructions to Bidders
A. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without
limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security.
7.03 Receipt of Addenda
A. Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: [Add rows as needed. Bidder
is to complete table.]
Addendum Number Addendum Date

ARTICLE 8—BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
Guidance Notes
1. If any changes to the Bidder’s Representations (Paragraph 8.01) are made here in the Bid Form,
corresponding changes may need to be made in the Agreement. For example, if there are no reports
or drawings of the type referred to in Paragraph 8.01.C, then either modify or delete that paragraph
here, and do the same with the parallel paragraph in the Agreement.
2. For public work, relevant requirements of Laws and Regulations in the jurisdiction where Work is to
be performed should be coordinated with the language of the representations (Paragraph 8.01) and
the anti-collusion/corruption certifications (Paragraph 8.02).
8.01 Bidder’s Representations
A. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents the following:
1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, including Addenda.
2. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and
adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may
affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
3. Bidder is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and
performance of the Work, including all American Iron and Steel requirements.
4. Bidder has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions
at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing
surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and
drawings.
5. Bidder has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 8 of 10
the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings.
6. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly
known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Technical
Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the
effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and
performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, if selected as Contractor; and
(c) Bidder’s (Contractor’s) safety precautions and programs.
7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Bidder
agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data
are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract
Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.
8. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at
the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
9. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and of discrepancies
between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof
by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
10. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
11. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and
furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.
8.02 Bidder’s Certifications
A. The Bidder certifies the following:
1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or
rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation.
2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false
or sham Bid.
3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding.
4. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in
competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02.A:
a. Corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value
likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process.
b. Fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at
artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and
open competition.
EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 9 of 10
c. Collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,
with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices
at artificial, non-competitive levels.
d. Coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or
affect the execution of the Contract.

EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 10 of 10
BIDDER hereby submits this Bid as set forth above:
Bidder:

(typed or printed name of organization)
By:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Date:
(typed or printed)
If Bidder is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.

Attest:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Date:
(typed or printed)
Address for giving notices:

Bidder’s Contact:
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Phone:
Email:
Address:

Bidder’s Contractor License No.: (if applicable)

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 2
BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM)
Bidder Surety
Name: Name:
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):

Owner Bid
Name: Oakley City Project (name and location):
Address (principal place of business): Oakley-Weber Well
960 W. Center Street
P.O. Box 129
Oakley, Utah 84055
Bid Due Date: [Enter date bid is due]
Bond
Penal Sum:
Date of Bond:
Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Bid Bond,
do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
Bidder Surety

(Full formal name of Bidder) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. (2) Provide execution by any additional parties, such as
joint venturers, if necessary.

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 2
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,
and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond.
Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under
the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder occurs upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by
the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation will be null and void if:
3.1. Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents
(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2. All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents
(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety
when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with
reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount
due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice
of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award
including extensions does not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s
written consent.
6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after
the Bid due date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond will be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in
the state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses
shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by
United States Postal Service registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and
will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the
authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute,
seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of
any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set
forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said
statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith continues in full force and
effect.
11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 7
ARTICLE 1—GENERAL INFORMATION
1.01 Provide contact information for the Business:
Legal Name of Business:
Corporate Office
Name: Phone number:
Title: Email address:
Business address of corporate office:

Local Office
Name: Phone number:
Title: Email address:
Business address of local office:

1.02 Provide information on the Business’s organizational structure:
Form of Business: ☐ Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation
☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Joint Venture comprised of the following companies:
1.
2.
3.
Provide a separate Qualification Statement for each Joint Venturer.
Date Business was formed: State in which Business was formed:
Is this Business authorized to operate in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No ☐ Pending
1.03 Identify all businesses that own Business in whole or in part (25% or greater), or that are wholly
or partly (25% or greater) owned by Business:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 7
1.04 Provide information regarding the Business’s officers, partners, and limits of authority.
Name: Title:
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:
ARTICLE 2—LICENSING
2.01 Provide information regarding licensure for Business:
Name of License:
Licensing Agency:
License No: Expiration Date:
Name of License:
Licensing Agency:
License No: Expiration Date:
ARTICLE 3—DIVERSE BUSINESS CERTIFICATIONS
3.01 Provide information regarding Business’s Diverse Business Certification, if any. Provide evidence
of current certification.
Certification Certifying Agency Certification
Date
☐ Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
☐ Minority Business Enterprise
☐ Woman-Owned Business Enterprise
☐ Small Business Enterprise
☐ Disabled Business Enterprise
☐ Veteran-Owned Business Enterprise
☐ Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Business
☐ HUBZone Business (Historically
Underutilized) Business
☐ Other
☐ None
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 7
ARTICLE 4—SAFETY
4.01 Provide information regarding Business’s safety organization and safety performance.
Name of Business’s Safety Officer:
Safety Certifications
Certification Name Issuing Agency Expiration

4.02 Provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate (EMR), Total Recordable
Frequency Rate (TRFR) for incidents, and Total Number of Recorded Manhours (MH) for the last
3 years and the EMR, TRFR, and MH history for the last 3 years of any proposed Subcontractor(s)
that will provide Work valued at 10% or more of the Contract Price. Provide documentation of
the EMR history for Business and Subcontractor(s).
Year
Company EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH

ARTICLE 5—FINANCIAL
5.01 Provide information regarding the Business’s financial stability. Provide the most recent audited
financial statement, and if such audited financial statement is not current, also provide the most
current financial statement.
Financial Institution:
Business address:
Date of Business’s most recent financial statement: ☐ Attached
Date of Business’s most recent audited financial statement: ☐ Attached
Financial indicators from the most recent financial statement
Contractor’s Current Ratio (Current Assets ÷ Current Liabilities)
Contractor’s Quick Ratio ((Cash and Cash Equivalents + Accounts Receivable +
Short Term Investments) ÷ Current Liabilities)
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 7
ARTICLE 6—SURETY INFORMATION
6.01 Provide information regarding the surety company that will issue required bonds on behalf of the
Business, including but not limited to performance and payment bonds.
Surety Name:
Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of:
Is surety authorized to provide surety bonds in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Is surety listed in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on
Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” published in Department Circular 570
(as amended) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Mailing Address
(principal place of business):

Physical Address
(principal place of business):

Phone (main): Phone (claims):
ARTICLE 7—INSURANCE
7.01 Provide information regarding Business’s insurance company(s), including but not limited to its
Commercial General Liability carrier. Provide information for each provider.
Name of insurance provider, and type of policy (CLE, auto, etc.):
Insurance Provider Type of Policy (Coverage Provided)

Are providers licensed or authorized to issue policies in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Does provider have an A.M. Best Rating of A-VII or better? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Mailing Address
(principal place of business):

Physical Address
(principal place of business):

Phone (main):

Phone (claims):
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 7
ARTICLE 8—CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE
8.01 Provide information that will identify the overall size and capacity of the Business.
Average number of current full-time employees:
Estimate of revenue for the current year:
Estimate of revenue for the previous year:
8.02 Provide information regarding the Business’s previous contracting experience.
Years of experience with projects like the proposed project:
As a general contractor: As a joint venturer:
Has Business, or a predecessor in interest, or an affiliate identified in Paragraph 1.03:
Been disqualified as a bidder by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Been barred from contracting by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Been released from a bid in the past 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Defaulted on a project or failed to complete any contract awarded to it? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents or in
a change order? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Been a party to any currently pending litigation or arbitration? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Provide full details in a separate attachment if the response to any of these questions is Yes.
8.03 List all projects currently under contract in Schedule A and provide indicated information.
8.04 List a minimum of three and a maximum of six projects completed in the last 5 years in Schedule B
and provide indicated information to demonstrate the Business’s experience with projects similar
in type and cost of construction.
8.05 In Schedule C, provide information on key individuals whom Business intends to assign to the
Project. Provide resumes for those individuals included in Schedule C. Key individuals include the
Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Quality Manager, and Safety Manager. Resumes may
be provided for Business’s key leaders as well.
ARTICLE 9—REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS
9.01 Provide the following information with the Statement of Qualifications:
A. If Business is a Joint Venture, separate Qualifications Statements for each Joint Venturer, as
required in Paragraph 1.02.
B. Diverse Business Certifications if required by Paragraph 3.01.
C. Certification of Business’s safety performance if required by Paragraph 4.02.
D. Financial statements as required by Paragraph 5.01.
EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 7
E. Attachments providing additional information as required by Paragraph 8.02.
F. Schedule A (Current Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.03.
G. Schedule B (Previous Experience with Similar Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.04.
H. Schedule C (Key Individuals) and resumes for the key individuals listed, as required by
Paragraph 8.05.
I. Additional items as pertinent.

EJCDC C-451, Qualifications Statement.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 7 of 7
This Statement of Qualifications is offered by:
Business:
(typed or printed name of organization)
By:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Date:
(date signed)
(If Business is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative:
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Address:

Phone:
Email:
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 3
Schedule A—Current Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 3
Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 3
Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule C—Key Individuals.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 2
Schedule C—Key Individuals
Project Manager
Name of individual
Years of experience as project manager
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project manager
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project
completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role on
project
Candidate’s role on
project

Project Superintendent
Name of individual
Years of experience as project superintendent
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project superintendent
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project
completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s
role on project
Candidate’s
role on project

Safety Manager
EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule C—Key Individuals.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 2
Name of individual
Years of experience as project manager
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project manager
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project
completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role on
project
Candidate’s role on
project

Quality Control Manager
Name of individual
Years of experience as project superintendent
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project superintendent
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project
completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s
role on project
Candidate’s
role on project

EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 2
NOTICE OF AWARD
Date of Issuance:
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
Bidder:
Bidder’s Address:
You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated [date] for the above Contract, and that you are
the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for:
This work consists of demolition of an existing well house and construction of new waterline
piping and a well house pump station located in Oakley City, Utah east of the Cottonwood
Tanks just off the Weber Wild Road. Across from the 250,000 gallon Cottonw ood Tank.
The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $[Contract Price]. Contract Price is subject to adjustment
based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price
Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable.
(1) One Electronic unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one
copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made
available to Bidder electronically.
☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this
Notice of Award:
1. Deliver to Owner (1) One Electronic counterparts of the Agreement, signed by Bidder (as
Contractor).
2. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and
payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and in
the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.
3. Other conditions precedent (if any): None
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in
default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully signed
counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as
indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
Owner: Oakley City
By (signature):
Name (printed):
Title:
EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 2
Copy: Engineer
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 8
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)
This Agreement is by and between Oakley City (“Owner”) and [name of contracting entity]
(“Contractor”).
Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary
Conditions.
Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1—WORK
1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work
is generally described as follows:
This work consists of demolition of an existing well house and construction of new waterline
piping and a well house pump station located in Oakley City, Utah east of the Cottonwood Tanks
just off the Weber Wild Road. Across from the 250,000 gallon Cottonwood Tank.
ARTICLE 2—THE PROJECT
2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as
follows:
This project consists of demolition of an existing well house and construction of new waterline
piping and a well house pump station located in Oakley City, Utah east of the Cottonwood Tanks
just off the Weber Wild Road. Across from the 250,000 gallon Cottonwood Tank.
ARTICLE 3—ENGINEER
3.01 The Owner has retained Aqua Engineering (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume
all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer
in the Contract.
3.02 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Engineer.
ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time is of the Essence
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness
for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.02 Contract Times: Dates
A. The Work will be substantially complete on or before [date], and completed and ready for
final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before
[date].
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 2 of 8
4.03 Contract Times: Days
A. The Work will be substantially complete within 120 days after the date when the Contract
Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and
completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General
Conditions within 150 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
4.04 Milestones
A. Parts of the Work must be substantially completed on or before the following Milestone(s):
1.
4.05 Liquidated Damages
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above
and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and
Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties also
recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration
proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time.
Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as
liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty):
1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after
the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for Substantial
Completion, until the Work is substantially complete.
2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect,
refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted
pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall
pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed
and ready for final payment.
3. Milestones: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the time (as
duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for achievement of Milestone 1,
until Milestone 1 is achieved, or until the time specified for Substantial Completion is
reached, at which time the rate indicated in Paragraph 4.05.A.1 will apply, rather than the
Milestone rate.
4. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Milestones, Substantial Completion, and
final completion are not additive, and will not be imposed concurrently.
B. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such
liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is
precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or
consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this Agreement.
C. Deleted
4.06 Special Damages
A. Contractor shall reimburse Owner (1) for any fines or penalties imposed on Owner as a direct
result of the Contractor’s failure to attain Substantial Completion according to the Contract
Times, and (2) for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction
observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 3 of 8
Paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until
the Work is substantially complete.
B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to
complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times, Contractor shall reimburse Owner
for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation,
inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for
Work to be completed and ready for final payment (as duly adjusted pursuant to the
Contract), until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.
C. The special damages imposed in this paragraph are supplemental to any liquidated damages
for delayed completion established in this Agreement.
ARTICLE 5—CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract:
A. For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of $[number].
All specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with
Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.
B. For all Unit Price Work, an amount equal to the sum of the extended prices (established for
each separately identified item of Unit Price Work by multiplying the unit price times the
actual quantity of that item).
Unit Price Work
Item
No. Description Unit Estimated
Quantity
Unit
Price
Extended
Price
$ $
$ $
$ $
$ $
$ $
Total of all Extended Prices for Unit Price Work (subject to final
adjustment based on actual quantities) $
The extended prices for Unit Price Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Contract are
based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions,
estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and
classifications are to be made by Engineer.
C. Total of Lump Sum Amount and Unit Price Work (subject to final Unit Price adjustment)
$[number].
D. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 4 of 8
ARTICLE 6—PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General
Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage
A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment
on or about the [ordinal number, such as 5th] day of each month during performance of the
Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment
have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the
Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as
provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number
of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in
the Contract.
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to
the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited
to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract.
a. 95 percent of the value of the Work completed (with the balance being retainage).
1) Deleted
b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with
the balance being retainage).
Notes to Users—Typical values used in Paragraph 6.02.B are 100 percent and 200 percent respectively,
subject to Laws and Regulations specific to the Project.
B. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire construction to be provided under the
construction Contract Documents, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total
payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by
Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of
Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch
list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.
6.03 Final Payment
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the
Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions.
6.04 Consent of Surety
A. Owner will not make final payment, or return or release retainage at Substantial Completion
or any other time, unless Contractor submits written consent of the surety to such payment,
return, or release.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 5 of 8
6.05 Interest
A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate of 5 percent per annum.
ARTICLE 7—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.01 Contents
A. The Contract Documents consist of all of the following:
1. This Agreement.
2. Bonds:
a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney).
b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney).
3. General Conditions.
4. Supplementary Conditions.
5. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the project manual (copy of list
attached).
6. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of 1 sheets with each
sheet bearing the following general title: Proposed Oakley-Weber Well.
7. Drawings listed on the attached sheet index.
8. Addenda (numbers [number] to [number], inclusive).
9. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. None at this time.
10. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Contract and are not attached hereto:
a. Notice to Proceed.
b. Work Change Directives.
c. Change Orders.
d. Field Orders.
e. Warranty Bond, if any.
B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except
as expressly noted otherwise above).
C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7.
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in
the Contract.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 6 of 8
ARTICLE 8—REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS
8.01 Contractor’s Representations
A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following
representations:
1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including
Addenda.
2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and
adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may
affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and
performance of the Work.
4. Deleted
5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in
the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings.
6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information
commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Technical
Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the
effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and
performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety
precautions and programs.
7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,
Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price,
within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the
Contract.
8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and of
discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by
Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon
performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.
EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 7 of 8
8.02 Contractor’s Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this
Paragraph 8.02:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value
likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract
execution;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner,
(b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive
Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with
or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at
artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons
or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the
execution of the Contract.
8.03 Standard General Conditions
A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are
EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018), published
by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the party that has
furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the
standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as
highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions.

EJCDC® C-520, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 8 of 8
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.
This Agreement will be effective on [indicate date on which Contract becomes effective] (which is the
Effective Date of the Contract).
Owner: Contractor:

(typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization)
By: By:
(individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)
Date: Date:
(date signed) (date signed)
Name: Name:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)

(If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, a partnership, or a
joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)
Attest: Attest:
(individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative: Designated Representative:
Name: Name:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Address: Address:

Phone: Phone:
Email: Email:
(If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, attach evidence of
authority to sign. If [Type of Entity] is a public body,
attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or
other documents authorizing execution of this
Agreement.)
License No.:
(where applicable)
State:

EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 4
PERFORMANCE BOND
Contractor Surety
Name: Name:
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):

Owner Contract
Name: Oakley City Description (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): Oakley-Weber Well
Location: East of the Cottonwood Tanks just off
Weber Wild Road Oakley City Town Hall
960 W. Center Street
P.O. Box 129
Oakley City, Utah 84055
Contract Price:
Effective Date of Contract:
Bond
Bond Amount: [Amount]
Date of Bond: [Date]
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form:
☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 16
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this
Performance Bond, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer,
agent, or representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to
Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.

EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 4
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction
Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no
obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in
Paragraph 3.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond
will arise after:
3.1. The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering
declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice may indicate whether the Owner is requesting a
conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance.
If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after
receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a
conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference
requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s
receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the
Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such
an agreement does not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor
Default;
3.2. The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the
Surety; and
3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of
the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction
Contract.
4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does not
constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the
Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.
5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the
Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:
5.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the
Construction Contract;
5.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or
independent contractors;
5.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a
contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract
to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners
concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified
surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the
amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price
incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or
5.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor,
and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 4
5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and,
as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or
5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.
6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety
shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice
from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and
the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as
provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment, or the Surety has denied liability, in
whole or in part, without further notice, the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available
to the Owner.
7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to
the Owner will not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the
responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety will not be greater than those of the Owner under the
Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract
Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:
7.1. the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the
Construction Contract;
7.2. additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default,
and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and
7.3. liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract,
actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.
8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount
of this Bond.
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are
unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price will not be reduced or
set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action will accrue on this Bond to any
person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.
10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction
Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and must be instituted
within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor
ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under
this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the
minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be
applicable.
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown
on the page on which their signature appears.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the
location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said
statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted therefrom and provisions conforming to such
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 4
statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the
intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
14. Definitions
14.1. Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under
the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for
the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of
insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid
and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.
14.2. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the
cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the
Contract Documents.
14.3. Contractor Default—Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to
perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.
14.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the
Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply
with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
14.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and
Contractor.
15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor
in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.
16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]

EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 4
PAYMENT BOND
Contractor Surety
Name: Name:
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):

Owner Contract
Name: Oakley City Description (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): Oakley-Weber Well
Location: East of the Cottonwood Tank just off
Weber Wild Road.
Oakley City Town Hall
960 W. Center Street
P.O. Box 129
Oakley, Utah 84055
Contract Price:
Effective Date of Contract:
Bond
Bond Amount:
Date of Bond:
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form:
☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 18
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this
Payment Bond, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or
representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to
Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.

EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 4
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment
furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by
reference, subject to the following terms.
2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies,
and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking
payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction
Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner
under this Bond will arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the
address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the
Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment
furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such
claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the
Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim,
demand, lien, or suit.
5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following:
5.1. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor
5.1.1. have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with
substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the
materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was
done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last
furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and
5.1.2. have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
5.2. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim
to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that
is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under
Paragraph 5.1.1.
7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the
Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:
7.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt
of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts
that are disputed; and
7.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7.3. The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed
to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim,
except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement.
If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety
shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter
to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 4
8. The Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable
attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any
payments made in good faith by the Surety.
9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract will be used for the
performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction
performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that
all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to
satisfying obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to
use the funds for the completion of the work.
10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that
are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs
or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make
payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants
under this Bond.
11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction
Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located
or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety
pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone
or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract,
whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law,
the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will
be applicable.
13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the
address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims,
however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received.
14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the
location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said
statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such
statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the
intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the
Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
16. Definitions
16.1. Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:
16.1.1. The name of the Claimant;
16.1.2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment
furnished;
16.1.3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or
equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
16.1.4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 4
16.1.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or
equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
16.1.6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished
as of the date of the Claim;
16.1.7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
16.1.8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment
furnished as of the date of the Claim.
16.2. Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a
subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or
entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute
against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond is to include
without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas,
power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction
Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the
Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien
may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.
16.3. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the
cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the
Contract Documents.
16.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the
Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply
with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
16.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and
Contractor.
17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor
in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.
18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]
Prepared By
Endorsed By
This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect
to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the
contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Copyright© 2018
National Society of Professional Engineers
1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
[phone]
www.nspe.org
American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005
[phone]
www.acec.org
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
[phone]
www.asce.org
The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed
above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC
documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.
NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring
organizations above.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
The Application for Payment is used to facilitate periodic progress payments to the Contractor for
Work completed and for stored materials and equipment (referred to in this document as "Stored
Materials").
For additional information regarding the Application for Payment, see EJCDC® C–700, Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018), Paragraph 15.01, and EJCDC® C–001,
Commentary on the 2018 EJCDC Construction Documents (2018).
This document was prepared in Microsoft Excel due to the number of calculations involved in the
preparation of the Application for Payment. The application consists of a Summary worksheet, and
3 supporting worksheets: Lump Sum worksheet, Unit Price worksheet, and Stored Materials
worksheet.
Summary Worksheet — calculates the amount to be paid to the Contractor at the end of each
Application for Payment period. This calculation imports numbers from the supporting
worksheets to determine the value of the Work completed and Stored Materials, calculate
retainage, and deduct amounts previously paid to determine the amount the Contractor
should be paid for the current application period. Application periods are typically one month;
however these periods may be extended when Contractor's efforts do not result in the billable
completion of Work or storage of materials and equipment during the payment period.
Lump Sum Worksheet — calculates the total value for completed Work for which
compensation is paid on a Lump Sum basis. The schedule of values included in this worksheet
reflects a breakdown of lump sum Work items to which Contractor and Engineer have agreed,
pursuant to Article 2 of the General Conditions. Costs for Stored Materials associated with
lump sum items are included on this worksheet to calculate the total value for completed
lump sum Work and associated Stored Materials. This total is exported to the Summary
worksheet. Separate totals for Work Completed and for materials currently stored are also
exported to the Summary worksheet for use in calculating the amount of retainage to be held
for each.
Unit Price Worksheet — calculates the total value for completed Work for which
compensation is paid on a Unit Price basis. The schedule of values included in this spreadsheet
is typically a tabulation of Unit Price items from the Agreement. Costs for Stored Materials
associated with unit price items are included in this worksheet to calculate the total value for
completed Unit Price Work and associated Stored Materials. This total is exported to the
Summary worksheet. Separate totals for Work Completed and for Materials Currently Stored
are also exported to the Summary worksheet for use in calculating the amount of retainage to
be held for each.
PURPOSE AND INTENDED USE OF THE DOCUMENT
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT OVERVIEW
GUIDELINES FOR THE INTENDED USE OF EJCDC C-620,
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
2.4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Enter information regarding each item in the Lump Sum and/or Unit Price worksheets. For
Lump Sum projects, each item should represent an item in the schedule of values prepared by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer/Owner, breaking down the Lump Sum amount
into measurable components. For Unit Price contracts, use numbers from the Agreement as
the schedule of values. Specific information on the data to be entered into each column may
be seen by clicking on the header description for that column. Similar comments may be seen
for cells in the "Totals" row that indicates how the number is calculated and where this
number is exported to another part of the spreadsheet. See the Commentary for additional
information.
The equations in the Summary worksheet use numbers imported from both the Lump Sum
and Unit Price worksheets. Projects will typically either use the Lump Sum or the Unit Price
worksheet, but some projects may use both. If one of the worksheets is not used, it should be
hidden and not deleted. If it is deleted, Users will need to correct the equations in the
Summary worksheet by unprotecting the worksheet and editing the equations. To hide a
worksheet, right click on the worksheet tab at the bottom of the worksheet and select "Hide."
To unhide a worksheet, right click on any worksheet tab and select "Unhide," and then select
the worksheet to unhide and click "Okay." This same process may be used to hide these
Guidelines for Use.
Project-specific information is to be entered in the top portion (header) of the Summary
worksheet. This same information will automatically be copied to the other worksheets to
complete the headers on all other worksheets.
Outside of the header, data can be entered in non-shaded cells when the sheet is protected.
Cells shaded light blue contain equations that will automatically transfer data from other cells
or make calculations to complete the worksheet. Altering any of these cells can result in errors
in the Application for Payment. It is recommended that the worksheets be protected at all
times unless alterations are deliberately being made to the Application for Payment form
other than to enter data. See Paragraph 4.0 below for information on Protection of
Worksheets.
Stored Materials Worksheet — calculates the total value for materials and equipment that
have been purchased and are being stored until they are incorporated into the Work. This
worksheet adds materials and equipment to the worksheet as they are brought to the site and
stored; such Stored Materials are then deducted from the Stored Materials worksheet total as
they are incorporated into the Work, providing a running net value for the materials and
equipment remaining in storage. The values of Stored Materials must be manually added to
the Lump Sum or Unit Price line items. These do not automatically update when changes are
made. The amount of materials remaining in storage is eligible for payment but must be
tracked separately from Work completed since different retainage rates may apply to Work
completed and Stored Materials.
Instruc,ons for filling out the Payment Applica,on form
3.5 EJCDC C-620 contains calculation functions that are provided solely for the convenience of
the user. EJCDC and its Sponsoring Organizations do not warrant or guarantee the
accuracy or completeness of any information generated by the calculator.
4.0
4.1
4.2
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Protec,on of Worksheets
The cells in this Workbook that create the forms or contain equations have been coded to
"lock" the cells that should not be altered. It is recommended that the Workbook be Protected
(cells locked) at all times unless it is necessary to add or delete rows. Directions for adding and
deleting rows are provided in the next section. Passwords can be used to lock the Protect /
Unprotect settings on spreadsheets, however the worksheets in this workbook do not require
a password.
To unprotect a worksheet, click on the "Review" menu tab at the top of Excel, then click
"Unprotect Sheet." To protect a worksheet, click on the "Review" menu tab at the top of Excel,
then click "Protect Sheet." This will open a dialog box in which the User is allowed to select
protection options. It is recommended that only the top two checkboxes for "Select Locked
Cells" and "Select Unlocked Cells" be checked. This will reset the protection for the
Worksheet.
Adding and Dele,ng Rows
A limited number of blank rows are provided in the Lump Sum, Unit Price, and Stored Material
worksheets. Additional rows may be added to these worksheets by the User. The first step in
this process is to unprotect the worksheet as previously discussed. After the sheet is
unprotected, move with caution to prevent inadvertently deleting any cells that contain
equations. To insert a row, right click in the row heading at the left of the spreadsheet and
select "Insert." A new row will be inserted at the location where the cursor was placed in the
row heading. If more than one new row is desired, left click and drag the cursor to include the
desired number of rows, right click in the selected row headings and then select "Insert." It is
important that the line immediately above the "Totals" row not be included in the rows
selected. Doing so will require that equations in the "Totals" row be adjusted. When rows are
inserted, Excel automatically adjusts the equations to include the new rows, unless the row
directly above the "Totals" row is also selected.
After new rows are inserted, it is important to copy a line from one of the original rows so
correct formatting and equations are copied into each new row. To do this, select the row to
be copied by clicking the cell in Column A and dragging the cursor to the last column in the
table. Then select "Copy" from the menu or type CTRL+C to copy the cells. Excel will show
that this row has been copied by showing a moving dashed line around the cells that are to be
copied. Then select the new rows into which the information is to be copied as before and
select Paste from the menu or type CTRL+V.
To delete an unused row, right click in the row heading on the left of the spreadsheet for the
row to be deleted and select "Delete." The selected row will be deleted. If more than one row
is to be deleted, left click and drag the cursor to the desired number of rows to be deleted and
then right click to open the menu and select "Delete." Unlike the admonition on adding new
rows, it is okay to delete the row just above the "Totals" row.
After rows have been added or deleted, it is important reset the worksheet protection.
6.0
7.0
Saving Files
License Agreement
This document is subject to the terms and conditions of the License Agreement, 2018 EJCDC®
Construction Series Documents. A copy of the License Agreement was furnished at the time of
purchase of this document, and is available for review at www.ejcdc.org and the websites of
EJCDC’s sponsoring organizaLons.
This file is provided as a Microsoft ® Excel Open XML workbook template (.xltx) to prevent this file
from being inadvertently changed. When an application for payment is created for a specific
project it should be saved as an Excel workbook (.xlxs) file. To do this, select Save As (F12), type in a
new file name and select Excel Workbook (.xlxs) from the drop down Save As Type menu.
From
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.X Work Completed =
b.X Stored Materials =
c.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Current Contract Price (Line 1 + Line 2)
Contractor:
-$
Net change by Change Orders
-$
-$
-$
-$
-$
-$
to
Original Contract Price
$ -
-$
$ -
Total Work completed and materials stored to date
(Sum of Column G Lump Sum Total and Column J Unit Price Total)
Retainage
Total Retainage (Line 5.a + Line 5.b)
Amount eligible to date (Line 4 - Line 5.c)
Less previous payments (Line 6 from prior application)
Amount due this application
-$
By:
Title:
Date:
By:
Title:
Date:
Recommended by Engineer
Application Date:
Approved by Funding Agency
By:
Title:
Date:
By:
Title:
Date:
Contractor:
Engineer:
Project:
-$
Signature:Date:
Contractor's Certification
Balance to finish, including retainage (Line 3 - Line 4 + Line 5.c)
Approved by Owner
The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following:
(1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been
applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by
prior Applications for Payment;
(2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or covered by this
Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all liens, security interests, and
encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such
liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and
(3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not
defective.
Contractor's Application for Payment
Application No.:
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Application Period:
Contract:
Owner:
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.: From to
A C D E F G H I
(D + E) From
Previous
Application
($)
This Period
($)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ Original Contract Totals
Work Completed
Item No. Description
Scheduled Value
($)
Application Period:Application Date:
Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work Contractor's Application for Payment
Owner's Project No.:
B
Original Contract
% of Scheduled
Value (G / C)
(%)
Balance to Finish (C
- G)
($)
Materials Currently
Stored (not in D or
E)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(D + E + F)
($)
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Lump Sum
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.9 of 13
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.: From to
A C D E F G H I
(D + E) From
Previous
Application
($)
This Period
($)
Work Completed
Item No. Description
Scheduled Value
($)
Application Period:Application Date:
Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work Contractor's Application for Payment
Owner's Project No.:
B
% of Scheduled
Value (G / C)
(%)
Balance to Finish (C
- G)
($)
Materials Currently
Stored (not in D or
E)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(D + E + F)
($)
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Change Order Totals
Project Totals
Original Contract and Change Orders
Change Orders
Lump Sum
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.10 of 13
From to
A C D E F G H I J K L
Item Quantity Units
Unit Price
($)
Value of Bid Item
(C X E)
($)
Estimated
Quantity
Incorporated in
the Work
Value of Work
Completed to Date
(E X G)
($)
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ Original Contract Totals
B
Original Contract
% of
Value of
Item
(J / F)
(%)
Balance to Finish (F
- J)
($)Description
Work Completed
Materials
Currently Stored
(not in G)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(H + I)
($)
Contract Information
Bid Item
No.
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application Date:Application Period:Application No.:
Contractor's Application for PaymentProgress Estimate - Unit Price Work
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Owner:
Unit Price
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.11 of 13
From to
A C D E F G H I J K L
Item Quantity Units
Unit Price
($)
Value of Bid Item
(C X E)
($)
Estimated
Quantity
Incorporated in
the Work
Value of Work
Completed to Date
(E X G)
($)
B
% of
Value of
Item
(J / F)
(%)
Balance to Finish (F
- J)
($)Description
Work Completed
Materials
Currently Stored
(not in G)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(H + I)
($)
Contract Information
Bid Item
No.
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application Date:Application Period:Application No.:
Contractor's Application for PaymentProgress Estimate - Unit Price Work
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Owner:
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Change Order Totals
Original Contract and Change Orders
Change Orders
Project Totals
Unit Price
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.12 of 13
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.:Application Period: From to
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Previous Amount
Stored
($)
Amount Stored this
Period
($)
Amount Stored to
Date (G+H)
($)
Amount Previously
Incorporated in the
Work
($)
Amount
Incorporated in the
Work this Period
($)
Total Amount
Incorporated in the
Work
(J+K)
($)
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Stored Materials Summary
Totals
Storage Location
Description of Materials or
Equipment Stored
Submittal No.
(with
Specification
Section No.)
Supplier
Invoice No.
Item No.
(Lump Sum Tab)
or Bid Item No.
(Unit Price Tab)
Application Date:
Contractor's Application for Payment
Materials Stored Incorporated in Work
Materials
Remaining in
Storage
(I-L)
($)
Application
No. When
Materials
Placed in
Storage
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Stored Materials
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.13 of 13
Prepared By
Endorsed By
This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect
to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the
contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Copyright© 2018
National Society of Professional Engineers
1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
[phone]
www.nspe.org
American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005
[phone]
www.acec.org
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
[phone]
www.asce.org
The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed
above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC
documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.
NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring
organizations above.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
The Application for Payment is used to facilitate periodic progress payments to the Contractor for
Work completed and for stored materials and equipment (referred to in this document as "Stored
Materials").
For additional information regarding the Application for Payment, see EJCDC® C–700, Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018), Paragraph 15.01, and EJCDC® C–001,
Commentary on the 2018 EJCDC Construction Documents (2018).
This document was prepared in Microsoft Excel due to the number of calculations involved in the
preparation of the Application for Payment. The application consists of a Summary worksheet, and
3 supporting worksheets: Lump Sum worksheet, Unit Price worksheet, and Stored Materials
worksheet.
Summary Worksheet — calculates the amount to be paid to the Contractor at the end of each
Application for Payment period. This calculation imports numbers from the supporting
worksheets to determine the value of the Work completed and Stored Materials, calculate
retainage, and deduct amounts previously paid to determine the amount the Contractor
should be paid for the current application period. Application periods are typically one month;
however these periods may be extended when Contractor's efforts do not result in the billable
completion of Work or storage of materials and equipment during the payment period.
Lump Sum Worksheet — calculates the total value for completed Work for which
compensation is paid on a Lump Sum basis. The schedule of values included in this worksheet
reflects a breakdown of lump sum Work items to which Contractor and Engineer have agreed,
pursuant to Article 2 of the General Conditions. Costs for Stored Materials associated with
lump sum items are included on this worksheet to calculate the total value for completed
lump sum Work and associated Stored Materials. This total is exported to the Summary
worksheet. Separate totals for Work Completed and for materials currently stored are also
exported to the Summary worksheet for use in calculating the amount of retainage to be held
for each.
Unit Price Worksheet — calculates the total value for completed Work for which
compensation is paid on a Unit Price basis. The schedule of values included in this spreadsheet
is typically a tabulation of Unit Price items from the Agreement. Costs for Stored Materials
associated with unit price items are included in this worksheet to calculate the total value for
completed Unit Price Work and associated Stored Materials. This total is exported to the
Summary worksheet. Separate totals for Work Completed and for Materials Currently Stored
are also exported to the Summary worksheet for use in calculating the amount of retainage to
be held for each.
PURPOSE AND INTENDED USE OF THE DOCUMENT
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT OVERVIEW
GUIDELINES FOR THE INTENDED USE OF EJCDC C-620,
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
2.4
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Enter information regarding each item in the Lump Sum and/or Unit Price worksheets. For
Lump Sum projects, each item should represent an item in the schedule of values prepared by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer/Owner, breaking down the Lump Sum amount
into measurable components. For Unit Price contracts, use numbers from the Agreement as
the schedule of values. Specific information on the data to be entered into each column may
be seen by clicking on the header description for that column. Similar comments may be seen
for cells in the "Totals" row that indicates how the number is calculated and where this
number is exported to another part of the spreadsheet. See the Commentary for additional
information.
The equations in the Summary worksheet use numbers imported from both the Lump Sum
and Unit Price worksheets. Projects will typically either use the Lump Sum or the Unit Price
worksheet, but some projects may use both. If one of the worksheets is not used, it should be
hidden and not deleted. If it is deleted, Users will need to correct the equations in the
Summary worksheet by unprotecting the worksheet and editing the equations. To hide a
worksheet, right click on the worksheet tab at the bottom of the worksheet and select "Hide."
To unhide a worksheet, right click on any worksheet tab and select "Unhide," and then select
the worksheet to unhide and click "Okay." This same process may be used to hide these
Guidelines for Use.
Project-specific information is to be entered in the top portion (header) of the Summary
worksheet. This same information will automatically be copied to the other worksheets to
complete the headers on all other worksheets.
Outside of the header, data can be entered in non-shaded cells when the sheet is protected.
Cells shaded light blue contain equations that will automatically transfer data from other cells
or make calculations to complete the worksheet. Altering any of these cells can result in errors
in the Application for Payment. It is recommended that the worksheets be protected at all
times unless alterations are deliberately being made to the Application for Payment form
other than to enter data. See Paragraph 4.0 below for information on Protection of
Worksheets.
Stored Materials Worksheet — calculates the total value for materials and equipment that
have been purchased and are being stored until they are incorporated into the Work. This
worksheet adds materials and equipment to the worksheet as they are brought to the site and
stored; such Stored Materials are then deducted from the Stored Materials worksheet total as
they are incorporated into the Work, providing a running net value for the materials and
equipment remaining in storage. The values of Stored Materials must be manually added to
the Lump Sum or Unit Price line items. These do not automatically update when changes are
made. The amount of materials remaining in storage is eligible for payment but must be
tracked separately from Work completed since different retainage rates may apply to Work
completed and Stored Materials.
Instruc,ons for filling out the Payment Applica,on form
4.0
4.1
4.2
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Protec,on of Worksheets
The cells in this Workbook that create the forms or contain equations have been coded to
"lock" the cells that should not be altered. It is recommended that the Workbook be Protected
(cells locked) at all times unless it is necessary to add or delete rows. Directions for adding and
deleting rows are provided in the next section. Passwords can be used to lock the Protect /
Unprotect settings on spreadsheets, however the worksheets in this workbook do not require
a password.
To unprotect a worksheet, click on the "Review" menu tab at the top of Excel, then click
"Unprotect Sheet." To protect a worksheet, click on the "Review" menu tab at the top of Excel,
then click "Protect Sheet." This will open a dialog box in which the User is allowed to select
protection options. It is recommended that only the top two checkboxes for "Select Locked
Cells" and "Select Unlocked Cells" be checked. This will reset the protection for the
Worksheet.
Adding and Dele,ng Rows
A limited number of blank rows are provided in the Lump Sum, Unit Price, and Stored Material
worksheets. Additional rows may be added to these worksheets by the User. The first step in
this process is to unprotect the worksheet as previously discussed. After the sheet is
unprotected, move with caution to prevent inadvertently deleting any cells that contain
equations. To insert a row, right click in the row heading at the left of the spreadsheet and
select "Insert." A new row will be inserted at the location where the cursor was placed in the
row heading. If more than one new row is desired, left click and drag the cursor to include the
desired number of rows, right click in the selected row headings and then select "Insert." It is
important that the line immediately above the "Totals" row not be included in the rows
selected. Doing so will require that equations in the "Totals" row be adjusted. When rows are
inserted, Excel automatically adjusts the equations to include the new rows, unless the row
directly above the "Totals" row is also selected.
After new rows are inserted, it is important to copy a line from one of the original rows so
correct formatting and equations are copied into each new row. To do this, select the row to
be copied by clicking the cell in Column A and dragging the cursor to the last column in the
table. Then select "Copy" from the menu or type CTRL+C to copy the cells. Excel will show
that this row has been copied by showing a moving dashed line around the cells that are to be
copied. Then select the new rows into which the information is to be copied as before and
select Paste from the menu or type CTRL+V.
To delete an unused row, right click in the row heading on the left of the spreadsheet for the
row to be deleted and select "Delete." The selected row will be deleted. If more than one row
is to be deleted, left click and drag the cursor to the desired number of rows to be deleted and
then right click to open the menu and select "Delete." Unlike the admonition on adding new
rows, it is okay to delete the row just above the "Totals" row.
After rows have been added or deleted, it is important reset the worksheet protection.
6.0
7.0
Saving Files
License Agreement
This document is subject to the terms and conditions of the License Agreement, 2018 EJCDC®
Construction Series Documents. A copy of the License Agreement was furnished at the time of
purchase of this document, and is available for review at www.ejcdc.org and the websites of
EJCDC’s sponsoring organizaLons.
This file is provided as a Microsoft ® Excel Open XML workbook template (.xltx) to prevent this file
from being inadvertently changed. When an application for payment is created for a specific
project it should be saved as an Excel workbook (.xlxs) file. To do this, select Save As (F12), type in a
new file name and select Excel Workbook (.xlxs) from the drop down Save As Type menu.
From
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.X
b.X
c.
6.
7.
8.
9.
-$
-$
-$
Current Contract Price (Line 1 + Line 2)
Contractor:
-$
Net change by Change Orders
to
Original Contract Price
$ -
-$
$ -
Total Work completed and materials stored to date
(Sum of Column G Lump Sum Total and Column J Unit Price Total)
Retainage
Work Completed
Stored Materials
Total Retainage (Line 5.a + Line 5.b)
Amount eligible to date (Line 4 - Line 5.c)
Less previous payments (Line 6 from prior application)
Amount due this application
-$
-$
-$
-$
Application Date:
Approved by Funding Agency
By:
Title:
Date:
By:
Title:
Date:
By:
Title:
Date:
By:
Title:
-$
Date:
Signature:Date:
Contractor's Certification
Balance to finish, including retainage (Line 3 - Line 4)
Approved by Owner
The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following:
(1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been
applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by
prior Applications for Payment;
(2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or covered by this
Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all liens, security interests, and
encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such
liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and
(3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not
defective.
Recommended by Engineer
Contractor's Application for Payment
Application No.:
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Application Period:
Contract:
Owner:
Contractor:
Engineer:
Project:
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.: From to
A C D E F G H I
(D + E) From
Previous
Application
($)
This Period
($)
- - -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ Original Contract Totals
Work Completed
Item No. Description
Scheduled Value
($)
Application Period:Application Date:
Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work Contractor's Application for Payment
Owner's Project No.:
B
Original Contract
% of Scheduled
Value (G / C)
(%)
Balance to Finish (C
- G)
($)
Materials Currently
Stored (not in D or
E)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(D + E + F)
($)
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Lump Sum
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.8 of 12
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.: From to
A C D E F G H I
(D + E) From
Previous
Application
($)
This Period
($)
Work Completed
Item No. Description
Scheduled Value
($)
Application Period:Application Date:
Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work Contractor's Application for Payment
Owner's Project No.:
B
% of Scheduled
Value (G / C)
(%)
Balance to Finish (C
- G)
($)
Materials Currently
Stored (not in D or
E)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(D + E + F)
($)
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Change Order Totals
Project Totals
Original Contract and Change Orders
Change Orders
Lump Sum
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.9 of 12
From to
A C D E F G H I J K L
Item Quantity Units
Unit Price
($)
Value of Bid Item
(C X E)
($)
Estimated
Quantity
Incorporated in
the Work
Value of Work
Completed to Date
(E X G)
($)
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ Original Contract Totals
B
Original Contract
% of
Value of
Item
(J / F)
(%)
Balance to Finish (F
- J)
($)Description
Work Completed
Materials
Currently Stored
(not in G)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(H + I)
($)
Contract Information
Bid Item
No.
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application Date:Application Period:Application No.:
Contractor's Application for PaymentProgress Estimate - Unit Price Work
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Owner:
Unit Price
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.10 of 12
From to
A C D E F G H I J K L
Item Quantity Units
Unit Price
($)
Value of Bid Item
(C X E)
($)
Estimated
Quantity
Incorporated in
the Work
Value of Work
Completed to Date
(E X G)
($)
B
% of
Value of
Item
(J / F)
(%)
Balance to Finish (F
- J)
($)Description
Work Completed
Materials
Currently Stored
(not in G)
($)
Work Completed
and Materials
Stored to Date
(H + I)
($)
Contract Information
Bid Item
No.
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application Date:Application Period:Application No.:
Contractor's Application for PaymentProgress Estimate - Unit Price Work
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Owner:
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Change Order Totals
Original Contract and Change Orders
Change Orders
Project Totals
Unit Price
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.11 of 12
Owner:
Engineer:
Contractor:
Project:
Contract:
Application No.:Application Period: From to
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Previous Amount
Stored
($)
Amount Stored this
Period
($)
Amount Stored to
Date (G+H)
($)
Amount Previously
Incorporated in the
Work
($)
Amount
Incorporated in the
Work this Period
($)
Total Amount
Incorporated in the
Work
(J+K)
($)
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
-$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$
Stored Materials Summary
Totals
Storage Location
Description of Materials or
Equipment Stored
Submittal No.
(with
Specification
Section No.)
Supplier
Invoice No.
Item No.
(Lump Sum Tab)
or Bid Item No.
(Unit Price Tab)
Application Date:
Contractor's Application for Payment
Materials Stored Incorporated in Work
Materials
Remaining in
Storage
(I-L)
($)
Application
No. When
Materials
Placed in
Storage
Owner's Project No.:
Engineer's Project No.:
Contractor's Project No.:
Stored Materials
EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
(c) 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.12 of 12
EJCDC® C-625, Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 1
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
This ☐ Preliminary ☐ Final Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:
☐ All Work ☐ The following specified portions of the Work:
[Describe the portion of the work for which Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued]
Date of Substantial Completion: [Enter date, as determined by Engineer]
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the
Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate
of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual correction period and
applicable warranties required by the Contract.
A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-
inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of mutual
agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.
The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work must be as provided in
the Contract, except as amended as follows:
Amendments to Owner’s Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows:
[List amendments to Owner’s Responsibilities]
Amendments to Contractor’s Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows:
[List amendments to Contractor’s Responsibilities]
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:
[List attachments such as punch list; other documents]
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Engineer

By (signature):
Name (printed):
Title:
EJCDC® C-626, Notice of Acceptability of Work.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 1
NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
Notice Date: Effective Date of the Construction Contract:
The Engineer hereby gives notice to the Owner and Contractor that Engineer recommends final payment
to Contractor, and that the Work furnished and performed by Contractor under the Construction Contract
is acceptable, expressly subject to the provisions of the Construction Contract’s Contract Documents
(“Contract Documents”) and of the Agreement between Owner and Engineer for Professional Services
dated [date of professional services agreement] (“Owner-Engineer Agreement”). This Notice of
Acceptability of Work (Notice) is made expressly subject to the following terms and conditions to which
all who receive and rely on said Notice agree:
1. This Notice has been prepared with the skill and care ordinarily used by members of the
engineering profession practicing under similar conditions at the same time and in the same
locality.
2. This Notice reflects and is an expression of the Engineer’s professional opinion.
3. This Notice has been prepared to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information, and belief as of
the Notice Date.
4. This Notice is based entirely on and expressly limited by the scope of services Engineer has been
employed by Owner to perform or furnish during construction of the Project (including
observation of the Contractor’s Work) under the Owner-Engineer Agreement, and applies only to
facts that are within Engineer’s knowledge or could reasonably have been ascertained by Engineer
as a result of carrying out the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer under such
Owner-Engineer Agreement.
5. This Notice is not a guarantee or warranty of Contractor’s performance under the Construction
Contract, an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to defective Work discovered after final inspection, nor an assumption of
responsibility for any failure of Contractor to furnish and perform the Work thereunder in
accordance with the Contract Documents, or to otherwise comply with the Contract Documents
or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein.
6. This Notice does not relieve Contractor of any surviving obligations under the Construction
Contract, and is subject to Owner’s reservations of rights with respect to completion and final
payment.
Engineer
By (signature):
Name (printed):
Title:

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 1 of 5
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1—Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................................ 1
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6
Article 2—Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................................... 7
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance......................................... 7
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7
2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 8
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................................. 8
2.06 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 8
Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 9
3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 9
3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 10
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 10
3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 11
Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 11
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 11
4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11
4.03 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 11
4.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 12
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 12
Article 5—Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 13
5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 13
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 14
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 15
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 16

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 2 of 5
5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 17
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 19
Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................. 21
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 21
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ................................................................................................... 22
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 24
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .............................................................................. 25
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation ..................................................................................................... 25
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .......................................................... 27
Article 7—Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 27
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction .................................................................... 27
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 27
7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 27
7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 28
7.05 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 28
7.06 Substitutes .................................................................................................................................. 29
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 31
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 32
7.09 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 33
7.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 33
7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 33
7.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 33
7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 34
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 35
7.15 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 35
7.16 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 35
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 38
7.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 39
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 39
Article 8—Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 40
8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 40
8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41
8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 41

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 3 of 5
Article 9—Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 42
9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 42
9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 42
9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 42
9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 42
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 43
9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 43
9.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 43
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 43
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 43
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 43
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ........................................................................................... 43
9.12 Safety Programs .......................................................................................................................... 43
Article 10—Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................... 44
10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 44
10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 44
10.03 Resident Project Representative............................................................................................. 44
10.04 Engineer’s Authority ............................................................................................................... 44
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 45
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 45
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 45
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................ 45
Article 11—Changes to the Contract .......................................................................................................... 46
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract .......................................................................... 46
11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 46
11.03 Work Change Directives .......................................................................................................... 46
11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 47
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 47
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 47
11.07 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 47
11.08 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 49
11.09 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 49
11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 50

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 4 of 5
Article 12—Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 50
12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Article 13—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 51
13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 51
13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 55
13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 55
Article 14—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 56
14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 56
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 56
14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 57
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 58
14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 58
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 58
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 59
Article 15—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 59
15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 59
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 62
15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 62
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ........................................................................................................ 63
15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 64
15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 64
15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 65
15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 66
Article 16—Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 67
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 67
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 67
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience................................................................................. 68
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 68
Article 17—Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 69
17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 69
Article 18—Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 69
18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 69
18.02 Computation of Times............................................................................................................. 69

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 5 of 5
18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 70
18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 70
18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 70
18.06 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 70
18.07 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 70
18.08 Assignment of Contract........................................................................................................... 70
18.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 70
18.10 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 70

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 70
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with
initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning
indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which
clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract
Documents.
2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth
the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and
designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.
3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to
Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for
the Work to be performed.
5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.
6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and
all Addenda.
7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,
Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.
8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of
the Contract.
9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with
the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of
the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;
challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the
terms of the Contract.
10. Claim
a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract
Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 70
requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the
Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal;
seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or
seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision
regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that
Engineer has declined to address.
c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with
the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4,
concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final
payment.
d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous
waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever
that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations
regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any
hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material.
12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor
concerning the Work.
13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together
comprise the Contract.
14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve
Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work.
16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance
of the Work.
17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.
18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and
character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.
19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the
Contract becomes effective.
20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to
correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not
limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format.
21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project
website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or
communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions,
including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 70
recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and
recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted
by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of
Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of
Electronic Documents.
22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the
Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern
in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property
exposed thereto.
a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work,
or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained
pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the
Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as
part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and
obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and
all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real
property, or personal property.
27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires
Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work.
28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the
Bid.
29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the
Work.
30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the
Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant
to the terms of the Contract.
31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the
sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the
Work within the Contract Times.
32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors,
and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and
start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 70
33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to
assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR)
includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.
34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are
representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which
such portion of the Work will be judged.
35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required
submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals.
36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating
portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for
reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and
submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether
approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.
38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner
upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and
such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of
Contractor.
39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and
certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.
40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with
any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.
41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the
Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a
Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include
Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs;
sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results
of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site
quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’
instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and
maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other
such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not
approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals,
Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation
or clarification are not Submittals.
42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part
thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part
of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 70
43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract.
44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.
46. Technical Data
a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions,
with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or
existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or
subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at the Site.
b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to
conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at
the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs,
recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of
subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information
regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental,
or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made
available to Contractor.
c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities
are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and
instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings.
47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines,
conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other
such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems
that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable
television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil
products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water,
other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or
system is not an Underground Facility.
48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce
such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment
into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and
commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.
50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 70
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that
require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract
Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,”
“as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an
exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,”
“suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are
used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that
such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in
general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with
the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such
term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty
or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to
undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight.
D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
1. does not conform to the Contract Documents;
2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test,
or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04).
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some
other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific
services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words
“furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said
services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 7 of 70
F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times”
or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to
(1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as
warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed.
G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance
A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the
Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and
payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds).
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the
Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional
insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of
insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the
extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific
insurance policies.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and
all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor,
with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other
evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully
signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format
(PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the
Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other
design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract
available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this
provision to Engineer.
2.03 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise
required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for
starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones
specified in the Contract;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices
of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 8 of 70
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of
overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer,
and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties
as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for
handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment,
electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual
to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under
the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information,
render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective
party.
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended
by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules
submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to
Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression
of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose
on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or
progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full
responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a
workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance
if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the
Work.
4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and
resubmit the schedule.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor
may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means.
B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and
Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.
C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic
Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long-
term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the
recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware
differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 9 of 70
ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is
as binding as if required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the
electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from
such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will
govern.
D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether
written or oral.
E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided
herein.
F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any
Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will
be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable
provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates:
1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the
benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or
2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any
money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may
otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations
1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference
standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or
Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard
specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the
time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids),
except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and
no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of
Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract
Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective
to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 10 of 70
inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for
Engineer.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies
1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each
part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and
verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict,
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of,
and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity,
or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an
amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the
Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the
Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or
Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference
standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly
report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected
thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or
by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual
knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions
of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in
resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the
Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or
the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference
as a Contract Document); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would
result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents
A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall
submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the
Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—
RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as
possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 11 of 70
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or
decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and
binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner,
unless it appeals by filing a Claim.
C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents
that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract
Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3)
other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and
Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner
and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party
may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer
or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings,
Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any
other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written
verification or adaptation by Engineer; or
2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any
such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or
violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the
Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after
the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever
date is earlier.
4.02 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence
to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date.
4.03 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which
in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 12 of 70
established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or
relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer
whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for
the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by
professionally qualified personnel.
4.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in
Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in
changing the Contract Times.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must
be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.
B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by
Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress
A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes
with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times.
B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay,
disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption,
and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be
deemed to be within the control of Contractor.
C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by
unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those
for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment
in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the
delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption,
or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph
include but are not limited to the following:
1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and
earthquakes;
2. Abnormal weather conditions;
3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than
those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or
adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in
Article 8); and
4. Acts of war or terrorism.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 13 of 70
D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as
follows:
1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the
delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to
completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay,
disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or
interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by
Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is
otherwise entitled.
3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of
Article 11.
E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract
Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following:
1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment;
2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the
progress of the Work;
3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the
progress of the Work;
4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such
cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and
5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07.
Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer
may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the
activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect
of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work.
F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting
from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility
that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are
governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress
of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.
ARTICLE 5—SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
5.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which
Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 14 of 70
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of
record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are
to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s
or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the
storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent
areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise,
and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably
encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other
materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the
Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c)
damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or
similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses
sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such
damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or
conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area
because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the
Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take
immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b)
promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such
owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute
resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer,
and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party
indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by,
or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or
conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the
Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish,
and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the
Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor
shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 15 of 70
and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be
loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part
of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site
that contain Technical Data;
2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those
drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site
(except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings,
pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A.
Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not
intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data.
C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the
Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such
reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such
express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the
Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b.
D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data,
Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors,
with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings;
3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as
record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival
documents concerning the Site; or
4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 16 of 70
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is
uncovered or revealed at the Site:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled
to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate;
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications;
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing
the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except
in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about
such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in
connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written
statement permitting Contractor to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,
Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine
whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the
condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site
condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information
from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption
of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for
any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s
findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written
findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to
Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in
question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating
whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.
D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with
the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s
review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question
has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer
may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work.
E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or
any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 17 of 70
Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to
the following:
a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in
Paragraph 5.04.A;
b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,
c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the
provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise;
b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed
as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and
contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract
Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such
commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such
adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days
after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the
subsurface or physical condition in question.
F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights
and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities.
Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental
Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or
location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions.
5.05 Underground Facilities
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor
shall have full responsibility for:
1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities
at the Site;
2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and
Regulations;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 18 of 70
3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such
Underground Facilities during the course of construction;
4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground
Facilities, during construction; and
5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing
any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or
revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or
indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after
becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or
performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility.
C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will:
1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground
Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy;
2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare
recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to
Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the
Underground Facility in question;
3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent,
if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and
4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such
Underground Facility.
D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s
written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement
to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question
addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating
whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.
E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with
the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s
issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and
conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a
preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such
Work.
F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 19 of 70
or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy,
or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in
Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to
the following:
a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;
b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the
provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and
c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such
adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days
after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the
Underground Facility in question.
4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the
owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records,
or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance with the current edition of
ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility
Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect
or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this
Paragraph 5.05.F.
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have
been identified at or adjacent to the Site;
2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have
been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy
of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to
such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no
such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the
Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical
Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of
their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors, with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 20 of 70
of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs
incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous
Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such
removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the
scope of the Work.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents
of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for
whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing
and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such
Constituents of Concern.
E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose
removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within
the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates
a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or
otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in
any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3)
notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner
shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified
expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting
with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely
obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by
Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the
Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the
Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for
the associated costs.
F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental
Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related
thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition
and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2)
specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any,
of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such
special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or
expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30
days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a
Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is
subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08.
H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based
on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 21 of 70
conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such
condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in
Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own
forces or others in accordance with Article 8.
I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from
and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration,
or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or
indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as
Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the
Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by
Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I
obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of
that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a
Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor
is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone
for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to
indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or
entity’s own negligence.
K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents
of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least
equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year
after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period
specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or
Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other
provisions of the Contract.
B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary
Conditions or other provisions of the Contract.
C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by
Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 22 of 70
Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding
Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and
supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond
signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that
individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is
effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond.
D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or
authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the
required amounts.
E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or
the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify
Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such
notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and
surety requirements above.
F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from
the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming
to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the
Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.
H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity
claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance
of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in
the Supplementary Conditions.
B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or
Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the
required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary
Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall
have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.
C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and
“Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet
the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary
Conditions.
D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has
obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon
request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such
required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of
applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant
exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 23 of 70
Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing
information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those
applicable to this Contract.
E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained
and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon
request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such
required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of
applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all
relevant exclusions. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block
out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific
to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract.
F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other
party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor
to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a
waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.
G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at
Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability
policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided
by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of
Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.
H. Contractor shall require:
1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general
liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project, and
to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability
policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and
2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in
the Project.
I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the
Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to
the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required
coverage.
J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement
to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate
set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of
purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under
Article 16.
K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required
insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent
insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required
to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 24 of 70
L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. Contractor is
responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its
interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems
necessary.
M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted
to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise.
N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will
contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or
renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing
policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing
policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer.
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation,
Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of
the Supplementary Conditions.
B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented
must:
1. include at least the specific coverages required;
2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations,
whichever is greater;
3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D),
and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter
when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty
or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks
arising from the Contract;
4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by
Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may
be liable; and
5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements.
C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,
employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle
liability policies, if required by this Contract, must:
1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities
identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions;
2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
and consultants of all such additional insureds;
3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby
(including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations);

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 25 of 70
4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and
5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to
liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and
omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s
operations.
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance
A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall
purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in
the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts
as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations).
The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the
Supplementary Conditions.
B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for
obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or
facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach
or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a
replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk
insurance, and will be maintained until the Work is complete, as set forth in
Paragraph 15.06.D.
C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial
Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner
will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such
property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such
property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost
basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The
builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of
such property insurance.
D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the
Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then
Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will
provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an
endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial
occupancy or use.
E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the
Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity
or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects
to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property
insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation
A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with
Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary
Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or
damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 26 of 70
Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, or subcontractors.
1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of
each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting
from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other
property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against
Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any
of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused.
2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may
have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or
otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or
consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of
the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent
structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially
completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after
Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to
Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss
or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or
against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the
insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed
prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss.
1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out
of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such
policies.
C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption,
loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to
Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured
peril, risk, or cause of loss.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions
whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its
consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants,
and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out
of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s
risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 27 of 70
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by
Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy.
Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other
insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state
its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such
claim.
B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple
insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary
for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named
insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance
required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and
distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or
applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged
Work, using allocated insurance proceeds.
ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction.
B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or
other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor
shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at
Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services
under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to
(1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing
of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such
services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services.
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer
except under extraordinary circumstances.
7.03 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the
Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 28 of 70
B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of
Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any
other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is
responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.
C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property
at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all
Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday.
Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may
perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only
with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.
7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume
full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water,
sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are
specifically called for in the Contract Documents.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality,
except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and
guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If
required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of
required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,
protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable
Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
7.05 “Or Equals”
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more
proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor
furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended
to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or
description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal”
item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of
equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances
described below.
1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material
proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that
no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For
the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be
considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item:
1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 29 of 70
2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;
3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and
4) is not objectionable to Owner.
b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the
Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item
named in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal”
item at Contractor’s expense.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data
about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-
equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete
and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal,” which will be evidenced by
an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor
in writing of any negative determination.
D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will
result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be
final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the
Contract.
E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or
material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may
request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06.
7.06 Substitutes
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of
equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is
followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that
Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances
described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement
of related construction at the Site.
1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for
review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than
Contractor.
2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as
supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the
circumstances.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 30 of 70
3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute
item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:
a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will:
1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the
general design;
2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and
3) be suited to the same use as the item specified.
b. will state:
1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
necessitate a change in Contract Times;
2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute item; and
3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with
the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
c. will identify:
1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and
2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.
d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in
Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors
affected by any resulting change.
B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.
Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute
item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished,
installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the
proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a
Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related
impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise
Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a
substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a
substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the
reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall
also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the
Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting
from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 31 of 70
E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute
at Contractor’s expense.
F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor
shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s
denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an
appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of
reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change
Proposal.
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work.
Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention
of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve
Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of
designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.
C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish
or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.
D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to
Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already
deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or
otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner
unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days.
E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may
require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not
require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has
submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and
Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then
Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so
identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation.
Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or
Supplier.
F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor
to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall
initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of
replacement.
G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a
replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 32 of 70
H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors
and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and
Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.
I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating
the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an
appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to
the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information
about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor
or Supplier.
M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer
or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly
allowed in this Contract.
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in
the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for
use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its
use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or
royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or
relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as
being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or
copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights
incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the
Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract
Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 33 of 70
7.09 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all
construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor,
when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental
charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable
at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for
providing permanent service to the Work.
7.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
7.11 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible
for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know
that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses,
and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other
action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the
Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve
Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the
submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of
performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having
an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar
taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such
changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change
Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.
7.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written
interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such
record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during
construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available
to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record
documents to Engineer.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 34 of 70
7.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance
of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.
B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties
and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and
supervision of safety precautions and programs.
C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the
necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage
on or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground
Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of
construction.
D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier,
or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform
any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or
Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any
of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or
indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground
Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other
contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when
Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with
them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in
progress.
G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any.
Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the
Supplementary Conditions or Specifications.
H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s
safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must
comply while at the Site.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 35 of 70
I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the
Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in
accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the
Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction
obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly
known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required
to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance
with Laws or Regulations.
7.15 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss.
Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant
changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an
emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer
determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or
Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
7.16 Submittals
A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements
1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall:
a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and
Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b. determine and verify:
1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design
criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar
information with respect to the Submittal;
2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated
application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation
pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto;
c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the
Submittal.
2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with
respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the
Submittal.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 36 of 70
3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice
of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate fro m the
Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on
the Shop Drawing itself.
B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop
Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted
Schedule of Submittals.
1. Shop Drawings
a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to
show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes
required by Paragraph 7.16.C.
2. Samples
a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.
b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data
such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may
require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required
by Paragraph 7.16.C.
3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule
of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the
pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the
accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to
determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation
in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be
compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident
thereto.
3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of
the assembly in which the item functions.
4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor
from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents
unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and
Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation
thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 37 of 70
document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification.
5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor
from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B.
6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the
Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.
7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample
will result in such item becoming a Contract Document.
8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and
commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 7.16.C.4.
D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required
number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for
review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other
than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals.
2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient
information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two
resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent
resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for
Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments
due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.
3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and
Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement
for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.
E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs
1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and
Owner-delegated designs:
a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract
Documents.
b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted
or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established
in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted.
c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the
requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the
Submittal.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 38 of 70
d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding
the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document.
2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of
Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05.
F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by
the provisions of Paragraph 7.19.
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s
warranty and guarantee.
B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by,
Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which
Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited
only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided,
however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08:
1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the
discovery that such Work is defective; and
2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under
Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the
notice.
C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom
Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s
warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17:
1. Observations by Engineer;
2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment
related thereto by Owner;
4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;
6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;
7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08;
8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 39 of 70
9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner.
E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by
Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the
assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner
for the Work described in the assigned contract.
7.18 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other
obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses,
damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the
performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost,
judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage
to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use
resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable.
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor
or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of
the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type
of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the
Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that
Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design.
B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided
pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional,
whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional
must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations.
C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by
Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or
other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when
submitted by Contractor to Engineer.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 40 of 70
D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness
of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design
professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject
to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the
Contract Documents.
E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations
regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals
furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following
limited purposes:
1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19;
2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance
and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and
3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents.
F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria
specified by Owner or Engineer.
G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and
Regulations.
ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
8.01 Other Work
A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may
perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s
employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also
arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or
adjacent to the Site.
B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through
contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior
to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any
third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site,
Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.
C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs
such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is
performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for
the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other
work.
D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to
properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate
with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,
excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or
alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be
affected.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 41 of 70
E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work.
Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and
proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party
utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed
without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay,
disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of
Paragraph 4.05.C.3.
8.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to
the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to
arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be
set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any
such other work:
1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various contractors;
2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility;
and
3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority
and responsibility for such coordination.
8.03 Legal Relationships
A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s
employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has
arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its
Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the
performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any
Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times
under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering
event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account
information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract
Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning
utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price
will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other
contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that
is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract
Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 42 of 70
B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,
disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner
performing other work at or adjacent to the Site.
1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may
impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or
utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach
of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B.
2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees,
Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable
direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of
Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s
other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may
impose a set-off against payments due Contractor.
C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor,
or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s
failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim
arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or
adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor,
Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all
parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve
the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify
and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay,
disruption, or interference.
ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all
communications to Contractor through Engineer.
9.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor
makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s
status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer.
9.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
9.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 43 of 70
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings
A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.
B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points
are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.
C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of
explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating
to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
9.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and
property insurance are set forth in Article 6.
9.07 Change Orders
A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
Paragraph 14.02.B.
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible
for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not
be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set
forth in Paragraph 5.06.
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that
financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract
(including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).
9.12 Safety Programs
A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.
B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 44 of 70
ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract.
10.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and
qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of the various
aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and
observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is
proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of
confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On
the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress
of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a
result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise,
direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods,
techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
10.03 Resident Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project
Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress
and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project
Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the
responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in
Paragraph 10.07.
B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or
employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such
individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
10.04 Engineer’s Authority
A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.
B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16.
C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and
other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of
professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19.
D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 45 of 70
E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed
by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and
judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for
initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such
decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will
not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings,
interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other
provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance
of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in
contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply
with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by
Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content
complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and
approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply
to the Resident Project Representative, if any.
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has
been informed.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 46 of 70
ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract
A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive,
or a Field Order.
B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order.
C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,
(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other
engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner
and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the
recommendation of the Engineer.
11.02 Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:
1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including
any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with
a Work Change Directive;
2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly
contested such set-off;
3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05,
(b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or
Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the
parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work
involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other
engineering or technical matters; and
4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under:
Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09,
concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments
resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to
determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions.
B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed
under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if
fully executed.
11.03 Work Change Directives
A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is
evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work
Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following
negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract
Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the
terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including
Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 47 of 70
B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and:
1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary,
then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later
than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive.
2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then
Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after
issuance of the Work Change Directive.
11.04 Field Orders
A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design
concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner
and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly.
B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a
Change Proposal as provided herein.
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving
the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or
technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation.
B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor
have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by
a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease
construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be
performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.
C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor
reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety
obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as
provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in
Paragraph 14.05.C.2.
11.07 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any
Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 48 of 70
1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,
then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to
the provisions of Paragraph 13.03);
2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for
overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or
3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the
basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be
determined as follows:
1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will
be 15 percent;
b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent;
c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a
fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and
11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the
costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that
actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself
and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually
performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs
incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that
for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be
no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually
performs the Work;
d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4,
13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;
e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net
decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to
5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and
f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal,
the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the
costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs,
Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs,
Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants
costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to
each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a
through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 49 of 70
11.08 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any
Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times,
are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05.
11.09 Change Proposals
A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an
adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer
concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of
the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek
other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in
Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the
proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract
Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related
issues.
B. Change Proposal Procedures
1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after
the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision.
2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed
change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within
15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal.
a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must
comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed
accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for
the subject Work.
The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting
data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the
entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.
3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and
consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its
discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before
conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then
Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date
specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal.
4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s
supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will
conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of
the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in
whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a
copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 50 of 70
Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter
submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the
Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the
denial under Article 12.
5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor,
unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.
C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design
(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or
other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that
the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of
such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to
seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.
D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a
written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B.
11.10 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not
limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of
any such change.
ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS
12.01 Claims
A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the
Claims process set forth in this article:
1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;
2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief
under the Contract Documents;
3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design
(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work,
or other engineering or technical matters; and
4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer
has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B.
B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to
the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving
rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision
under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its
information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the
Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or
Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the
supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 51 of 70
and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to
which Contractor is entitled.
C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full
consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the
exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for
resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing
and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.
D. Mediation
1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to
mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim
submittal and response process.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement,
either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the
Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the
mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and
decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as
determined by the mediator.
3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.
E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part,
such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party
invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.
F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim
may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does
not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time
thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the
Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of
the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes
the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.
G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether
through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is
approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and
binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a
Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the
Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 13—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum
of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined
below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:
1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract
Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 52 of 70
2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off,
or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is
determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those
additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because
of the event giving rise to the adjustment.
B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in
the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the
locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will
include only the following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in
advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation,
superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel
employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on
the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs
include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which
include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’
compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours,
on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent
authorized by Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including
costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in
connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits
funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts
will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of
surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make
provisions so that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.
If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors
acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then
determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any
subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work
plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same
manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services
specifically related to the Work.
5. Other costs consisting of the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 53 of 70
consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items
used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.
1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or
sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the
material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis
of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not
be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the
purchase cost of such item.
c. Construction Equipment Rental
1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in
accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any
surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction
equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading,
assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance
with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment,
machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for
the Work.
2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-related
entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental
rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be
computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will
include all operating costs.
3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal,
Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included
costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the
changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The
cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them
may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with
the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible
amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with
Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other
than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses
include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such
losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the
purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 54 of 70
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier
services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the
Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals,
general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants,
purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel
employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office
for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon
schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered
by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to
be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools.
3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the
Site.
4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including
but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment
wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims.
7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.
D. Contractor’s Fee
1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then:
a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective
Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement.
b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other
adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be
determined as follows:
1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work,
the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes.
2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or
deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2.
2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other
basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 55 of 70
Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis
of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2.
E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be
determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish
and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices.
Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal
business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions,
drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work
and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years
after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner,
and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor.
13.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in
the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums
and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:
1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)
of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and
all applicable taxes; and
2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in
the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for
any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance,
if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by
Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the
Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted.
13.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal
to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the
estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to
Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate
to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed
by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by
recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 56 of 70
thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual
conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, and the final adjustment of
Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following
paragraph.
E. Adjustments in Unit Price
1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to
an item of Unit Price Work if:
a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the
Agreement; and
b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed
materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change.
2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes
in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other
Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and
Contractor.
3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item.
ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
14.01 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site
and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor
shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s
safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs
as applicable.
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts
thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing
personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.
B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory,
or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required
by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred
in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of
Paragraph 14.05.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of
such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such
inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer
the required certificates of inspection or approval.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 57 of 70
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and
tests required:
1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate
responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;
2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work;
3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;
4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be
incorporated into the Work; and
5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to
Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories,
or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,
Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.
F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by
Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense
unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the
same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
14.03 Defective Work
A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.
B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and
to reject defective Work.
C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer
has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective
Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed,
or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and
replace it with Work that is not defective.
E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action
that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said
Work.
F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with
respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising
out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection,
testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines
levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the
costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final
payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 58 of 70
losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable
set-off against payments due under Article 15.
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final
payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design
intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor
shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid
by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order.
If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the
diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against
payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final
payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.
14.05 Uncovering Work
A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether
or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if
requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the
covering, all at Contractor’s expense.
C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose,
or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require,
that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and
equipment.
1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all
claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and
pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to
impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable
to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and
reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then
Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the
Work is not defective.
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work
will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 59 of 70
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right
of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this
right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or
entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then
Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees,
Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to
enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights
and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs
against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include
but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in
the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and
remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will
serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application
for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of
Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work
completed by Contractor during the pay period.
B. Applications for Payments
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment
(but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review
an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the
Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in
writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale,
invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 60 of 70
establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s
request, documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and
equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment
are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other
arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to
Owner.
3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor
have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior
Applications for Payment.
4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
C. Review of Applications
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each
resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the
Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing
Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will
constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of
the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s
review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to
the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon
Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract
Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work
under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation);
and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to
have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress,
or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically
assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle
Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to
Contractor.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 61 of 70
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending
payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will
impose responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work;
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto;
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to
Contractor’s performance of the Work;
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used
the money paid by Owner; or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to
Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s
opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in
Paragraph 15.01.C.2.
6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s
opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or
e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would
constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under
the Contract Documents.
D. Payment Becomes Due
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s
recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become
due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
E. Reductions in Payment by Owner
1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is
entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:
a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the
performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or
damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the
Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace
injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and
patent infringement;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 62 of 70
b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage,
delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;
c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible;
e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews,
evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to
manufacturing or assembly facilities;
f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore
justify a termination for cause;
j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to
achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;
k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and
discharge of such Liens; or
l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended.
2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or
on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate
written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the
specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining
after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if
Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding
on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the
amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by
Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished
under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects,
and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the
time of payment by Owner.
15.03 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that
Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 63 of 70
submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected
before final payment.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider
the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial
Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary
certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the
certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the
preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete,
Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify
Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor.
If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of
Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then
Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final
certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or
corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes
justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.
D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and
Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial
Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s
risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent
property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in
writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work,
property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the
Work.
E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor
may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the
progress payment procedures set forth above.
F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the punch list.
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents,
or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and
usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 64 of 70
significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject
to the following conditions:
1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy
any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor,
Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for
that part of the Work.
2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor
considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue
a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall
make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If
Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer
will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer
considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of
Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that
part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other
property insurance.
15.05 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will
notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or
agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
15.06 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record
documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment.
2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered)
by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work,
materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other
title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 65 of 70
d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and
e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien
rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved
by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor
that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for
which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible,
or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been
paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release
or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner
to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks
payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.
B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of
Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s
review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by
the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and
Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10
days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s
recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner
for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are
necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with
respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in
which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for
Payment.
C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application
for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is
acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of
Paragraph 15.07.
D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready
for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment
and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work.
E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by
Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not
limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this
Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to
Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from
Engineer.
15.07 Waiver of Claims
A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other
damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 66 of 70
appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner.
Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment.
B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all
claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly
submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.
15.08 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special
guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that
any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the
Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of
defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s
written instructions:
1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas;
2. correct such defective Work;
3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not
defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the
work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures.
B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or
repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the
correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under
Paragraph 7.17.B.
C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period,
Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced.
Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration
or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such
removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of
invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under
Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure
to pay.
D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start
to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected
or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect
to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or
removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 67 of 70
F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and
warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a
waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer.
Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change
Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date
fixed for resumption of Work.
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by
Contractor and justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);
2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the
Contract Documents;
3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or
4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving
Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration
that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to:
1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice
that the Contract is terminated; and
2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.
C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has
terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take
possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete
the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if
Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure
to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.
E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to
receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 68 of 70
attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to
Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and
damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such
claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their
reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When
exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain
the lowest price for the Work performed.
F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under
any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor
by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions
of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions
of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience
A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such
case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses; and
3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred
to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.
B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-termination
overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90
consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)
Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3)
Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then
Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or
Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract
and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,
or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,
Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until
payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 69 of 70
provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a
Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for
expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by
this paragraph.
ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
17.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final
resolution under the provisions of this article:
1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full,
pursuant to Article 12; and
2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the
Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made.
B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or
Contractor may:
1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the
Supplementary Conditions;
2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process;
or
3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or
mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the
dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS
18.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner,
Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered:
1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of
business;
2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or
3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject
line.
18.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude
the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a
Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,
such day will be omitted from the computation.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 70 of 70
18.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in
any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are
otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or
by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if
repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
18.04 Limitation of Damages
A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and
other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to
Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in
connection with any other project or anticipated project.
18.05 No Waiver
A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor
will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.
18.06 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or
given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination
of the Contract or of the services of Contractor.
18.07 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
18.08 Assignment of Contract
A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this
Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party
without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without
limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without
such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law),
and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no
assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the
Contract.
18.09 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to
the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all
covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
18.10 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts
of these General Conditions.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
TOC Page 1 of 1
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1— Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 1
Article 2— Preliminary Matters .................................................................................................................... 5
Article 3— Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................... 9
Article 4— Commencement and Progress of the Work ............................................................................... 9
Article 5— Site, Subsurface and Physical Conditions, Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 11
Article 6— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 12
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds................................................................................. 12
SC-6.01 – Disregard EJCDC Guidance Notes – Performance and Payment Bonds, Note 1. Performance
and Payment Bonds are required for WEP projects. ............................................................................ 12
Article 7— Contractor’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................... 16
Article 8— Other Work at the Site .............................................................................................................. 19
Article 9— Owner’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................... 19
Article 10— Engineer’s Status During Construction ................................................................................... 19
Article 11— Changes to the Contract ......................................................................................................... 21
Article 12— Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 22
Article 13— Cost of Work; Allowances, Unit Price Work ............................................................................ 22
Article 14— Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Accceptance of Defective Work .................. 22
Article 15— Payments to Contractor, Set Offs; Completions; Correction Period ...................................... 23
Article 16— Suspension of Work and Termination .................................................................................... 24
Article 17— Final Resolutions of Disputes .................................................................................................. 24
Article 18— Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................... 26
Exhibit A— Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange ..................................................... 1
Exhibit B— Foreseeable Bad Weather Days ................................................................................................. 1
Exhibit C— Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions ......................... 1
Deleted ...................................................................................................................................................... 1

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 33
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of
the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as
amended.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions.
Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are
applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in
the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC-4.05.”
ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
Deleted
SC-1.01.A.8 – Add the following at the end of the Paragraph:

The Change Order form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C-941 (2018). Agency approval is required
before Change Orders are effective.

SC-1.01.A.30 – Add the following at the end of the Paragraph:

For the purposes of Rural Development, this term is synonymous with the term “applicant” as defined
in 7 CFR 1780.7 (a) (1), (2) and (3) and is an entity receiving financial assistance from the federal
programs.

SC-1.01.A.50 – Add the following at the end of the Paragraph:

The Work Change Directive form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C-940 (2018). Agency approval is
required before a Work Change Directive is issued.

SC-1.01.A.51 – Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 1.01.A.50:

51. Agency - The Project is financed in whole or in part by USDA Rural Utilities Service pursuant to the
Consolidated Farm and Rural Development Act (7 USC Section 1921 et seq.). The Rural Utilities Service
programs are administered through the USDA Rural Development offices; therefore, the Agency for
these documents is USDA Rural Development.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 2 of 33
SC-1.01.A.52 – Add the following new paragraph with the title “American Iron and Steel Definitions”
immediately after Paragraph 1.01.A.51:

52.a American Iron and Steel (AIS) - Requirements mandated by Section 746 of Title VII of the
Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A - Agriculture, Rural Development, Food and Drug
Administration, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act, 2017) and subsequent statutes mandating
domestic preference for “iron and steel products,” meaning the following products, if made primarily
of iron or steel: lined or unlined pipes and fittings, manhole covers and other municipal castings,
hydrants, tanks, flanges, pipe clamps and restraints, valves, structural steel, reinforced precast
concrete, and Construction Materials. AIS requirements apply in each of the several states, the District
of Columbia, and each federally recognized Tribe, but not the U.S. Territories.

52.b Coating - A covering that is applied to the surface of an object. If a Coating is applied to the external
surface of a domestic iron or Steel component, and the application takes place outside of the United
States, said product would be considered a compliant product under the AIS requirements. Any Coating
processes that are applied to the external surface of Iron and Steel components that would otherwise
be AIS compliant would not disqualify the product from meeting the AIS requirements regardless of
where the Coating processes occur, provided that final assembly of the product occurs in the United
States. This exemption only applies to Coatings on the external surface of Iron and Steel components.
It does not apply to Coatings or linings on internal surfaces of Iron and Steel products, such as the lining
of lined pipes. All Manufacturing Processes for lined pipes, including the application of pipe lining, must
occur in the United States for the product to be compliant with AIS requirements.

52.c Construction Materials - Those articles, materials, or supplies made primarily of iron and/or steel,
that are permanently incorporated into the project, not including mechanical and/or electrical
components, equipment and systems. Some of these products may overlap with what is also considered
“structural steel”. Note: Mechanical and electrical components, equipment and systems are not
considered Construction Materials. See definitions of Mechanical Equipment and Electrical Equipment.

52.d Contractor’s Certification - Documentation submitted by the Contractor upon Substantial
Completion of the Contract that all Iron and Steel products installed were Produced in the United States.

52.e De Minimis - Various miscellaneous, incidental low-cost components that are essential for, but
incidental to, the construction and are incorporated into the physical structure of the project. Examples
of De Minimis components could include small washers, screws, fasteners (such as “off the shelf” nuts
and bolts), miscellaneous wire, corner bead, ancillary tube, signage, trash bins, door hardware etc. Costs
for such De Minimis components cumulatively may comprise no more than a total of five percent of the
total cost of the materials used in and incorporated into a project; the cost of an individual item may
not exceed one percent of the total cost of the materials used in and incorporated into a project.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 3 of 33
52.f Electrical Equipment - Typically any machine powered by electricity and includes components that
are part of the electrical distribution system. AIS does not apply to Electrical Equipment.

52.g Engineer’s Certification - Documentation submitted by the Engineer that Drawings, Specifications,
and Bidding Documents comply with AIS.

52.h Iron and Steel products - The following products made primarily of iron or steel: lined or unlined
pipes and fittings, manhole covers and other municipal castings, hydrants, tanks, flanges, pipe clamps
and restraints, valves, structural steel, reinforced precast concrete, and Construction Materials. Only
items on the above list made primarily of iron or steel, permanently incorporated into the project must
be Produced in the United States. For example, trench boxes, scaffolding or equipment, which are
removed from the project site upon completion of the project, are not required to be made of U.S. iron
or steel.

52.i Manufacturer - A Supplier, fabricator, distributor, materialman, or vendor is an entity with which
the Owner, Contractor or any subcontractor has contracted to furnish materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the project by the Owner, Contractor or a subcontractor.

52.j Manufacturer’s Certification - Documentation provided by the Manufacturer stating that the Iron
and Steel products to be used in the project are produced in the United States in accordance with
American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements. If items are purchased via a Supplier, distributor, vendor,
etc. from the Manufacturer directly, then the Supplier, distributor, vendor, etc. will be responsible for
obtaining and providing these certifications to the parties purchasing the products.

52.k Manufacturing Processes - Processes such as melting, refining, pouring, forming, rolling, drawing,
finishing, and fabricating. Further, if a domestic Iron and Steel product is taken out of the United States
for any part of the manufacturing process, it becomes foreign source material. However, raw materials
such as iron ore, limestone and iron and steel scrap are not covered by the AIS requirement, and the
material(s), if any, being applied as a Coating are similarly not covered. Non-iron or Steel components
of an Iron and Steel product may come from non-US sources. For example, for products such as valves
and hydrants, the individual non-Iron and Steel components do not have to be of domestic origin. Raw
materials, such as iron ore, limestone, scrap iron, and scrap steel, can come from non-U.S. sources.

52.l Mechanical Equipment - Typically equipment which has motorized parts and/or is powered by a
motor. AIS does not apply to Mechanical Equipment.

52.m Minor Components - Components within an iron and/or Steel product otherwise compliant with
the American Iron and Steel requirements; this waiver is typically used by Manufacturers. It differs from
the De Minimis definition in that De Minimis pertains to the entire project and the minor component
definition pertains to a single product. This waiver allows use of non-domestically produced
miscellaneous Minor Components comprising up to five percent of the total material cost of an

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 4 of 33
otherwise domestically produced Iron and Steel product. However, unless a separate waiver for a
product has been approved, all other Iron and Steel components in said product must still meet the AIS
requirements. This waiver does not exempt the whole product from the AIS requirements only Minor
Components within said product and the iron or Steel components of the product must be produced
domestically. Valves and hydrants are also subject to the cost ceiling requirements described here.
Examples of Minor Components could include items such as pins and springs in valves/hydrants,
bands/straps in couplings, and other low-cost items such as small fasteners etc.

52.n Municipal Castings - Cast iron or Steel infrastructure products that are melted and cast. They
typically provide access, protection, or housing for components incorporated into utility owned drinking
water, storm water, wastewater, and solid waste infrastructure.

52.o Primarily Iron or Steel - A product is made of greater than 50 percent iron or Steel on a materials
cost basis. An exception to this definition is reinforced precast concrete (see Definitions). All technical
specifications and applicable industry standards (e.g. NIST, NSF, AWWA) must be met. If a product is
determined to be less than 50 percent iron and/or steel, the AIS requirements do not apply. For
example, the cost of a fire hydrant includes:
 The cost of materials used for the iron portion of a fire hydrant (e.g. bonnet, body and shoe);
and
 The cost to pour and cast to create those components (e.g. labor and energy).
Not included in the cost are:
 The additional material costs for the non-iron or Steel internal workings of the hydrant (e.g.
stem, coupling, valve, seals, etc.); and
 The cost to assemble the internal workings into the hydrant body.

52.p Produced in the United States - The production in the United States of the iron or Steel products
used in the project requires that all Manufacturing Processes must take place in the United States, with
the exception of metallurgical processes involving refinement of steel additives.

52.q Reinforced Precast Concrete – Reinforced Precast Concrete structures must comply with AIS,
regardless of whether or not it consists of at least 50 percent iron or steel. The reinforcing bar and wire
must be Produced in the United States and meet the same standards as for any other i ron or Steel
product. Additionally, the casting of the concrete product must take place in the United States. The
cement and other raw materials used in concrete production are not required to be of domestic origin.
If the reinforced concrete is cast at the construction site, the reinforcing bar and wire are considered
Construction Materials and must be Produced in the United States.

52.r Steel - An alloy that includes at least 50 percent iron, between 0.02 and 2 percent carbon, and may
include other elements. Metallic elements such as chromium, nickel, molybdenum, manganese, and
silicon may be added during the melting of Steel for the purpose of enhancing properties such as

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 5 of 33
corrosion resistance, hardness, or strength. The definition of Steel covers carbon steel, alloy steel,
stainless steel, tool steel, and other specialty steels.

52.s Structural Steel - Rolled flanged shapes, having at least one dimension of their cross-section three
inches or greater, which are used in the construction of bridges, buildings, ships, railroad rolling stock,
and for numerous other constructional purposes. Such shapes are designated as wide-flange shapes,
standard I-beams, channels, angles, tees, and zees. Other shapes include but are not limited to, H-piles,
sheet piling, tie plates, cross ties, and those for other special purposes.
ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place:
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the
Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies (including
all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) of
insurance required to be provided by Contractor in this Contract. Contractor may block out
(redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or
endorsement furnished under this provision.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt from Contractor of the signed counterparts of
the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly
deliver to Contractor copies of the policies of insurance to be provided by Owner in this
Contract (if any). Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing
information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
2.02 Copies of Documents
SC-2.02 Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows:
Owner shall furnish to Contractor five printed copies of the Contract Documents (including
one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable
document format (PDF).
SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place:
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor 5 printed copies of conformed Contract Documents
incorporating and integrating all Addenda and any amendments negotiated prior to the
Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and
one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies of the
conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
B. Electronic Documents Protocol: The parties shall conform to the following provisions in
Paragraphs 2.06.B and 2.06.C, together referred to as the Electronic Documents Protocol
(“EDP” or “Protocol”) for exchange of electronic transmittals.
1. Basic Requirements

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 6 of 33
a. To the fullest extent practical, the parties agree to and will transmit and accept
Electronic Documents in an electronic or digital format using the procedures
described in this Protocol. Use of the Electronic Documents and any information
contained therein is subject to the requirements of this Protocol and other
provisions of the Contract.
b. The contents of the information in any Electronic Document will be the
responsibility of the transmitting party.
c. Electronic Documents as exchanged by this Protocol may be used in the same
manner as the printed versions of the same documents that are exchanged using
non-electronic format and methods, subject to the same governing requirements,
limitations, and restrictions, set forth in the Contract Documents.
d. Except as otherwise explicitly stated herein, the terms of this Protocol will be
incorporated into any other agreement or subcontract between a party and any
third party for any portion of the Work on the Project, or any Project -related
services, where that third party is, either directly or indirectly, required to exchange
Electronic Documents with a party or with Engineer. Nothing herein will modify the
requirements of the Contract regarding communications between and among the
parties and their subcontractors and consultants.
e. When transmitting Electronic Documents, the transmitting party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items
resulting from the receiving party’s use of software application packages, operating
systems, or computer hardware differing from those established in this Protocol.
f. Nothing herein negates any obligation 1) in the Contract to create, provide, or
maintain an original printed record version of Drawings and Specifications, signed
and sealed according to applicable Laws and Regulations; 2) to comply with any
applicable Law or Regulation governing the signing and sealing of design
documents or the signing and electronic transmission of any other documents; or
3) to comply with the notice requirements of Paragraph 18.01 of the General
Conditions.
2. System Infrastructure for Electronic Document Exchange
a. Each party will provide hardware, operating system(s) software, internet, e-mail,
and large file transfer functions (“System Infrastructure”) at its own cost and
sufficient for complying with the EDP requirements. With the exception of
minimum standards set forth in this EDP, and any explicit system requirements
specified by attachment to this EDP, it is the obligation of each party to determine,
for itself, its own System Infrastructure.
1) The maximum size of an email attachment for exchange of Electronic
Documents under this EDP is 10 MB. Attachments larger than that may be
exchanged using large file transfer functions or physical media.
2) Each Party assumes full and complete responsibility for any and all of its own
costs, delays, deficiencies, and errors associated with converting, translating,
updating, verifying, licensing, or otherwise enabling its System Infrastructure,
including operating systems and software, for use with respect to this EDP.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 7 of 33
b. Each party is responsible for its own system operations, security, back-up,
archiving, audits, printing resources, and other Information Technology (“IT”) for
maintaining operations of its System Infrastructure during the Project, including
coordination with the party’s individual(s) or entity responsible for managing its
System Infrastructure and capable of addressing routine communications and
other IT issues affecting the exchange of Electronic Documents.
c. Each party will operate and maintain industry-standard, industry-accepted,
ISO-standard, commercial-grade security software and systems that are intended
to protect the other party from: software viruses and other malicious software like
worms, trojans, adware; data breaches; loss of confidentiality; and other threats in
the transmission to or storage of information from the other parties, including
transmission of Electronic Documents by physical media such as CD/DVD/flash
drive/hard drive. To the extent that a party maintains and operates such security
software and systems, it shall not be liable to the other party for any breach of
system security.
d. In the case of disputes, conflicts, or modifications to the EDP required to address
issues affecting System Infrastructure, the parties shall cooperatively resolve the
issues; but, failing resolution, the Owner is authorized to make and require
reasonable and necessary changes to the EDP to effectuate its original intent. If the
changes cause additional cost or time to Contractor, not reasonably anticipated
under the original EDP, Contractor may seek an adjustment in price or time under
the appropriate process in the Contract.
e. Each party is responsible for its own back-up and archive of documents sent and
received during the term of the contract under this EDP, unless this EDP establishes
a Project document archive, either as part of a mandatory Project website or other
communications protocol, upon which the parties may rely for document archiving
during the specified term of operation of such Project document archive. Further,
each party remains solely responsible for its own post-Project back-up and archive
of Project documents after the term of the Contract, or after termination of the
Project document archive, if one is established, for as long as required by the
Contract and as each party deems necessary for its own purposes.
f. If a receiving party receives an obviously corrupted, damaged, or unreadable
Electronic Document, the receiving party will advise the sending party of the
incomplete transmission.
g. The parties will bring any non-conforming Electronic Documents into compliance
with the EDP. The parties will attempt to complete a successful transmission of the
Electronic Document or use an alternative delivery method to complete the
communication.
h. The Owner will operate a Project information management system (also referred
to in this EDP as “Project Website”) for use of Owner, Engineer and Contractor
during the Project for exchange and storage of Project-related communications
and information. Except as otherwise provided in this EDP or the General
Conditions, use of the Project Website by the parties as described in this Paragraph
will be mandatory for exchange of Project documents, communications,

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 8 of 33
submittals, and other Project-related information. The following conditions and
standards will govern use of the Project Website:
1) Describe the period of time during which the Project Website will be operated
and be available for reliance by the parties;
2) Provide any minimum system infrastructure, software licensing and security
standards for access to and use of the Project Website;
3) Describe the types and extent of services to be provided at the Project
Website (such as large file transfer, email, communication and document
archives, etc.); and
4) Include any other Project Website attributes that may be pertinent to
Contractor’s use of the facility and pricing of such use.
C. Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange; Limitations
1. Each party will acquire the software and software licenses necessary to create and
transmit Electronic Documents and to read and to use any Electronic Documents
received from the other party (and if relevant from third parties), using the software
formats required in this section of the EDP.
a. Prior to using any updated version of the software required in this section for
sending Electronic Documents to the other party, the originating party will first
notify and receive concurrence from the other party for use of the updated version
or adjust its transmission to comply with this EDP.
2. The parties agree not to intentionally edit, reverse engineer, decrypt, remove security
or encryption features, or convert to another format for modification purposes any
Electronic Document or information contained therein that was transmitted in a
software data format, including Portable Document Format (PDF), intended by sender
not to be modified, unless the receiving party obtains the permission of the sending
party or is citing or quoting excerpts of the Electronic Document for Project purposes.
3. Software and data formats for exchange of Electronic Documents will conform to the
requirements set forth in Exhibit A to this EDP, including software versions, if listed.
SC-2.06 Supplement Paragraph 2.06 of the General Conditions by adding the following paragraph:
D. Requests by Contractor for Electronic Documents in Other Formats
1. Release of any Electronic Document versions of the Project documents in formats other
than those identified in the Electronic Documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the
Contract will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
2. To extent determined by Owner, in its sole discretion, to be prudent and necessary,
release of Electronic Documents versions of Project documents and other Project
information requested by Contractor (“Request”) in formats other than those identified
in the Electronic Documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the Contract will be subject
to the provisions of the Owner’s response to the Request, and to the following
conditions to which Contractor agrees:
a. The content included in the Electronic Documents created by Engineer and covered
by the Request was prepared by Engineer as an internal working document for

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 9 of 33
Engineer’s purposes solely, and is being provided to Contractor on an “AS IS” basis
without any warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to any implied
warranties of fitness for any purpose. As such, Contractor is advised and
acknowledges that the content may not be suitable for Contractor’s application, or
may require substantial modification and independent verification by Contractor.
The content may include limited resolution of models, not-to-scale schematic
representations and symbols, use of notes to convey design concepts in lieu of
accurate graphics, approximations, graphical simplifications, undocumented
intermediate revisions, and other devices that may affect subsequent reuse.
b. Electronic Documents containing text, graphics, metadata, or other types of data
that are provided by Engineer to Contractor under the request are only for
convenience of Contractor. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived
from such data will be at the Contractor’s sole risk and the Contractor waives any
claims against Engineer or Owner arising from use of data in Electronic Documents
covered by the Request.
c. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and their
subconsultants from all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys'
fees and defense costs arising out of or resulting from Contractor’s use, adaptation,
or distribution of any Electronic Documents provided under the Request.
d. Contractor agrees not to sell, copy, transfer, forward, give away or otherwise
distribute this information (in source or modified file format) to any third party
without the direct written authorization of Engineer, unless such distribution is
specifically identified in the Request and is limited to Contractor’s subcontractors.
Contractor warrants that subsequent use by Contractor’s subcontractors complies
with all terms of the Contract Documents and Owner’s response to Request.
3. In the event that Owner elects to provide or directs the Engineer to provide to
Contractor any Contractor-requested Electronic Document versions of Project
information that is not explicitly identified in the Contract Documents as being available
to Contractor, the Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor on an hourly basis (at
$[number] per hour) for any engineering costs necessary to create or otherwise prepare
the data in a manner deemed appropriate by Engineer.
ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
SC-3.01 Delete Paragraph 3.01.C in its entirety.
ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
SC-4.01.A – Delete the last sentence of paragraph.
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 10 of 33
SC-4.05 Paragraph is mandatory for WWD projects.
SC-4.05 Amend Paragraph 4.05.C by adding the following subparagraphs:
5. Weather-Related Delays
a. If “abnormal weather conditions” as set forth in Paragraph 4.05.C.2 of the General
Conditions are the basis for a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Times, such request must be documented by data substantiating each of the
following: 1) that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time in
which the delay occurred, 2) that such weather conditions could not have been
reasonably anticipated, and 3) that such weather conditions had an adverse effect
on the Work as scheduled. Extreme or unusual weather that is typical for a given
region, elevation, or season should not be considered abnormal weather
conditions. Requests for time extensions due to abnormal weather conditions
will be submitted to the Engineer within five days of the end of the abnormal
weather condition event. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide the
information listed in SC 4.05.C.5.b.
b. The existence of abnormal weather conditions will be determined on a month-by-
month basis in accordance with the following:
1) Every workday on which one or more of the following conditions exist will be
considered a “bad weather day”:
i) Total precipitation (as rain equivalent) occurring between 7:00 p.m. on
the preceding day (regardless of whether such preceding day is a
workday) through 7:00 p.m. on the workday in question equals or
exceeds 2 inches of precipitation (as rain equivalent, based on the
snow/rain conversion indicated in the table entitled Foreseeable Bad
Weather Days; such table is hereby incorporated in this SC-4.05.C by
reference.
ii) Ambient outdoor air temperature at 11:00 a.m. is equal to or less than
the following low temperature threshold: 0 degrees Fahrenheit; or, at
3:00 p.m. the ambient outdoor temperature is equal to or greater than
the following high temperature threshold: 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
2) Determination of actual bad weather days during performance of the Work
will be based on the weather records measured and recorded by Weber
Canyon Road Station – KUTKAMAS2 weather monitoring station at Weber
Canyon Road.
3) Contractor shall anticipate the number of foreseeable bad weather days per
month indicated in the table in Exhibit B—Foreseeable Bad Weather Days.
4) In each month, every bad weather day exceeding the number of foreseeable
bad weather days established in the table in Exhibit B—Foreseeable Bad
Weather Days will be considered as “abnormal weather conditions.” The
existence of abnormal weather conditions will not relieve Contractor of the
obligation to demonstrate and document that delays caused by abnormal
weather are specific to the planned work activities or that such activities thus

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 11 of 33
delayed were on Contractor’s then-current Progress Schedule’s critical path
for the Project.
ARTICLE 5—SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D:
E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data
in the report upon which Contractor may rely:
Report Title Date of Report Technical Data
No Such Reports

F. The following table lists the drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site,
including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to
the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data, and specifically
identifies the Technical Data upon which Contractor may rely:
Drawings Title Date of Drawings Technical Data
No Such Drawings

G. Contractor may examine copies of reports and drawings identified in SC-5.03.E and SC-5.03.F
that were not included with the Bidding Documents at Aqua Engineering Office, 533 W 2600
S. Suite 275, Bountiful, UT 84010, during regular business hours, or may request copies from
Engineer.
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions
SC-5.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.06.A.3:
4. The following table lists the reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and the Technical Data (if any) upon
which Contractor may rely:
Report Title Date of Report Technical Data
No Such Reports

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 12 of 33
5. The following table lists the drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and Technical Data (if any)
contained in such Drawings upon which Contractor may rely:
Drawings Title Date of Drawings Technical Data
No Such Drawings

ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
SC-6.01 – Disregard EJCDC Guidance Notes – Performance and Payment Bonds, Note 1. Performance
and Payment Bonds are required for WEP projects.
SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.A:
1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Contractor furnishes will
be in the form of EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition).
2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Contractor furnishes will be in
the form of EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond (2010, 2013, or 2018 edition).
SC-6.01 – EJCDC Guidance Notes – “Other Bonds,” Warranty Bond, Note 1. RD does not require a
Warranty Bond, and RD will not accept a Warranty Bond in place of a Performance and Payment Bond.
The decision to include a Warranty Bond is made by the Owner and their counsel. Please refer to EJCDC.
SC-6.01 Deleted
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
SC-6.02 Deleted
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
SC-6.03 Supplement Paragraph 6.03 with the following provisions after Paragraph 6.03.C:
D. Other Additional Insureds: As a supplement to the provisions of Paragraph 6.03.C of the
General Conditions, the commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess,
pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies must include as additional
insureds (in addition to Owner and Engineer) the following: [Here list by legal name (not
category, role, or classification) other persons or entities to be included as additional
insureds. See GC-6.03.C.]
E. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain
workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance, including, as applicable, United
States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, Jones Act, stop-gap
employer’s liability coverage for monopolistic states, and foreign voluntary workers’
compensation (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement of
Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions).

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 13 of 33
Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not
less than:
Workers’ Compensation
State Statutory
Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory
Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s
responsibility coverage), if applicable
Statutory
Jones Act (if applicable)
Bodily injury by accident—each accident $
Bodily injury by disease—aggregate $
Employer’s Liability
Each accident $
Each employee $
Policy limit $
Stop-gap Liability Coverage
For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability
coverage must be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation
or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of:
$
F. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain
commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor,
on an occurrence basis, against claims for:
1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor’s employees,
2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and
3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located,
including loss of use resulting therefrom.
G. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy
must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO) commercial
general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and
endorsements:
1. Products and completed operations coverage.
a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in
the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.
2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of
Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.
3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions.
4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.
5. Personal injury coverage.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 14 of 33
6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products
and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and
CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If Contractor demonstrates to Owner that the specified ISO
endorsements are not commercially available, then Contractor may satisfy this
requirement by providing equivalent endorsements.
7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04
“Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named
Insured” or its equivalent.
H. Commercial General Liability—Excluded Content: The commercial general liability insurance
policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions, must not include
any of the following:
1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete the
railroad protective liability exclusion if Contractor is required to indemnify a railroad or
others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property).
2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage.
3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other than
those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01.
4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement.
5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability
(other than worker’s compensation).
6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of Contractor’s work.
7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of ISO
form CG 22 79.
I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits
Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
General Aggregate $
Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $
Personal and Advertising Injury $
Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $
J. Automobile Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance
for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out
of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy
must be written on an occurrence basis.
Automobile Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Bodily Injury
Each Person $
Each Accident $

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 15 of 33
Automobile Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Property Damage
Each Accident $
[or]
Combined Single Limit
Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $
K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess
liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general
liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The coverage
afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the underlying policies.
Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Occurrence $
General Aggregate $
L. Using Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance to Meet CGL and Other Policy Limit
Requirements: Contractor may meet the policy limits specified for employer’s liability,
commercial general liability, and automobile liability through the primary policies alone, or
through combinations of the primary insurance policy’s policy limits and partial attribution
of the policy limits of an umbrella or excess liability policy that is at least as broad in coverage
as that of the underlying policy, as specified herein. If such umbrella or excess liability policy
was required under this Contract, at a specified minimum policy limit, such umbrella or
excess policy must retain a minimum limit of $[specify amount] after accounting for partial
attribution of its limits to underlying policies, as allowed above.
M. Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy
covering third-party injury and property damage, including cleanup costs, as a result of
pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This
insurance must be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.
Contractor’s Pollution Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Occurrence/Claim $
General Aggregate $
N. Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional
services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or
otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable
professional liability insurance. This insurance must cover negligent acts, errors, or omissions
in the performance of professional design or related services by the insured or others for
whom the insured is legally liable. The insurance must be maintained throughout the
duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. The
retroactive date on the policy must pre-date the commencement of furnishing services on
the Project.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 16 of 33
Contractor’s Professional Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Claim $
Annual Aggregate $
O. Railroad Protective Liability Insurance: Prior to commencing any Work within 50 feet of
railroad-owned and controlled property, Contractor shall (1) endorse its commercial general
liability policy with ISO CG 24 17, removing the contractual liability exclusion for work within
50 feet of a railroad, (2) purchase and maintain railroad protective liability insurance meeting
the following requirements, (3) furnish a copy of the endorsement to Owner, and (4) submit
a copy of the railroad protective policy and other railroad-required documentation to the
railroad, and notify Owner of such submittal.
[Insert additional specific requirements, commonly set by the railroad, here.]
Railroad Protective Liability Insurance Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Claim $
Aggregate $
P. Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Liability Insurance: If Contractor uses unmanned aerial vehicles
(UAV—commonly referred to as drones) at the Site or in support of any aspect of the Work,
Contractor shall obtain UAV liability insurance in the amounts stated; name Owner, Engineer,
and all individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional
insureds; and provide a certificate to Owner confirming Contractor’s compliance with this
requirement. Such insurance will provide coverage for property damage, bodily injury or
death, and invasion of privacy.
Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Liability Insurance Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Claim $
General Aggregate $
Q. Deleted
6.04 Deleted
ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.03 Labor; Working Hours
SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C:
1. Regular working hours will be at the discretion of the Contractor.
2. Owner's legal holidays are
New Years Day
Martin Luther King Day

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 17 of 33
President’s Day
Memorial Day
Juneteenth
Independence Day
Pioneer Day
Labor Day
Veteran’s Day
Thanksgiving Day
Christmas Day
SC-7.03 Deleted
SC-7.03 Delete Paragraph 7.03.C in its entirety, and insert the following:
C. In the absence of any Laws or Regulations to the contrary, Contractor may perform the Work
on holidays, during any or all hours of the day, and on any or all days of the week, at
Contractor's sole discretion.
SC-7.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C:
D. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any overtime pay or other expense incurred
by the Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident Project Representative,
if any), Owner's representative, and construction observation services, occasioned by the
performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular
work day. If Contractor is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due
under Article 15.
SC-7.03 Deleted
SC-7.04.D – Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.04.C:
D. All Iron and Steel products must meet American Iron and Steel requirements.

SC-7.04.E – Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.04.D:
E. For projects utilizing a De Minimis waiver, Contractor shall maintain an itemized list of
non-domestically produced iron or steel incidental components and ensure that the cost
is less than 5% of total materials cost for project.

SC-7.05.A – Amend the third sentence of paragraph by striking out the following words:
Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no
like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item is permitted,

SC-7.05.A.1.a.3 – Amend the last sentence of Paragraph a.3 by striking out “and;” and adding a period
at the end of Paragraph a.3.

SC-7.05.A.1.a.4 – Delete paragraph in its entirety and insert “Deleted.”

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 18 of 33

SC-7.05.B – Add the following at the end of paragraph:
Contractor shall include a Manufacturer’s Certification letter for compliance with American
Iron and Steel requirements in support data, if applicable. Refer to Manufacturer’s
Certification Letter provided in these Contract Documents.

SC-7.06.A.3.a.2 – Remove “and” from the end of paragraph.

SC-7.06.A.3.a.3 – Add “; and” to the end of paragraph.

SC-7.06.A.3.a.4 – Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.06.A.3.a.3:
4. Comply with American Iron and Steel by providing Manufacturer’s Certification letter of
American Iron and Steel compliance, if applicable. Refer to Manufacturer’s Certification
Letter provided in these Contract Documents.

SC-7.07.A – Amend by adding the following to the end of the paragraph:
The total amount of work subcontracted by the Contractor shall not exceed fifty percent
of the Contract price without prior approval from the Owner, Engineer and Agency.

SC-7.07.B – Delete paragraph in its entirety and insert ”Deleted”.

SC-7.07.E – Delete the second sentence of paragraph and insert the following in its place:
Owner may not require that Contractor use a specific replacement.

7.10 Taxes
SC-7.12.A Amend paragraph by adding the following after “written interpretations and
clarifications,”:
Manufacturers’ Certifications,

7.13 Safety and Protection
SC-7.13 Insert the following after the second sentence of Paragraph 7.13.G:
The following Owner safety programs are applicable to the Work: [Here expressly identify
by title and/or date, any such Owner safety programs. If Owner’s safety programs are
included in or addressed in the Specifications, SC-7.13 may be used to provide a cross-
reference to the Specification section].

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 19 of 33

SC-7.16.A.1.c – Amend paragraph by deleting the last period and adding:
, including Manufacturer’s Certification letter for any item in the submittal subject to
American Iron and Steel requirements and include the Certificate in the submittal. Refer
to Manufacturer’s Certification Letter provided in these Contract Documents.

SC-7.16.C.9 – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.16.C.8:
9. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall include review of
Manufacturers’ Certifications in order to document compliance with American Iron and
Steel requirements, as applicable.

SC-7.17.F – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.17.E:
F. Contractor shall certify upon Substantial Completion that all Work and Materials have
complied with American Iron and Steel requirements as mandated by Section 746 of Title
VII of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A - Agriculture, Rural
Development, Food and Drug Administration, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act,
2017) and subsequent statutes mandating domestic preference. Contractor shall provide
said Certification to Owner. Refer to General Contractor’s Certification Letter pr ovided in
these Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
8.02 Coordination
SC-8.02 Deleted
ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9.13 Owner’s Site Representative
SC-9.13 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.12 of the General
Conditions:
9.13 Owner’s Site Representative
A. Owner will furnish an “Owner’s Site Representative” to represent Owner at the Site and assist
Owner in observing the progress and quality of the Work. The Owner’s Site Representative
is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee. Owner’s Site Representative will be Aqua
Engineering. The authority and responsibilities of Owner’s Site Representative follow: Verify
contractor is performing work and providing materials per the procurement and technical
specifications documents and answering questions pertaining to the project.
ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.03 Resident Project Representative

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 20 of 33
SC-10.03 Deleted
SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B:
C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site. RPR's
dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with Engineer and Contractor.
RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full knowledge or
approval of Contractor. The RPR will:
1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction
conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings
(but not including Contractor’s safety meetings), and as appropriate prepare and
circulate copies of minutes thereof.
2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if
required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically related to
RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site.
3. Liaison
a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through
Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information
regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.
b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s
operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.
c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for
Contractor’s proper execution of the Work.
4. Review of Work; Defective Work
a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist Engineer in determining, to the
extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02, if the Work is in general proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective.
c. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or
requires special testing, inspection or approval.
5. Inspections and Tests
a. Observe Contractor-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations,
including but not limited to those performed by public or other agencies having
jurisdiction over the Work.
b. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having
jurisdiction over the Work.
6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor.
7. Completion
a. Participate in Engineer’s visits regarding Substantial Completion.
b. Assist in the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 21 of 33
c. Participate in Engineer’s visit to the Site in the company of Owner and Contractor
regarding completion of the Work, and prepare a final punch list of items to be
completed or corrected by Contractor.
d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or corrected.
D. The RPR will not:
1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or
equipment (including “or-equal” items).
2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.
3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers.
4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction.
5 Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety
practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of
Owner or Contractor.
6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by
others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.
7. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.
ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
SC-11.02.C – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.02.B:
C. The Engineer or Owner shall contact the Agency for concurrence on each Change Order
prior to issuance. All Contract Change Orders must be concurred on (signed) by Agency
before they are effective.

SC-11.03.A.2 - Add new Paragraph 11.03.A.2 immediately after Paragraph 11.03.A, which shall be
renamed Paragraph 11.03.A.1:
2. The Engineer or Owner shall contact the Agency for concurrence on each Work Change
Directive prior to issuance. Once authorized by Owner, a copy of each Work Change
Directive shall be provided by Engineer to the Agency.

SC-11.05.B – Add the following at the end of this paragraph:
For Owner-authorized changes in the Work, the Contractor will provide the Manufacturer’s
Certification(s) for materials subject to American Iron and Steel requirements except when
sole-source is specified, in which case the Engineer will provide the Manufa cturer’s
Certification(s).

SC-11.09.B.2.c – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.09.B.2.b:

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 22 of 33
c. Change orders involving materials subject to American Iron and Steel requirements shall
include supporting data (name of Manufacturer, city and state where the product was
manufactured, description of product, signature of authorized Manufacturer’s
representative) in the Manufacturer’s Certification Letter, as applicable.
ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS
No suggested Supplementary Conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 13—COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
SC-13.01 Deleted

SC-13.02.C – Delete paragraph in its entirety and insert ”Deleted”.

13.03 Unit Price Work
SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
E. Adjustments in Unit Price
1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect
to an item of Unit Price Work if:
a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to [number]
percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time
of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of
Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by more
than [number] percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the
Agreement; and
b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed
materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change.
2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related
changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform
such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable
to Owner and Contractor.
3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item.
ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
SC-14.03.G – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.03.F:

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 23 of 33
G. Installation of materials that are non-compliant with American Iron and Steel
requirements shall be considered defective work.
ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
SC-15.01.B.4 – Add the following language at the end of paragraph:
No payments will be made that would deplete the retainage, place in escrow any funds
that are required for retainage or invest the retainage for the benefit of the Contractor.

SC-15.01.B.5 – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.01.B.4:
5. The Application for Payment form to be used on this Project is EJCDC® C-620. The Agency
must approve all Applications for Payment before payment is made.

SC-15.01.B.6 – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.01.B.5:
6. By submitting an Application for Payment based in whole or in part on furnishing
equipment or materials, Contractor certifies that such equipment and materials are
compliant with American Iron and Steel requirements. Manufacturer’s Certification letter
for materials satisfy this requirement. Refer to Manufacturer’s Certification Letter
provided in these Contract Documents.

SC-15.01.C.2.d – Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.01.C.2.c:
d. The materials presented for payment in an Application for Payment comply with
American Iron and Steel requirements.

SC-15.01.D.1 – Delete paragraph in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
The Application for Payment with Engineer’s recommendations will be presented to the
Owner and Agency for consideration. If both the Owner and Agency find the Application
for Payment acceptable, the recommended amount less any reduction under the
provisions of Paragraph 15.01.E will become due twenty (20) days after the Application for
Payment is presented to the Owner, and the Owner will make payment to the Contractor.

SC-15.01 Add the following new Paragraph 15.01.F:
F. For contracts in which the Contract Price is based on the Cost of Work, if Owner determines
that progress payments made to date substantially exceed the actual progress of the Work
(as measured by reference to the Schedule of Values), or present a potential conflict with the
Guaranteed Maximum Price, then Owner may require that Contractor prepare and submit a
plan for the remaining anticipated Applications for Payment that will bring payments and
progress into closer alignment and take into account the Guaranteed Maximum Price (if any),

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 24 of 33
through reductions in billings, increases in retainage, or other equitable measures. Owner
will review the plan, discuss any necessary modifications, and implement the plan as
modified for all remaining Applications for Payment.
SC-15.02.A – Amend paragraph by striking out the following text: “7 days after”.

15.03 Substantial Completion
SC-15.03.A – Modify by adding the following after the last sentence:
Contractor shall also submit the General (Prime) Contractor’s Certification of Compliance
certifying that to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge and belief all substitutes, equals,
and all Iron and Steel products proposed in the Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and Partial
Payment Estimates, and those installed for the Project, are either Produced in the United
States or are the subject of an approved waiver under Section 746 of Title VII of the
Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A - Agriculture, Rural Development,
Food and Drug Administration, and Related Agencies Appropriations Act, 2017) and
subsequent statutes mandating domestic preference.

SC-15.03 Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B:
1. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial
Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such re-
inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will be
paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against
payments due under this Article 15.
15.08 Correction Period
SC-15.08 Deleted
ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
No suggested Supplementary Conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES
17.02 Arbitration
SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01.
17.02 Arbitration
A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration
administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this
Paragraph SC-17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be
settled in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s supplemental rules for

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 25 of 33
Fixed Time and Cost Construction Arbitration. This agreement to arbitrate will be specifically
enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction.
B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and
with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for
information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in
Article 17, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the matter in
question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the date when
institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be
barred by the applicable statute of limitations.
C. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction
managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction
Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrators will have no authority
to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party's actual damages,
except as may be required by statute or the Contract. Any award in an arbitration initiated
under this clause will be limited to monetary damages and include no injunction or direction
to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount.
D. The Arbitrators will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process among
the parties, but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific Law or
Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so.
E. The award of the arbitrators must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a
concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions
deemed applicable and relied on in making the award.
F. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits
for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that party
to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall be
required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for the
making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the non-paying
party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above.
G. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation, joinder,
or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and Engineer’s
consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of
them) who is not a party to this Contract unless:
1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be afforded
among those who are already parties to the arbitration;
2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which
is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will arise in
such proceedings;
3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either
Owner or Contractor, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and
4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s
procedural rules.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 26 of 33
H. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction
thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws
and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award.
I. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may
disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior
written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws and
Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the
exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain confidentiality to
the extent possible.
17.03 Attorneys’ Fees
SC-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02. [Note: If there is no
Paragraph 17.02, because neither arbitration nor any other dispute resolution process has
been specified here in the Supplementary Conditions, then revise this to state “Add the
following new Paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01” and revise the numbering
accordingly].
17.03 Attorneys’ Fees
A. For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be
entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an
equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration
panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the
parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result.
ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS
18.08 Assignment of Contract
SC-18.08 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 18.08.A:
B. The contract dated [date] between Owner as “buyer” and [identify seller] as “seller” for
procurement of goods and special services (“procurement contract”) [is hereby] [will be]
assigned to Contractor by Owner, and Contractor [accepts] [will accept] such assignment. A
form documenting the assignment is attached as an exhibit to this Contract.
1. This assignment will occur on the [Effective Date of the Contract], and will relieve the
Owner as “buyer” from all further obligations and liabilities under the procurement
contract.
2. Upon assignment, the “seller” will be a Subcontractor or Supplier of the Contractor, and
Contractor will be responsible for seller’s performance, acts, and omissions, as set forth
in Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions just as Contractor is responsible for all other
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
3. Notwithstanding this assignment, all performance guarantees and warranties required
by the procurement contract will continue to run for the benefit of the Owner and, in
addition, for the benefit of the Contractor.

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 27 of 33
4. Except as noted in the procurement contract, all rights, duties and obligations of
Engineer to “buyer” and “seller” under the procurement contract will cease [upon the
assignment to Contractor].

SC-18.11 – Add new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 18.10:
18.11 Tribal Sovereignty

A. No provision of this Agreement will be construed by any of the signatories as abridging
or debilitating any sovereign powers of the [insert name of Tribe] Tribe; affecting the trust-
beneficiary relationship between the Secretary of the Interior, Tribe, and Indian
landowner(s); or interfering with the government-to-government relationship between
the United States and the Tribe.

SC-19 – Add the following new Article 19 immediately after Article 18:

Article 19 - FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

19.01 Agency Not a Party
A. This Contract is expected to be funded in part with funds provided by Agency. Neither
Agency, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees, is a party to this Contract.

19.02 Contract Approval
A. Owner and Contractor will furnish Owner’s attorney such evidence as required so that
Owner’s attorney can complete and execute the “Certificate of Owner’s Attorney” (Exhibit
G of this Bulletin) before Owner submits the executed Contract Documents to Agency for
approval.
B. Agency concurrence is required on both the Bid and the Contract before the Contract is
effective.

19.03 Conflict of Interest
A. Contractor may not knowingly contract with a Supplier or Manufacturer if the individual
or entity who prepared the Drawings and Specifications has a corporate or financial
affiliation with the Supplier or Manufacturer. Owner’s officers, employees, or agents shall
not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of interest, real or
apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: (i) the employee, officer
or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their partner or (iv) an
organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a financial interest
or other interest in or a tangible personal benefit from the Contractor. Owner’s officers,

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 28 of 33
employees, or agents shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of
monetary value from Contractor or subcontractors.

19.04 Gratuities
A. If Owner finds after a notice and hearing that Contractor, or any of Contractor’s agents
or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the form of entertainment, gifts, or
otherwise) to any official, employee, or agent of Owner or Agency in an attempt to secure
this Contract or favorable treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations
related to the performance of this Contract, Owner may, by written notice to Contractor,
terminate this Contract. Owner may also pursue other rights and remedies that the law or
this Contract provides. However, the existence of the facts on which Owner bases such
findings shall be an issue and may be reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution
provisions of this Contract.
B. In the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph 19.04.A, Owner may
pursue the same remedies against Contractor as it could pursue in the event of a breach of
this Contract by Contractor. As a penalty, in addition to any other damages to which it may
be entitled by law, Owner may pursue exemplary damages in an amount (as determined
by Owner) which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs Contractor
incurs in providing any such gratuities to any such officer or employee.

19.05 Small, Minority and Women’s Businesses
A. If Contractor intends to let any subcontracts for a portion of the work, Contractor will
take all necessary affirmative steps to assure that minority businesses, women's business
enterprises, and labor surplus area firms are used when possible. Affirmative steps will
include:
1. Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women's business
enterprises on solicitation lists;
2. Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women's business
enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources;
3. Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks
or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority
businesses, and women's business enterprises;
4. Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which
encourage participation by small and minority businesses, and women's
business enterprises;
5. Using the services and assistance, as appropriate, of such organizations as the
Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency
of the Department of Commerce.

19.06 Anti-Kickback

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 29 of 33
A. Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act (40 USC 3145) as
supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 3, “Contractors and
Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans
or Grants of the United States”). The Act provides that Contractor or subcontractor shall
be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction,
completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of the compensation to which
they are otherwise entitled. Owner shall report all suspected or reported violations to
Agency.

19.07 Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control
Act (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387), as amended
A. Contractor to agree to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued
pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q) and the Federal Water Pollution
Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387). Violations must be reported to the federal
awarding agency and the Regional Office of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

19.08 Equal Employment Opportunity
A. The Contract is considered a federally assisted construction contract. Except as
otherwise provided under 41 CFR Part 60, all contracts that meet the definition of
“federally assisted construction contract” in 41 CFR Part 60-1.3 must include the equal
opportunity clause provided under 41 CFR 60-1.4(b), in accordance with Executive Order
11246, “Equal Employment Opportunity” (30 FR 12319, 12935, 3 CFR Part, 1964-1965
Comp., p. 339), as amended by Executive Order 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246
Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity,” and implementing regulations at 41 CFR part
60, “Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity,
Department of Labor.”

19.09 Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment (31 U.S.C. 1352)
A. Contractors that apply or bid for an award exceeding $100,000 must file the required
certification (RD Instruction 1940-Q Exhibit A-1). The Contractor certifies to the Owner and
every subcontractor certifies to the Contractor that it will not and has not used federal
appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to
influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee
of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining the
Contract if it is covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. The Contractor and every subcontractor must
also disclose any lobbying with non-federal funds that takes place in connection with
obtaining any federal award. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the
Owner. Necessary certification and disclosure forms shall be provided by Owner.

19.10 Environmental Requirements

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 30 of 33
A. When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth
excavations, Contractor shall comply with the following environmental conditions:
1. Wetlands – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other Construction Materials
on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert
wetlands.
2. Floodplains – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other Construction
Materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise
convert 100-year floodplain areas (Standard Flood Hazard Area) delineated on
the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency Floodplain Maps, or other
appropriate maps, e.g., alluvial soils on NRCS Soil Survey Maps.
3. Historic Preservation - Applicants shall ensure that Contractors maintain a
copy of the following inadvertent discovery plan onsite for review:
a. If during the course of any ground disturbance related to any Project,
any post review discovery, including but not limited to, any artifacts,
foundations, or other indications of past human occupation of the area
are uncovered, shall be protected by complying with 36 CFR §
800.13(b)(3) and (c) and shall include the following:
i. All Work, including vehicular traffic, shall immediately stop
within a 50 ft. radius around the area of discovery. The
Contractor shall ensure barriers are established to protect the
area of discovery and notify the Engineer to contact the
appropriate RD personnel. The Engineer shall engage a
Secretary of the Interior (SOI) qualified professional
archeologist to quickly assess the nature and scope of the
discovery; implement interim measures to protect the
discovery from looting and vandalism; and establish broader
barriers if further historic and/or precontact properties, can
reasonably be expected to occur.
ii. The RD personnel shall notify the appropriate RD
environmental staff member, the Federal Preservation Officer
(FPO), and State Historic Preservation Office (SHPO)
immediately. Indian tribe(s) or Native Hawaiian Organization
(NHOs) that have an interest in the area of discovery shall be
contacted immediately. The SHPO may require additional tribes
or NHOs who may have an interest in the area of discovery also
be contacted. The notification shall include an assessment of
the discovery provided by the SOI qualified professional
archeologist.
iii. When the discovery contains burial sites or human remains,
the Contractor shall immediately notify the appropriate RD
personnel who will contact the RD environmental staff
member, FPO, and the SHPO. The relevant law enforcement
authorities shall be immediately contacted by onsite personnel
to reduce delay times, in accordance with tribal, state, or local

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 31 of 33
laws including 36 CFR Part 800.13; 43 CFR Part 10, Subpart B;
and the Advisory Council on Historic Preservation’s Policy
Statement Regarding treatment of Burial Sites, Human
Remains, or Funerary Objects (February 23, 2007).
iv. When the discovery contains burial sites or human remains,
all construction activities, including vehicular traffic shall stop
within a 100 ft. radius of the discovery and barriers shall be
established. The evaluation of human remains shall be
conducted at the site of discovery by a SOI qualified
professional. Remains that have been removed from their
primary context and where that context may be in question
may be retained in a secure location, pending further decisions
on treatment and disposition. RD may expand this radius based
on the SOI professional’s assessment of the discovery and
establish broader barriers if further subsurface burial sites, or
human remains can reasonably be expected to occur. RD, in
consultation with the SHPO and interested tribes or NHOs, shall
develop a plan for the treatment of native human remains.
v. Work may continue in other areas of the undertaking where
no historic properties, burial sites, or human remains are
present. If the inadvertent discovery appears to be a
consequence of illegal activity such as looting, the onsite
personnel shall contact the appropriate legal authorities
immediately if the landowner has not already done so.
vi. Work may not resume in the area of the discovery until a
notice to proceed has been issued by RD. RD shall not issue the
notice to proceed until it has determined that the appropriate
local protocols and consulting parties have been consulted.
vii. Inadvertent discoveries on federal and tribal land shall
follow the processes required by the federal or tribal entity.
4. Endangered Species – Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species
Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened
species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of endangered
and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to the attention
of Contractor, Contractor will immediately report this evidence to Owner and a
representative of Agency. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the
notification process and further directions issued by Agency after consultation
with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service.
5. Mitigation Measures – The following environmental mitigation measures are
required on this Project: [Insert mitigation measures from the Letter of
Conditions here].

19.11 Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3701-3708)

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 32 of 33
A. Where applicable, for contracts awarded by the Owner in excess of $100,000 that
involve the employment of mechanics or laborers, the Contractor will comply with 40
U.S.C. 3702 and 3704, as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part
5). Under 40 U.S.C. 3702 of the Act, the Contractor will compute the wages of every
mechanic and laborer on the basis of a standard work week of 40 hours. Work in excess of
the standard work week is permissible provided that the worker is compensated at a rate
of not less than one and a half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of
40 hours in the work week. The requirements of 40 U.S.C. 3704 are applicable to
construction work and provide that no laborer or mechanic will be required to work in
surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous.
These requirements do not apply to the purchases of supplies or materials or articles
ordinarily available on the open market, or contracts for transportation or transmission of
intelligence.

19.12 Debarment and Suspension (Executive Orders 12549 and 12689)
A. A contract award (see 2 CFR 180.220) must not be made to parties listed on the
governmentwide exclusions in the System for Award Management (SAM), in accordance
with the OMB guidelines at 2 CFR 180 that implement Executive Orders 12549 (3 CFR part
1986 Comp., p. 189) and 12689 (3 CFR part 1989 Comp., p. 235), “Debarment and
Suspension.” SAM Exclusions contains the names of parties debarred, suspended, or
otherwise excluded by agencies, as well as parties declared ineligible under statutory or
regulatory authority other than Executive Order 12549.

19.13 Procurement of recovered materials
A. The Contractor will comply with 2 CFR Part 200.322, “Procurement of recovered
materials.”

19.14 American Iron and Steel
A. Section 746 of Title VII of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2017 (Division A -
Agriculture, Rural Development, Food and Drug Administration, and Related Agencies
Appropriations Act, 2017) and subsequent statutes mandating domestic preference
applies an American Iron and Steel requirement to this project. All iron and steel products
used in this project must be produced in the United States. The term “iron and steel
products” means the following products made primarily of iron or steel: lined or unlined
pipes and fittings, manhole covers and other municipal castings, hydrants, tanks, flanges,
pipe clamps and restraints, valves, structural steel, reinforced precast concrete, and
Construction Materials.

B. The following waivers apply to this Contract:
1. De Minimis,
2. Minor Components,

EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 33 of 33
3. Pig iron and direct reduced iron, and
4. [add project specific waivers as applicable].

Exhibit A—Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange.
EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 1
EXHIBIT A—SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT EXCHANGE
Item Electronic Documents Transmittal
Means
Data
Format
Note
(1)
a.1 General communications, transmittal covers, meeting notices and
responses to general information requests for which there is no
specific prescribed form.
Email Email
a.2 Meeting agendas, meeting minutes, RFI’s and responses to RFI’s,
and Contract forms.
Email w/
Attachment
PDF (2)
a.3 Contactors Submittals (Shop Drawings, “or equal” requests,
substitution requests, documentation accompanying Sample
submittals and other submittals) to Owner and Engineer, and
Owner’s and Engineer’s responses to Contractor’s Submittals,
Shop Drawings, correspondence, and Applications for Payment.
Email w/
Attachment
PDF
a.4 Correspondence; milestone and final version Submittals of
reports, layouts, Drawings, maps, calculations and spreadsheets,
Specifications, Drawings and other Submittals from Contractor to
Owner or Engineer and for responses from Engineer and Owner
to Contractor regarding Submittals.
Email w/
Attachment or LFE
PDF
a.5 Layouts and drawings to be submitted to Owner for future use
and modification.
Email w/
Attachment or LFE
DWG
a.6 Correspondence, reports and Specifications to be submitted to
Owner for future word processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment or LFE
DOC
a.7 Spreadsheets and data to be submitted to Owner for future data
processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment or LFE
EXC
a.8 Database files and data to be submitted to Owner for future data
processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment or LFE
DB
Notes
(1) All exchanges and uses of transmitted data are subject to the appropriate provisions of Contract
Documents.
(2) Transmittal of written notices is governed by Paragraph 18.01 of the General Conditions.
Key
Email Standard Email formats (.htm, .rtf, or .txt). Do not use stationery formatting or other features that
impair legibility of content on screen or in printed copies
LFE Agreed upon Large File Exchange method (FTP, CD, DVD, hard drive)
PDF Portable Document Format readable by Adobe® Acrobat Reader Version [number] or later
DWG Autodesk® AutoCAD .dwg format Version [number]
DOC Microsoft® Word .docx format Version [number]
EXC Microsoft® Excel .xls or .xml format Version [number]
DB Microsoft® Access .mdb format Version [number]

Exhibit B—Foreseeable Bad Weather Days.
EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 1
EXHIBIT B—FORESEEABLE BAD WEATHER DAYS
Month
Number of Foreseeable Bad
Weather Days in Month
Based on Precipitation as Rain
Equivalent (inches) (1)
Ambient Outdoor Air Temperature (degrees F)
Number of Foreseeable Bad
Weather Days in Month
Based on Low Temperature
(at 11:00 a.m.)
Number of Foreseeable Bad
Weather Days in Month
Based on High Temperature
(at 3:00 p.m.)
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Notes:
1. Two inches of sleet equal one inch of rain. Five inches of wet, heavy snow equal one inch of rain.
Fifteen inches of “dry” powder snow equals one inch of rain.

Exhibit C—Geotechnical Baseline Report Supplement to the Supplementary Conditions.
EJCDC® C-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Modified to include RD edits from RUS Bulletin 1780-26 (6/16/2020).
Page 1 of 1
EXHIBIT C—GEOTECHNICAL BASELINE REPORT SUPPLEMENT TO THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Deleted
EJCDC® C-940, Work Change Directive.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 1
WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE NO.: [Number of Work Change Directive]
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
Date Issued: Effective Date of Work Change Directive:
Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):
Description:
[Description of the change to the Work]
Attachments:
[List documents related to the change to the Work]
Purpose for the Work Change Directive:
[Describe the purpose for the change to the Work]
Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to change in Contract
Price and Contract Time, is issued due to:
Notes to User—Check one or both of the following
☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. ☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other reasons.
Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary):
Contract Price: $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated].
Contract Time: days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated].
Basis of estimated change in Contract Price:
☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price ☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other
Recommended by Engineer Authorized by Owner
By:
Title:
Date:

EJCDC® C-941, Change Order EJCDC® C-941, Change Order, Rev.1.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 1
CHANGE ORDER NO.: [Number of Change Order]
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
Date Issued: Effective Date of Change Order:
The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:
[Description of the change]
Attachments:
[List documents related to the change]
Change in Contract Price
Change in Contract Times
[State Contract Times as either a specific date or a
number of days]
Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for final payment:
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. 1 to No. [Number of previous Change
Order]:
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved
Change Orders No.1 to No. [Number of previous
Change Order]:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for final payment:
Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for final payment:
[Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for final payment:
Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for final payment:

Recommended by Engineer (if required) Accepted by Contractor
By:
Title:
Date:
Authorized by Owner Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable)
By:
Title:
Date:

EJCDC® C-942, Field Order.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 1
FIELD ORDER NO.: [Number of Field Order]
Owner: Oakley City Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Aqua Engineering Engineer’s Project No.: 001990.C
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: Oakley-Weber Well
Contract Name: Oakley-Weber Well
Date Issued: Effective Date of Field Order:
Contractor is hereby directed to promptly perform the Work described in this Field Order, issued in
accordance with Paragraph 11.04 of the General Conditions, for minor changes in the Work without
changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or
Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal before proceeding with this Work.
Reference:
Specification Section(s):
Drawing(s) / Details (s):
Description:
[Description of the change to the Work]

Attachments:
[List documents supporting change]
Issued by Engineer
By:
Title:
Date:

SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 1
SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Owner Furnished Equipment
4. Access to site.
5. Coordination with occupants.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification and drawing conventions.
8. Miscellaneous provisions.
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Oakley City Cottonwood Spring Temporary Disinfection Improvements
1. Project Locations:

a. Project Site is located in Oakley, Utah off Weber Wild Road.
b. T1S R6E AND S22 T1S R6E
c. 40° 43’ 37.78” N, 111° 15’ 09.87” W
B. Owner: Oakley City
1. Owner's Representative: Zane Woolstenhulme, Mayor, [phone]
Offices Located at:
960 W Center Street
Oakley, UT 84055
C. Contractor: “Aqua Environmental Services” has been engaged as Contractor for this Project.
D. Engineer: AQUA Engineering, Michael Maughan [phone].
1. Engineer has been engaged for this Project to provide engineering services and to serve
as Project's coordinator.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The following list has been furnished for the convenience of the Contractor and shall not be
considered as representing all Work required in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not
take advantage of any errors or omissions in this listing and shall report any discrepancies or
SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 2
questionable items to the Engineer for clarification. The Work of Project is defined by the
Contract Documents and consists of construction and installation of the following:
1. Mobilization.
2. Demolition of existing valve structure to 6” below existing grade.
3. Earthwork for Well House Pump Building Site.
4. Furnish and Install New 18” HDPE Storm Drain Pipe crossing across dirt road.
5. Earthwork for Dirt Road Grading.
6. Furnish and Install one (1) New 12” Precast Concrete Metering Mainline Manhole and
one (1) metering vault including fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
7. Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC Waterline piping from Spring well to Well
House Building.
8. Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C-900 PVC Waterline from Existing Water Line to
Well House Building.
9. Furnish and Install two (2) New Catch Basins including appurtenances.
10. Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC Waterline from Well House Building to
Existing Cottonwood Tank #1.
11. Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC Waterline from Well House Building to
Existing Water Line.
12. Furnish and Install Site electrical and communications including all pull boxes, conduit,
and pull wire.
13. Well House Building structure including concrete pads, exterior concrete aprons, and
gravel fire access area.
14. Well House Building piping, mechanical, and HVAC including pumps and building drain
piping.
15. Furnish and install 8” of untreated base course on compacted subgrade for Well House
Building Site.
16. Furnish and Install Concrete Headwall and Rip Rap at daylighted drain line.
17. Furnish and Install new Chlorine Room Equipment in Well House Building including
piping, valves, fittings, chlorine tanks and equipment, and appurtenances.
18. Erosion control including re-vegetation of area disturbed during construction.
19. Install junction box, pressure transmitter, and conduit.

SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 3
B. Type of Contract
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract with bid items as indicated in
the bid schedule.
1.4 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. Not Applicable
1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction
operations.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner(s) will occupy sites and existing building(s) during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner(s) during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day -
to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities and accesses without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities
having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner (s) reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to
Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with
completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 4
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of Work.

3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of Work.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: None
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than three (3) business days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Owner not less than three (3) business days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
E. Controlled Substances: Use of alcohol products on Project site is not permitted.
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 5
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations and scheduled on
Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE/ QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall perform QA/QC testing at the following minimum frequencies using
method described in the PROJECT MANUAL.

The work includes all other appurtenant items in accordance with the drawings and these speci-
fications.
The Contractor shall be required to furnish all materials required for the project. See the
General and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.10 SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor is required to submit a construction schedule at the pre-construction meeting.
B. The Contractor is required to coordinate with Oakley City personnel throughout construction.
1.11 ANTICIPATED PHASING SCHEDULE
A. Not Applicable
1.12 COORDINATION WITH DELIVERIES
A. Not Applicable.
1.13 PERMITS & INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor is responsible to arrange for inspections and coordinate with the governing
authorities. Contractor must submit copies of daily inspection/ construction reports to the
Owner.
1.14 WATER SAMPLING
A. The Owner will be responsible for water testing and sampling (if required). The Contractor will
need to coordinate with the Owner for water sampling and testing.
SUMMARY OF WORK
011000 - 6
1.15 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor will coordinate with testing firm to perform testing and
inspection services.
B. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when
they so direct.
C. Any changes or deviations from the approved construction plans and specifications must be
approved prior to commencing work on the change.
1.16 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
A. Not Applicable
1.17 CONSTRUCTION WATER
Not Applicable
1.18 CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC CONTROL
Not Applicable
1.19 EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Not Applicable
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Not Applicable
END OF SECTION 011000

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-1
SECTION 011500 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section shall define the method to be used to measure and make payment for the work
performed as described in the contract documents, technical specifications and design drawings,
hereafter known as the PROJECT MANUAL.
1.2 DETAILS FOR PAYMENT OF BID ITEMS
A. General
1. The amount of work to be done or materials to be furnished under the contract as noted in
the Bid Schedule are estimates and are not to be taken as an expression or implied statement
that the actual amount of work or materials will correspond to the estimate.
2. The right is reserved to increase, decrease or entirely eliminate certain items from the work
if found desirable or expedient, and the Contractor is cautioned against unbalancing of his
bid by prorating his overhead and profit into one or two items only when there are a number
of items on the bid. The overhead, indirect charges and profit shall be prorated on all items
in the bid.
3. The Contractor will be allowed no claims for anticipated profits, loss of profits or for
damages because of any difference between the estimated and the actual amounts of work
done, or materials furnished or used in the completed project.
B. Inclusions
1. Payment for this schedule shall be at the unit price or lump sum as bid, which payment
shall be full compensation for all required work necessary to complete this schedule as
outlined in the PROJECT MANUAL.
2. Unit prices and lump sum payments shall be considered full compensation for all direct
and indirect costs, overhead, profit, insurance, bonds, taxes, fees, permits and for furnishing
all materials, labor, equipment, tools and doing all work as shown on the project drawings,
defined in the specifications and as stipulated herein. Bid prices shall include all protective
and remedial measures to bring work into compliance with the PROJECT MANUAL.
1.3 BID ITEMS
Following is a brief description of each bid item listed in the Bid Schedule as provided in Section
004100 of the Contract Documents (Volume I).

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-2
BASE BID
A. BID ITEM #1 – Mobilization

Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation for all
materials, labor and equipment for mobilization and demobilization. This item includes bringing
to the site all equipment and facilities necessary to accomplish the work and upon completion of
the work, removing from the site the equipment and facilities and leaving the site in a manner
acceptable to the Owner and Engineer. Payment for Mobilization shall be made as follows:

1. When 10% of the work is completed, 80% of Mobilization will be paid.

2. The remaining 20% of Mobilization will be paid with final payment.

B. Bid Item #2 – Demolition of Existing Valve Structure

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum unit price as full compensation
for demolition activities to remove the existing valve structure to 6 inches below existing
grade. The lump sum price bid shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment,
and materials necessary to demolish the existing valve structure.
C. BID ITEM #3 – Earthwork for Well House Site
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum unit price as full compensation
for earthwork to rough and fine grade the well house site. The lump sum price bid shall
include, but not be limited to, all labor, equipment, materials, testing, inspections,
surveying, grading, sub grade preparation, and compaction necessary to provide grading
for the well house site. The earthwork quantities shown on the drawings are neat-line
quantities. No additional payment will be made for excavation outside of these neat -line
quantities.
D. BID ITEM #4 – Furnish and Install New 18” HDPE Storm Drain Pipe
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for each
lineal foot of 18” HDPE Storm Drain Pipe installed as indicated in the project drawings.
The unit price bid shall include excavation, bedding, backfill, compaction, surveying, and
clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all labor, equipment, and materials to perform
the job. The pipe shall be measured by lineal footage of pipe installed, with appurtenances
included as part of the total.
E. BID ITEM #5 – Earthwork for Dirt Road Grading
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum unit price as full compensation
for earthwork to rough and fine grade the dirt access road to the Well House Building. The
lump sum price bid shall include, but not limited to, all labor, equipment, materials, testing,
inspections, surveying, grading, subgrade preparation, and compaction necessary to
provide grading for the dirt access road. The earthwork quantities shown on the drawings
are neat-line quantities. No additional payment will be made for excavation outside of these
neat-line quantities.
F. BID ITEM #6 – Furnish and Install one (1) New 12” Precast Concrete Metering Mainline

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-3
Manhole and one (1) metering vault
1. Under this item the contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for each
Metering Manhole and Metering Vault installed as indicated on the project drawings. The
unit price bid shall include excavation, bedding, backfill, compaction, surveying, and clean
up. The unit price shall also include all labor, equipment, and materials to perform the job.
G. BID ITEM #7 – Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC suction waterline from spring well
to Well House Building
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for each
lineal foot of 8” DIP pipe installed as indicated in the project drawings. The unit price bid
shall include disinfection, pressure testing, flushing, excavation, bedding, backfill,
compaction, surveying, and clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all labor,
equipment, and materials to perform the job. The pipe shall be measured by the lineal
footage of pipe installed, with bends, fittings, valves, mainline connections, pipe restraint,
polyethylene wrap, thrust blocks, and appurtenances included as part of the total.
H. BID ITEM #8 – Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC suction waterline from Existing
Waterline to Well House Building
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for
each lineal foot of 8” DIP pipe installed as indicated in the project drawings. The unit
price bid shall include disinfection, pressure testing, flushing, excavation, bedding,
backfill, compaction, surveying, and clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all
labor, equipment, and materials to perform the job. The pipe shall be measured by the
lineal footage of pipe installed, with bends, fittings, valves, mainline connections, pipe
restraint, polyethylene wrap, thrust blocks, and appurtenances included as part of the
total.

I. BID ITEM #9 – Furnish and Install two (2) New Catch Basins

1. Under this item the contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for
each precast concrete Cath Basin installed as indicated on the project drawings. The unit
price bid shall include excavation, bedding, backfill, compaction, surveying, and clean
up. The unit price shall also include all labor, equipment, and materials to perform the
job.

J. BID ITEM #10 – Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC Waterline from Well House
Building to Existing Cottonwood Tank #1

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for
each lineal foot of 8” DIP pipe installed as indicated in the project drawings. The unit
price bid shall include disinfection, pressure testing, flushing, excavation, bedding,
backfill, compaction, surveying, and clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all
labor, equipment, and materials to perform the job. The pipe shall be measured by the
lineal footage of pipe installed, with bends, fittings, valves, mainline connections, pipe
restraint, polyethylene wrap, thrust blocks, and appurtenances included as part of the
total.
K. BID ITEM #11 – Furnish and Install New 8” DR-18 C900 PVC Waterline from Well House

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-4
Building to Existing Water Line.
1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for
each lineal foot of 8” DIP pipe installed as indicated in the project drawings. The unit
price bid shall include disinfection, pressure testing, flushing, excavation, bedding,
backfill, compaction, surveying, and clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all
labor, equipment, and materials to perform the job. The pipe shall be measured by the
lineal footage of pipe installed, with bends, fittings, valves, mainline connections, pipe
restraint, polyethylene wrap, thrust blocks, and appurtenances included as part of the
total.

L. BID ITEM #12 – Furnish and Install Site Electrical and Communications including all Pull
Boxes, Conduit, and Pull Wire including electrical service from transformer to building

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation
for all materials, labor, equipment, appurtenances, testing, inspections, and incidentals
necessary to furnish and install site and pump controls, conduits, pull wire, pull boxes,
trenching, backfill, tracer wire, transformer, lighting, and all other well house building
and site related control, communications, and electrical as indicated on the project
drawings. The unit price shall also include electrical service from the transformer to the
building and coordination with Rocky Mountain Power. Primary power wire will be
furnished and installed by the Power Company as detailed on the project drawings.

M. BID ITEM #13 – Well House Building Structure including Concrete Pads and Exterior Concrete
Aprons

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation
for construction of the well house building structure as indicated in the project drawings.
The lump sum price bid shall include all materials, labor, equipment, testing, inspections,
surveying, appurtenances, and incidentals necessary including, but not limited to;
reinforced concrete including footings, slabs, foundations, aprons, reinforce concrete wall,
reinforced CMU walls; rough grading to footing subgrade; 60 Mil TPO Membrane roof
system,; metal insulated doors; insulation; trusses; internal framing, finishes and painting
as detailed on the project drawings.

N. BID ITEM #14 – Well House Building Piping, Mechanical, and HVAC including Pumps and
Building Drain Piping

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation
for all materials, labor, equipment, appurtenances, testing, inspections, and incidentals
necessary to furnish and install all piping, mechanical, and HVAC including, but not
limited to: disinfection; restrained connections and couplings; isolation and special valves,
fittings, pressure relief valves, double solenoid control valves, combination air and air/
vacuum valves; pumps; pressure gauges; adjustable pipe supports; fans; heaters; and
louvers as detailed on the project drawings. The lump sum bid shall include all fittings and
appurtenances required to perform the job.

O. BID ITEM #15 - Furnish and Install 8” of untreated base course on compacted native subgrade
for Well House Building service parking

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for each

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-5
square foot of 8-inch untreated base course furnished and installed for the finished surface
of the well house building site as indicated on the project drawings. The unit price bid
shall include backfill, untreated base course, subgrade preparation, compaction, testing,
inspections, and clean up. The unit price bid shall also include all labor, equipment, and
materials to perform the job.

P. BID ITEM #16 – Furnish and Install concrete headwall box and Rip Rap at daylighted drain line

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation
for furnishing and installing the headwall and riprap for the drain line from the well house
building and new precast catch basins. The lump sum price bid shall include all materials,
labor, equipment, testing, inspections, surveying, appurtenances, and incidentals necessary
including, but not limited to; reinforced concrete, riprap and piping.

Q. BID ITEM #17 – Furnish and Install Chlorine Room Equipment in Well House Building
including piping, valves, fittings, chlorine tanks and associated equipment, and appurtenances

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum price bid as full compensation
for all materials, labor and equipment required for the installation of the Chlorination
Room Equipment as detailed in the project drawings and specifications. The lump sum
price bid shall include all piping, valves, chemical cylinders, tanks, scales, vents etc.
required to complete the job.

R. BID ITEM #18 – Erosion Control including Re-Vegetation of Areas Disturbed during
Construction

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the unit price bid as full compensation for
erosion control. The unit price shall include all labor, materials, equipment, appurtenances,
and incidentals required for sediment control devices including construction access
tracking strip, re-vegetation, straw wattles or straw bales, and check dams as indicated in
the project drawings.

S. BID ITEM #19 – Furnish and install Junction box, pressure transmitters per sheet LE-03

1. Under this item the Contractor shall be paid the lump sum bid price as full compensation
for furnishing and installing the junction box, pressure transmitters, and associated conduit
as shown in the project drawings. The lump sum price bid shall include all materials, labor,
conduit, trenching, backfill, equipment, inspection appurtenance and incidentals necessary
to perform the job.
PART 1 -PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 2 - EXECUTION
Not applicable

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
011500-6
END OF SECTION 011500
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 1
SECTION 013300 – CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Engineer's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
B. Construction Schedule: Within fourteen (14) days after the date of Notice to Proceed, the
Contractor shall submit a construction schedule providing the starting and completion dates of
the various stages of the Work. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss its construction
schedule at the pre-construction conference.
C. Schedule of Values or lump sum price breakdown: Within fourteen (14) days after the date of
Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values or lump sum price
breakdown for progress payment purposes.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 2
1. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Engineer and the Contractor reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 3
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Other necessary identification.
3. Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
a. Submit four (4) copies of submittal to the Resident Engineer for review.
4. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and
appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal
form. Engineer will return without review submittals received from sources other than
Contractor.
a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use facsimile of sample form included in
Project Manual.
b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the
following information:
1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Destination (To:).
4) Source (From:).
5) Name and address of Engineer.
6) Name of Construction Manager.
7) Name of Contractor.
8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
10) Category and type of submittal.
11) Submittal purpose and description.
12) Specification Section number and title.
13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
15) Indication of full or partial submittal.
16) Transmittal number.
17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
18) Remarks.
19) Signature of transmitter.
E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 4
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Engineer.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Engineer.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
p. Transmittal number.
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r. Other necessary identification.
s. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer or Owner.
G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 5
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action
stamp.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1. Action Submittals: Submit four (4) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will return three (3) copies.
2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will not return copies.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 6
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. Four (4) paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will
return three (3) copies.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Engineer will return one copy.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 7
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) sets of Samples. Engineer will retain one (1)
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a project record sample.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. Four (4) paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Engineer will return three (3) copies.
F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 8
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of engineers and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
U. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 9
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Engineer.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit three (3) paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor
to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. In the case of shop drawings, each
sheet shall be so dated, signed and certified.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
013300 - 10
3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. General: Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1. “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED” will require no formal
revision and resubmission.
2. “REVISE AND RESUBMIT” or “REJECTED” will require the Contractor to revise said
submittal and shall resubmit the required number of copies of said revised submittal to
the Engineer.
C. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
F. Fabrication of an item shall commence only after the Engineer has reviewed the submittal and
returned copies to the Contractor marked either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or
“EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED”. Corrections indicated on submittals shall be considered as
changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken
as the basis of claims for extra work.
END OF SECTION 013300
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Engineer, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Engineer or Construction Manager.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 2
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individual s, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 3
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-
resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 4
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 5
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, through Construction
Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report
whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer or Construction Manager.
2. Notify Engineer and Construction Manager seven (7) days in advance of dates and times
when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work,
fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform
additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with
requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
2. Retain first subparagraph below to assure validity of agencies' reports.
3. Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to
observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of t he
Work, and submittal of written reports.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 6
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer, Construction Manager, and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Engineer, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Contractor, as
indicated in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 7
B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in
Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Engineer, Construction Manager, and Owner promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Engineer, through Construction Manager, with copy to Owner and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Engineer's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working
hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 8
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
014200 - 1
SECTION 014200 – ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
014200 - 2
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
D. All work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of the referenced
specifications, codes and standards to the extent that the provisions of such documents are not in
conflict with the requirements of these Specifications.
E. References herein to "Building Code" or IBC shall mean the International Building Code of the
International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). The latest edition of the code, as of the
date of award, as approved and adopted by the agency having jurisdiction, including all
addenda, modifications, amendments or other lawful changes thereto, shall apply to the Work.
F. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings and the other Contract
Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the
attention of the Engineer for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any
materials or labor. The Contractor shall bid the most stringent requirements.
G. Applicable Standard Specifications: The Contractor shall construct the Work specified herein
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of
those referenced codes, standards and specifications listed herein; except, that wherever
references to "Standard Specifications" are made, the provisions therein for measurement and
payment shall not apply.
H. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926,
Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including
all changes and amendments thereto.
I. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety
and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and
amendments thereto.
J. References in the Contract Documents to "Standard Specifications" shall mean the "Manual of
Standard Specifications as Published by the American Public Works Association, Utah
Chapter" including all current supplements, addenda and revisions thereof.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
014200 - 3
AA Aluminum Association
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute (Formerly: ACI International)
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors
AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The)
AI Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association
APA Architectural Precast Association
API American Petroleum Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ASA Acoustical Society of America
ASAE American Society of Agriculture Engineer
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASLE American Society of Lubricating Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASQC American Society for Quality Control
ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (The)
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials International
ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions
AWPA American Wood Protection Association
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Industry Association (The)
BOCA BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.)
CDA Copper Development Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CMA Concrete Masonry Association
CPA Composite Panel Association
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America
HI Hydraulic Institute
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM)
ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
014200 - 4
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)
ICC International Code Council
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
IPC Institute of Printed Circuits
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
ISA International Society of Automation
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MCA Metal Construction Association
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
NFPA National Forest Products Association
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE)
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
014200 - 5
UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc.
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.

COE Army Corps of Engineers
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
DOC Department of Commerce
DOD Department of Defense
DOE Department of Energy
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FG Federal Government Publications
GSA General Services Administration
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
SD Department of State
TRB Transportation Research Board
USDA Department of Agriculture
USDJ Department of Justice
USPS
END OF SECTION 014200
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary of Work" for work restrictions and limitations on utility
interruptions.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,
Engineer, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Refer to Summary of Work, Section 011000, for
information on electric power service from existing system. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention
program.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts.
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD
line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.
C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 6 feet high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch rails, with
preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,
Engineer, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to
accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and
orderly.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers and
other fire protection equipment to adequately protect new and existing facilities and temporary
facilities against damage by fire. Hose connections and hose, water casks, chemical equipment
or other sufficient means shall be provided for fighting fires in the new, existing and temporary
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
structures and other portions of the Work and responsible persons shall be designated and
instructed in the operation of such fire apparatus so as to prevent or minimize the hazard of fire.
The Contractor's fire protection program shall conform to the requirements of the OSHA
Standards for Construction. The Contractor shall employ every reasonable means to prevent the
hazard of fire.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille
in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary of
Work."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 4
1. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of water of a quality suitable for all
domestic and construction purposes.
2. All drinking water on the site during construction shall be furnished by the Contractor
and shall be bottled water or water furnished in approved metal dispensers. Notices shall
be posted conspicuously throughout the site warning the Contractor's personnel that piped
water may be contaminated.
3. The Contractor shall not make connection to, or draw water from, any fire hydrant or
pipeline without first obtaining permission of the authority having jurisdiction over the
use of said fire hydrant or pipeline and from the agency owning the water system. For
each such connection made the Contractor shall first attach to the fire hydrant or pipeline
a valve, backflow preventer and a meter, if required by the said authority, of a size and
type acceptable to said authority and agency.
4. Before final acceptance of the Work all temporary water connections and piping installed
by the Contractor shall be entirely removed, and all affected improvements shall be
restored to their original condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to the
agency owning the affected utility.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Toilets: Fixed or portable chemical toilets shall be provided wherever needed for the use
of employees. Toilets at construction job sites shall conform to the requirements of
Subpart D, Section 1926.51 of the OSHA Standards for Construction. The Owner's toilet
facilities shall not be used by the Contractor's work force.
2. The Contractor shall establish adequate and regular collection of all sanitary and organic
wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities provided by the Contractor or
organic material wastes from any other source related to the Contractor's operations shall
be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with all laws
and regulations pertaining thereto. Contractor may install temporary piping for toilet
facilities to discharge into the incoming sewer.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain
equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 5
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. The Owner’s
telephone system shall not be used by the Contractor’s work force.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer in the primary field office adequate for
use by Engineer and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic
communications.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on
Drawings.
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 6
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
J. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no
evidence remains of correction work.
K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
Substantial Completion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 7
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,
and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence
in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance
gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 8
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.
Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up
the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-
treated plywood.
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with
not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in
vestibule.
3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by
authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security
locks where openings are required.
6. Protect air-handling equipment.
7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document
visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and
keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 9
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture
level within 48 hours.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
MOBILIZATION
015050-1
SECTION 015050 – MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits; moving onto the project site(s), temporary
buildings and other construction facilities; all as required for the proper performance and
completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, the following principal
items:
1. Moving onto the site of all Contractors’ project items and equipment required for first month
operations.

2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring and lighting facilities.

3. Establishing fire protection equipment and instructing designated personnel in the operation
of such apparatus.

4. Providing field office trailer for the Contractor complete with fur nishings and utility
services. Refer to the Summary of Work, Section 011000 to determine who will furnish the
water for the Contractor's field offices/ construction. Contractor to furnish and install
necessary piping, wiring and disconnects.

5. Providing all on-site Contractor communication facilities.

6. Providing on-site Contractor's sanitary facilities.

7. Arranging and setting up the Contractor's work and storage yard.

8. Obtaining all required permits.

9. Posting all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs.

10. Have Contractor's superintendent at the jobsite full time.

11. Submittal of Construction Schedule.

12. Install Owner furnished project sign, if required.
1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION
A. The Contractor's attention is directed to the condition that three percent (3%) of the total Contract
Price will be deducted from any money due the Contractor as progress payments until all
mobilization items listed above have been completed. Any such retention of money for failure to
complete all such mobilization items as a lump-sum item shall be in addition to the retention of any
payments due to the Contractor as specified in Article 14 of the General Conditions of the Contract.
B. The Contractor shall include a true representation of the value of mobilization in the Schedule of
MOBILIZATION
015050-2
Values to be submitted as specified under Paragraph 1 4.01, Supplementary General Conditions.
The three percent (3%) of the total Contract Price, mentioned in Paragraph A above, may not
necessarily represent the true value of mobilization.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Not Applicable

END OF SECTION 015050

PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
015300-1
SECTION 015300 – PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall protect all existing utilities, piping and improvements not designated for
removal and shall restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities, piping and improvements to a
condition equal to or better than they were prior to such damage or temporary relocation.

B. The Contractor shall verify the exact locations and depths of all underground piping and utilities
shown and not shown and shall make exploratory excavations of all piping and utilities that may
interfere with the Work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain the actual location of
all existing utilities, piping and other improvements that will be encountered in its construction
operations and to see that such utilities or other improvements are adequately protected from
damage due to such operations.

C. Maintaining in Service: All pipelines, electrical, power, telephone, communication cables, gas and
water mains shall remain continuously in service during all the operations under the Contract,
unless other arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer are made with the Owner. Where the proper
completion of the Work requires the temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an
existing utility or other improvement the Contractor, after necessary scheduling and approval, shall
remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such utility or
improvement in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and the owner of the facility. In all cases of
such temporary removal or relocation, the Work shall be accomplished by the Contractor in a
manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement to a new condition meeting the
specification requirements.

D. All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to inspection and approval by an
authorized representative of the improvement owner before being concealed by backfill or other
work.
1.2 RIGHTS-OF-WAY

A. The Contractor shall not do any work or enter upon the rights -of-way of any oil, gas, sewer or
water pipeline; any telephone or electric transmission line; any fence; or any other structure, until
notified by the Engineer that the Owner has secured authority to do so. After authority has been
obtained, the Contractor shall give the governing utility proper advanced notice of its intention to
begin work.
1.3 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT AND SIDEWALKS

A. All paved areas and sidewalks not designated for replacement, cut or damaged during construction
shall be replaced with similar materials and of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent
undisturbed areas unless otherwise noted. All sidewalks and pavements which are subject to partial
removal shall be neatly saw-cut in straight lines.

PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
015300-2
1.4 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES NOT SHOWN OR INDICATED

A. If the Contractor damages existing utilities, piping or improvements that are not shown or the
location of which was not made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and the damage was
not due to failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care the Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer. If directed by the Engineer repairs shall be made by the Contractor under the
provisions for changes and extra work contained in Articles 13, 14 and 15 of the General
Conditions.
1.5 NOTIFICATION BY THE CONTRACTOR:

A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including water,
sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power,
communications or telecommunication cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all
roadway and state highway rights-of-way, the Contractor shall notify the respective authorities
representing the owners or agencies responsible for such facilities not less than three (3) working
days prior to excavation so that a representative can be present during such work if they are
required to do so.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Applicable

END OF SECTION 015300
PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
015600-1

SECTION 015600 – PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING
A. Comply with Section 312316.26 – Rock Excavation.
1.2 DUST ABATEMENT AND RUBBISH CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide under the Contract all necessary measures to prevent its operation
from producing dust in amounts damaging to property or causing a nuisance to Owner's
personnel and operations or to persons living in or occupying buildings in the vicinity. The
Contractor shall be responsible for damage resulting from any dust originating from its
operations. The dust abatement measurers shall be continued throughout the length of the
contract.
B. During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the site of the Work and other areas
used by it in a neat and clean condition and free from any accumulation of rubbish. The
Contractor shall dispose of all rubbish and waste materials of any nature occurring at the Work
site, and shall establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of such materials and waste.
The Contractor shall also keep its haul roads free from dirt, rubbish and unnecessary
obstructions resulting from its operations. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be
off the site of construction in accordance with local codes and ordinances governing locations
and methods of disposal and in conformance with all applicable Safety Laws and Health
Standards for Construction. The Owner's dumpster shall not be used by the Contractor.
1.3 SANITATION
A. The Contractor shall provide approved fixed or portable chemical toilets wherever needed for
its employees. The Contractor shall establish regular intervals of collection of all sanitary and
organic wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities provided by the Contractor or
organic material wastes from any other source related to the Contractor's operations shall be
disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with all laws and
regulations pertaining thereto. The Owner's toilet facilities shall not be used by the Contractor.
1.4 CHEMICALS
A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether soil
sterilant, herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, and reactant, or of other classification, shall
show approval for use by either the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency or the U. S.
Department of Agriculture. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict
accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
015600-2

1.5 CULTURAL RESOURCES
A. The Contractor's attention is directed to the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16
U.S.C. 470) and 36 CFR 800 which provides for the preservation of potential historical
architectural, archeological or cultural resources (hereinafter called "cultural resources"). If
potential cultural resources are discovered during subsurface excavations at the site of
construction, the following procedures shall be instituted:
1. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.
2. The Engineer will issue a Field Order directing the Contractor to cease all construction
operations at the location of such potential cultural resources find.
3. Such Field Order shall be effective until such time as a qualified archeologist can be
called to assess the value of these potential cultural resources and make recommendations
to the State Historical Society Archeologist.
B. If the archeologist determines that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource, at the
direction of the State Historical Society Archeologist, the Contractor shall suspend work at the
location of the find under the provisions for changes contained in Articles 13, 14 and 15 of the
General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Applicable
END OF SECTION 015600

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
016000-1
SECTION 016000 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, the Contractor shall provide products,
materials or equipment from a single source.
B. Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's selection of a product, material
or equipment, the Contractor shall select an option which is compatible with other products,
materials or equipment already selected.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver, handle and store products in accordance with supplier's
written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and
loss including theft. Delivery schedules shall be coordinated to minimize long -term storage of
products at the Work site and overcrowding of construction spaces. The Contractor shall provide
installation coordination to ensure minimum storage times for products recognized to be flammable,
hazardous, or easily damaged.
B. Products shall be delivered in a dry, undamaged condition in the supplier's unopened packaging.
The Engineer and Owner reserve the right to reject all damaged products, materials and equipment.
Rejected products shall be immediately removed from the site of the Work .
C. Products, materials and equipment shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Motors, electrical gear, mechanical equipment
with open bearings or moving parts or any product sensitive to the environment shall be stored in
weather-tight enclosures with necessary temperature and humidity ranges maintained within the
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Fabricated structural components shall be stored on supports above ground and in a manner to
prevent accumulation of water and warping. Products subject to deterioration from atmospheric
conditions shall be covered in a manner that will provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
E. Products, materials and equipment not stored in a manner that will insure the maintaining of a new
condition will be rejected by the Engineer. Such rejected products, materials and equipment shall
be immediately removed from the Work sit e.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
016000-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Applicable
END OF SECTION 01600 0

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016100 - 1
SECTION 016100 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt
of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Contractor Submittals."
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016100 - 2
b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Contractor Submittals." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
D. Fabricated structural components shall be stored on supports above ground and in a manner to
prevent accumulation of water and warping. Products subject to deterioration from atmospheric
conditions shall be covered in a manner that will provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016100 - 3
E. Products, materials and equipment not stored in a manner that will insure the maintaining of a
new condition will be rejected by the Engineer. Such rejected products, materials and
equipment shall be immediately removed from the Work site.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016100 - 4
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product
by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with
requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed
manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016100 - 5
requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of engineers and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
B. Refer to Article 6.05 of Section 700 of Contract Documents – Volume I for additional
information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Applicable
END OF SECTION 016000

EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
016600-1
SECTION 016600 – EQUIPMENT TESTING AND START -UP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Equipment testing and startup are required for satisfactory completion of the contract and shall be
scheduled and completed within the contract time.
1.2 EQUIPMENT TESTING

A. Contractor Furnished Equipment

1. The Contractor shall provide the services of an experienced and authorized representative of
the manufacturer of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedules that shall
visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment
installation. The Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative revisit the Work site
as often as necessary until any and all problems are corrected. The Contractor shall require
that each manufacturer's representative furnish to the Engineer a written report addressed to
the Owner certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in
accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor
bolts and has been operated satisfactorily under full-load conditions.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all operations testing. The Contractor
shall furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease and all other necessary
equipment, facilities and services required for conducting the tests. The Contractor is
advised that the Engineer and the Owner's operating personnel will witness operations testing
and that the manufacturer's representative shall be required to instruct the Owner's operating
personnel in correct operation and maintenance procedures. This instruction shall be
scheduled with the Engineer and the Owner at least ten (10) days in advance and shall be
provided while the equipment is fully operational. The Contractor shall have previously
furnished the technical manuals required under Section 013 300 entitled, "Contractor
Submittals".

B. Owner Furnished Equipment

1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when Owner furnished equipment is completely
installed in accordance with the Owner furnished manufacturer's instructions and requirements
of the Contract Documents and ready for operational testing. The Engineer will schedule the
manufacturer's representative to visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if
necessary and approve the equipment installation. If the manufacturer's representative cannot
complete the testing and startup services due to the Contractor's negligence in installing the
equipment, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of the service representatives'
revisit to the site of the Work.

EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
016600-2
1.3 STARTUP

A. The startup of the equipment is a coordinating operation requiring the combined technical expertise
of the Contractor, suppliers, Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the effective
coordination of all parties necessary for successful plant, facilities and equipment startup.

B. The Contractor shall be required to startup and operate the various pieces of equipment for a
continuous seven (7) day period under coordination direction of the Engineer and Owner. The start-
up shall not be commenced until all required leakage tests, disinfection and equipment tests have
been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. All defects in materials or workmanship which appear during this test period shall be immediately
corrected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the services of authorized
representatives of the manufacturer, in addition to those services required under equipment testing,
as may be necessary, to correct faulty equipment operation. Time lost for equipment repairs,
wiring corrections, control point settings or other reasons which actually interrupt the startup may,
at the discretion of the Engineer, be justifiable cause for extending the startup test duration.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not applicable

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Not applicable

END OF SECTION 016600

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of
the Work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
1. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
2.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 3
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property,
provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials
until fires are extinguished.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's
property.
D. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Applicable
END OF SECTION 017419
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 14 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer’s
signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 14 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified
in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 14 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Engineer and Construction Manager will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the
Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either
on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of
request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will
notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Engineer will return annotated copy.
b. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated copy.
c. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return two copies.
1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
document.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Operating manuals, technical manuals and instructions. The Contractor's attention is directed to
the condition that one percent (1%) of the contract price will be deducted from any monies due
the Contractor as progress payments if at the seventy-five percent (75%) construction
completion point the approved technical manuals have not been submitted in accordance with
Section 01300 entitled, "Contractor Submittals". The aforementioned amount will be retained
by the Owner as the agreed estimated value of the approved technical manuals. Any such
retention of money for failure to submit the approved technical manuals on or before the
seventy-five percent (75%) construction completion point shall be in addition to the retention of
any payments due to the Contractor as specified in Article 19 of the General Conditions.
E. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project, property or
improvement pursuant to the provisions of law.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls." Prepare written report.
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
O & M DATA
017823 - 1
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Four (4) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. One set will be provided to the
Engineer and three sets to the Owner.
C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Engineer will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
O & M DATA
017823 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information.
B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Engineer.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names
used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and
subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so
that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily
O & M DATA
017823 - 3
navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening
file.
G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear
plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to
hold folded oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
O & M DATA
017823 - 4
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
O & M DATA
017823 - 5
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross -reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
O & M DATA
017823 - 6
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
O & M DATA
017823 - 7
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 2
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Engineer and Construction Manager. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer through Construction Manager for resolution.
4. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Engineer and Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 3
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Engineer's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 1
SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements.
2. Abandoning in-place below-grade construction.
3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place site utilities.
4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates
the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property. Indicate proposed locations and
construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of building demolition with starting and ending dates for each activity.
C. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 2
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
2. Before building demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. As specified in drawings.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by
Owner under a separate contract.
D. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
E. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.
B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
buildings and structures to be demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied
buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be
demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and
seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 3
5. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed.
B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
C. Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to storage area indicated on Drawings.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during
demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating
facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies,
and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.
Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
4. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain
and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
5. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and
dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in
place.
3.4 DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods
required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations.
1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 4
3. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with
governing environmental-protection regulations.
C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
E. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
F. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated on Drawings.
G. Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction within footprint of new
construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction.
1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings,
completely.
H. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures within 5 feet
outside footprint indicated for new construction. Cut utilities flush with grade.
I. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
J. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades
and new grades.
K. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. See Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.
B. Do not burn demolished materials.
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 5
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024116
CONCRETE FORMING
031000-1
SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials for concrete formwork, bracing, shoring and
supports and shall design and construct all forms, bracing, shoring and falsework, all in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Supplemental General Conditions

B. Section 013300 - Contractor Submittals

C. Section 032000 – Concrete Reinforcing

D. Section 032900 - Joints in Concrete

E. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Codes:

The Building Code, as referenced herein, shall be the latest Uniform Building Code (UBC).

B. Government Standards:

PS 1-74 U.S. Product Standard for Concrete Forms, Class I.

C. Commercial Standards:

ACI 347R Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Tolerances: The variation from established lines and grades shall not exceed 1/4 -inch in ten
(10) feet and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. All other
tolerances shall be within the "Suggested Tolerances" specified in Section 3.3 and 3.4 of ACI
347.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONCRETE FORMING
031000-2

2.01 GENERAL

A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the Engineer, all lumber brought on the job site
for use as forms, shoring or bracing shall be new material. All forms shall be smooth surface
forms and shall be of the following materials:

Walls - Steel or plywood panel
Columns - Steel, plywood or fiberglass
Roof and Floor Slabs - Plywood
All Other Work - Steel panels, plywood or tongue and
groove lumber

2.02 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS

A. Materials for concrete forms, formwork and falsework shall conform to the following
requirements:

1. Lumber: shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, construction grade or better, in
conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS10.

2. Plywood for concrete formwork: shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,
exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Pine plywood manufactured especially for
concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements for PS 1 for Concrete Forms,
Class I, and shall be edge sealed.

3. Form materials: shall be metal, wood, plywood or other approved material that will not
adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form,
line and grade shown. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will accomplish such
results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid
plywood, MDO Ext. Grade.

B. Unless otherwise shown, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4 -
inch chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless
otherwise shown.

C. Forms and falsework to support roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total dead load,
plus a live load of 40 psf (minimum).

2.03 FORM TIES

A. Form ties with integral waterstops shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable
means for forming a conical hole to ensure that the form tie may be broken off back of the
face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other
removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 1-inch and all
such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming.

B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops. Removable taper ties
may be used when approved by the Engineer. A preformed neoprene or polyurethane
tapered plug sized to seat at the center of the wall shall be inserted in the hole left by the
removal of the taper tie.

CONCRETE FORMING
031000-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever
necessary. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design of all
forms. Forms which are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from
the Work and replaced at the Contractor's expense. A sufficient number of forms of each
kind shall be provided to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design
and inspection of concrete forms, falsework and shoring shall comply with applicable Local,
State and Federal regulations. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete
placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by
Contractor's personnel and by the Engineer and shall be in sufficient number and properly
installed. During concrete placement the Contractor shall continually monitor plumb and
string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies.

B. Concrete forms shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of structural components as
called for on the Drawings and shall be free from surface defects and sufficiently tight to
prevent leakage.

3.02 FORM DESIGN

A. All forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the
established alignment and grade and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain
their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the
concrete. Suitable and effective means shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent
edges and end of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to
prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets or similar surface defects in the finished
concrete. Plywood, 5/8-inch and greater in thickness may be fastened directly to studding if
the studs are spaced close enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. The
form joints shall be tight so as to prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during the
placing and vibrating of the concrete. The bottom of the wall forms that rest on concrete
footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during
placement and vibration of concrete. Adequate cleanout holes shall be provided at the
bottom of each lift of forms.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Vertical Surfaces: All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed.

B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other
than those shown or specified, except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe stubs and
anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required.

C. Form Ties:

1. Embedded Ties: Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with
suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before
CONCRETE FORMING
031000-4
being filled with mortar as specified for "Finish of Concrete Surfaces" in Section 03300
entitled, "Cast-In-Place Concrete". Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted.
No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the
concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through
the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the
concrete form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are
used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to
prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used
to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded and shall terminate
not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete.

2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, the larger end of the taper tie
shall be on the wet side of walls in water retaining structures. After the taper tie is
removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast
neoprene or polyurethane taped plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole
shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout for water bearing and below -grade
walls. The hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout for above-grade walls
which are dry on both sides. Exposed faces of walls shall have the outer 2 -inches of the
exposed face filled with a cement grout which shall match the color and texture of the
surrounding wall surface.

3.04 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light
sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture
on all exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces which
are permanently exposed to view.

3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed and this work shall be
done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will
be permitted. For roof slabs and above -ground floor slabs, forms shall remain in place until
test cylinders attain a minimum compressive strength of seventy -five percent (75%) of the
28-day strength specified in Section 03300 entitled, "Cast -In-Place Concrete". No forms
shall be disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit before the concrete in the
adjacent panel or unit has attained seventy-five percent (75%) of the specified 28-day
strength and has been in place for a minimum of seven (7) days. Forms for all vertical walls
and columns shall remain in place at least forty-eight (48) hours after the concrete has been
placed, except for periods of cold weather when forms shall remain in place at least seventy -
two (72) hours after concrete has been placed.

3.06 MAINTENANCE OF FORMS

A. Forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition, particularly as to cleanliness,
strength, rigidity, tightness and smoothness of surface. After forms have been removed from
a concrete placement they shall be immediately and thoroughly cleaned and repaired and
surface treated before reuse. The form surfaces shall be treated with a nonstaining mineral
oil or other lubricant acceptable to the Engineer. Any excess lubricant shall be satisfactorily
removed before placing the concrete. Oil shall be kept off the surfaces of steel reinforcement
and other metal items to be embedded in concrete.

CONCRETE FORMING
031000-5
3.07 FALSEWORK

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance
and safety of all falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders and similar
appurtenances, which shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of
the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, and the requirements specified
herein.

B. All falsework shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and to
support the required dead load plus a minimum of 40 psf live load. Falsework for the
support of a superstructure shall be designed to support the loads that would be imposed if
the entire superstructure were placed at one time. Falsework shall be placed upon a solid
footing, safe against undermining and protected from softening. When falsework is
supported on any portion of the structure which is already constructed, the load imposed by
the falsework shall be spread, distributed and braced in such a way as to avoid any
possibility of damage to the structure. Falsework supported off finished floor slabs shall be
set in such a way to protect the finish floor surface from being scared, chipped or gauged.

END OF SECTION 031000
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000-1

SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate and place all concrete and masonry reinforcement
steel, including all the tie wires, clips, supports, chairs, spacers and other accessories, all as
shown and specified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Supplemental General Conditions

B. Section 013300 - Contractor Submittals

C. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

D. Section 031000 - Concrete Formwork

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Codes:

The Building Code, as referenced herein, shall be the latest Uniform Building Code (UBC).

B. Commercial Standards:

ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

WRI Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric.

AWS D1.4-79 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

ASTM A 82 Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for (Latest Edition)
Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A 185 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric (Latest
Edition) for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.

CRSI Manual of Standard Practice (Latest Edition)

CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars (Latest Edition)

1.04 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000-2

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer reinforcing steel placing drawings. These
drawings shall show the number, grade, size, length, mark, location and bending diagrams
for all reinforcing steel and related products, together with lists of bent and straight bars in
accordance with the ACI Detailing Manual (latest edition) of the American Concrete
Institute and the requirements specified herein and shown on the Contract Drawings. The
Engineer may or may not review the placement drawings. Any review of the placement
drawings by the Engineer will be limited to general compliance with the Contract
Documents and will not be returned to the Contractor. Reinforcing steel placement will be
checked in the field using the design drawings. Any discrepancies, errors or omissions from
the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be corrected prior to placement of concrete
and at the sole expense of the Contractor.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide a certified copy of the mill test
report showing physical and chemical analysis for each heat of reinforcement steel delivered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT STEEL

A. Reinforcement steel for all cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction shall conform to
the following requirements:

1. Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 for Grade 60
Billet Steel Reinforcement with supplementary requirement S -1, or as otherwise
shown.

2. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
185 and the details shown. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire equal to or
less than 4.0 size wire shall be either furnished in flat sheets or in rolls with a core
diameter or not less than 10-inches. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires
larger than 4.0 size shall be furnished in flat sheets only.

3. Spiral reinforcement shall be cold-drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements
of ASTM A 82.

B. Accessories:

1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all accessories including necessary chairs or
bolsters, concrete blocks (dobies), tie wires, supports, spacers and other devices to
position reinforcement during concrete placement.

2. Wire bar supports shall be made of plain cold -drawn steel wire with pre-molded,
gray-colored, plastic tips to the legs of the support. The plastic shall have a
thickness of 1/8-inch or greater at points of contact with formwork and extend
upward on the wire a minimum of 1/2-inch. Wire sizes and geometric dimensions
shall be made in accordance with Table II of the latest edition of CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000-3

3. Concrete blocks (dobies), used to support and position reinforcement steel, shall
have the same or higher compressive strength as specified for the concrete in which
it is located. Where the concrete blocks are used on concrete surfaces exposed to
view, the color and texture of the concrete blocks shall match that required for the
finished surface. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports.

4. The wire tie shall be 16-gauge or heavier, black annealed.

2.02 MECHANICAL COUPLERS

A. Mechanical couplers shall be provided where shown and where approved by the Engineer.
The couplers shall develop a tensile strength which exceeds one hundred fifty percent
(150%) of the yield strength of the reinforcement bars being spliced at each splice.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers and other appurtenances shall be
fabricated and placed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
including referenced specifications, codes and standards.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions and shape shown in the
Contract Documents. Fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and
ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings. Bends shall conform to bend dimensions
defined as standard in accordance with details in the ACI Detailing Manual and/or CRSI
Manual of Standard Practice, unless otherwise shown. Bars shall be bent cold and shall not
be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. All hooks shall conform to
bend dimensions defined as ACI Standard Hooks.

B. The Contractor shall fabricate reinforcement bars within the tolerances shown in the ACI
Detailing Manual and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

C. Reinforcing bars delivered to the field shall be tagged with durable material and marked in a
legible manner with waterproof markings. Tags shall show the grade, number of pieces, size
and mark or length of bars.

3.03 PLACING

A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned as shown on the Contract Documents and
shall be adequately supported and wired together to prevent displacement. All reinforcement
steel shall be supported or spaced off the forms by concrete or metal supports which are rigid
enough to prevent any displacement or the reinforcement steel. Where concrete is to be
placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used, in sufficient
numbers to support the bars without settlement. Concrete blocks shall not be used as spacers
between mats. All concrete blocks used to space reinforcement steel off vertical formed
surfaces shall be tied to the steel with wire ties which are embedded in the blocks. For
reinforcement including welded wire fabric over formwork, the Contractor shall furnish
concrete or metal supports with plastic covered legs for bar supports.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000-4

B. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the specified concrete
coverage.

C. Bars additional to those shown which may be found necessary or desirable by the Contractor
for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the Contractor at
its own expense.

D. Placing Tolerances: Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be
within the limits specified in Section 7.5 or ACI 318, except where in conflict with the
requirements of Building Code.

E. Bars may need to be moved to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel, conduits or
embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed the
above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.
Additional bars may be necessary to prevent cracking or provide additional reinforcement in
this case and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own expense.

F. Welded wire fabric placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks
(dobies) spaced not more than three (3) feet on centers in any direction. The construction
practice of placing welded wire fabric on the ground and hooking into place in the freshly
placed concrete shall not be used.

3.04 SPACING OF BARS

A. The clear distance between parallel bars (except in columns and between multiple layers of
bars in beams) shall be not less than the nominal diameter of the bars nor less than 1 -1/3
times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, nor less than 1-inch.

B. Where reinforcement in beams or girders is placed in two (2) or more layers, the clear
distance between layers shall be not less than 1 -inch.

C. In columns, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall not be less than 1-1/2 times the
bar diameter, more less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, more
less than 1-1/2 inches.

3.05 SPLICING

A. General: Reinforcement bar splices shall only be used at locations shown, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Splices of Reinforcement: The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise shown
shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 12.15.1 for a class C splice.

C. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be
securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each two (2) running feet. Wires shall
be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip.

D. Bending or Straightening: Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner
which will injure the material. Bars with kinks or bends not shown shall not be used. All
bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No bars partially
embedded in concrete shall be field-bent, except as specifically permitted by the Engineer.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
032000-5

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Reinforcing steel delivered to the jobsite shall be suitably stored off the ground and protected
from oils, mud, concrete splatter and all conditions conducive to corrosion until embedded in
concrete.

B. The surfaces of all reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar and other
foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in
depositing concrete, reinforcement shall be re-inspected and, if necessary, re-cleaned.

END OF SECTION 032000

JOINTS IN CONCRETE
032900-1
SECTION 032900 – JOINTS IN CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall construct all construction joints, expansion joints and control joints in
concrete at the locations shown and formed in accordance with the details shown in the drawings.

B. Waterstops shall be provided in all construction and expansion joints of hydraulic or below grade
structures unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete. 033000
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Federal Specifications:

TSS-S-00227E(3) Sealing Compound, elastomeric type, multi-component (for Caulking,
Sealing, Glazing Buildings and Other Structures)

B. Commercial Standards:

ASTM C 920-86 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D 624-81 Test Method for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance

ASTM D 1752-84 Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Waterstop: Prior to production of the waterstop material required under this Contract, the
Contractor shall submit for review complete product date, including qualification samples of
extruded sections of each size and shape to be used. The submittal shall also include the
manufacturer's certification that the water stop material meets the physical requirements as outlined
under paragraph 2.01, herein.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Waterstop Inspection: Waterstop installation shall be subject to rigid inspection. No waterstop
shall be cast in concrete without the Engineer's inspection. Not less than twenty -four (24) hours
notice shall be provided to the Engineer for scheduling such inspections.

JOINTS IN CONCRETE
032900-2

B. Waterstop Field Samples: Prior to use of the waterstop material in the field, a sample of a
fabricated mitered cross and a tee constructed of each size or shape of material to be used shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review. These samples shall be fabricated so that the material and
workmanship represent in all respects the fittings to be furnished under this Contract. Field
samples of fabricated fittings (crosses, tees, etc.) may be selected at random by the Engineer for
testing by a laboratory at the Owner's expense. When tested, they shall have a tensile strength
across the joints equal to at least 600 psi.

C. All field joints in waterstops shall be subject to rigid inspection for misalignment, bubbles,
inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets and other defects. All defective joints shall be replaced
and all weathered, damaged or otherwise faulty material shall be removed from the site and
disposed of by the Contractor at its own expense.

D. Waterstops shall be stored on site where it will not be subjected to freezing temperatures or
exposed to the direct rays of the sun.

E. Construction Joint Sealant: The Contractor shall prepare adhesion and cohesion test specimens as
specified herein from each shipment of material received at the jobsite. Sealant shall be stored at
room temperature and shall not be stored longer than seventy -five percent (75%) of the
manufacturer's stated shelf life.

F. The sealant material shall show no signs of adhesive or cohesive failure when tested in accordance
with the following procedure:

1. Sealant specimen shall be prepared between two concrete blocks (1 -inch by 2-inch by 3-
inch). Spacing between the blocks shall be 1/2 -inch. Coated spacers (2-inch by 1-1/2 inch
by 1/2-inch) shall be used to ensure sealant cross-sections of 1/2-inch by 2-inches with a
width of 1/2-inch.

2. Sealant shall be cast and cured according to manufacturer's recommendations except that
curing period shall not exceed twenty-four (24) hours.

3. Following curing period, the gap between blocks shall be widened to 1 -inch. Spacers shall
be used to maintain this gap for twenty -four (24) hours prior to inspection for failure.
1.6 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall provide a three (3) year written guarantee of the entire joint sealant
installation against faulty and/or incompatible materials and workmanship, together with a
statement that it agrees to repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no additional cost to
the Owner, any such defective areas which become evident within said three (3) year guarantee
period.

JOINTS IN CONCRETE
032900-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC WATERSTOPS

A. General: Waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound consisting of virgin
polyvinylcloride and additional plasticizers and stabilizers necessary to meet or exceed the
requirements and performance criteria of these Specifications and the Corps of Engineers
Specifications CRD-C572. No reclaimed scrap or reprocessed material shall be used.

B. Flatstrip, Center-Bulb and Multi-Rib Waterstops: Flatstrip, center-bulb and multi-rip waterstops
shall be detailed and as manufactured by: Vinylex Corp or approved equal; provided, that at no
place shall the thickness of flat strip waterstops, including the center -bulb type, be less than 3/8-
inch. Prefabricated joint fittings shall be used at all intersections of the ribbed -type waterstops.

C. Physical Properties: When tested in accordance with the specified test standards, the waterstop
material shall meet or exceed the following requirements:

ASTM Test
Physical Property, Sheet Material Value Method

Tensile Strength-Min (psi) 1750 D 638
Ultimate Elongation-Min (percent) 350 D 638
Low Temp. Brittleness-Max (-35 Deg F) Pass D 746
Stiffness in Flexure-Min (psi) 400 D 747

Accelerated Aging (CRD-C572)

Tensile Strength-Min (psi) 1500 D 638
Ultimate Elongation-Min (percent) 300 D 638
2.2 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOPS

A. General: Hydrophilic waterstops may be substituted for PVC waterstops. Hydrophilic waterstops
may not contain bentonite.

B. Hydrophilic waterstops shall be manufactured by: Asadi Denka Kogyo K.K. distributed by
Mitsubishi International Corp; SYNKO-FLEX Products, Huston Texas; Sika Corporation Santa Fe
Springs, CA; or approved equal. Hydrophilic waterstops shall be install ed according to the
manufactures recommendations.

C. Physical Properties: When tested in accordance with the specified test standards, the waterstop
material shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
ASTM TEST
Physical Property Value Method

Hardness 30 2240
Tensile Strength 100 D412
Elongation % 500 D412
Specific Gravity 1.18 D792

JOINTS IN CONCRETE
032900-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise shown, waterstops of the type specified herein, shall be fully continuous for the
extent of the joint. The Contractor shall take suitable precautions and means to support and protect
the waterstops during the progress of the work and shall repair or replace at its own expense any
waterstops damaged during the progress of the work.

B. Suitable precautions shall be taken to shade and protect the exposed waterstop from direct rays of
the sun during the entire exposure and until the exposed portion of the waterstop is embedded in
concrete.

C. Splices in waterstops shall be performed by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop sections in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. It is essential that the splices have a
tensile strength of not less than sixty percent (60%) of the unspliced materials tensile strength and
the continuity of the waterstop ribs and of its tubular center axis be maintained.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOP

A. All joints with waterstops involving more than two (2) ends to be jointed together and all joints
which involve an angle cut, alignment change or the joining of two (2) dissimilar waterstop
sections shall be prefabricated by the Contractor prior to placement in the forms, allowing not less
than 24-inch long strips of waterstop material beyond the joint. Upon being inspected and
approved, such prefabricated waterstop joint assemblies shall be installed in the forms and the ends
of the 24-inch strips shall be butt welded to the straight run portions of waterstop in place in the
forms.

B. Adequate provisions must be made to support the waterstops during the progress of the work and to
ensure the proper embedment in the concrete. The symmetrical halves of the waterstops shall be
equally divided between the concrete pours at the joints. The center axis of the waterstops shall be
coincident with the joint openings. Maximum density and imperviousness of the concrete shall be
ensured by thoroughly working it in the vicinity of all joints.

C. Adequate means shall be provided to prevent waterstops from being folded over by the concrete as
it is placed. Unless otherwise shown, all waterstops shall be held in place with light wire ties on
12-inch centers which shall be passed through the edge of the waterstop and tied to the curtain of
reinforcing steel. In placing concrete around horizontal waterstops, with their flat face in a
horizontal plane, concrete shall be carefully worked under the waterstops so as to avoid the
formation of air and rock pockets.

D. Where a bentonite waterstop is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The bentonite waterstop shall be located at the
center of the joint and it shall be continuous around the entire joint. Bentonite waterstop shall not
be used in joints with only one curtain of reinforcing steel. Where a bentonite waterstop is used in
combination with PVC waterstop, the bentonite waterstop shall overlap the PVC waterstop for a
minimum of 6-inches.

JOINTS IN CONCRETE
032900-5
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Joint Location: Construction joints, expansion joints and control joints shall be provided where
shown. When not shown, construction joints shall be provided at 25 -foot maximum spacing for all
concrete construction, unless noted otherwise. The location of all joints shall be submitted for
acceptance by the Engineer.

B. Special care shall be used in preparing concrete surfaces at joints where bonding between two (2)
sections of concrete is required. Unless otherwise shown, such bonding will be required at all
horizontal joints in walls and wall to slab joints. Surfaces shall be prepared by sandblasting and
washing for removal of laitance or any objectional material. Joints shall be kept clean until the
concrete is placed. Vertical joints shall be clean and free of concrete fins, rock pockets or any
objectional material.

C. Sealant grooves shall be formed as shown on the drawings and shall be protected from damage
until final application of the sealant. Care shall be taken to prevent chipping of the sealant grove
during removal of forms.

END OF SECTION 032900

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: Before placing any concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for
review, the complete details of all concrete mix designs which he proposes to use including
proportions and gradations of all materials for each class and type of concrete specified herein.
The mix designs shall be designed by a certified testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
The mix design submittal shall also include test results from at least one (1) trial batch of each
class and type concrete. From each trial batch six (6) 6-inch X 12-inch test cylinders shall be
cast in accordance with ASTM C 31. Three (3) of these cylinders shall be compression tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39 at 7-days and the other three (3) at 28-days. Test results shall
include full information on each cylinder as to mix and slump in accordance with ASTM 143.
Three (3) drying shrinkage specimens shall also be cast and tested in accordance with ASTM C
157 on each type of structural concrete mix design. All costs for such mix design including mix
design tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. If fly ash concrete is proposed by the concrete supplier, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review the design mix for fly ash concrete together with the design mix for
Portland Cement (non-fly ash) concrete as specified in this Section. The Contractor shall
furnish a Certificate of Compliance signed by the supplier identifying the type of fly ash and
stating that the fly ash complies with ASTM C 618 and these specifications, together with all
supporting test data including a certified chemical and physical analysis report prior to the use
of the fly ash the sample represents. The supporting data shall also contain test results
confirming that the fly ash in combination with the cement and water to be used meets all
strength requirements and is compatible with air-entraining agents and other admixtures.
D. When a water-reducing admixture is to be used, the Contractor shall furnish mix designs for
concrete both with and without the admixture.
E. Delivery Tickets: Where ready-mix concrete is used, the Contractor shall provide certified
weighmaster delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. Each certificate
shall show the total quantities, weight of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures and
the amounts of water in the aggregate and added at the batching plant as well as the amount of
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
water allowed to be added at the site for the specific design mix. Each certificate shall also state
the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, the time the batch was dispatched and when it
arrived on the job.
F. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement.
G. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Material certificates.
C. Material test reports.
D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
G. Mix design tests on component materials and for compressive strength and shrinkage of
concrete shall be performed as specified herein. The mix shall not at any time be changed
without approval of the Engineer, except that at all times the batching of fine aggregate shall be
adjusted to compensate for the moisture content. Satisfactory means shall be provided at the
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
batching plant for checking the moisture content of the fine aggregate. The details of concrete
mixes submitted for approval shall include information on the correction of the batching for
varying moisture contents of the fine aggregate.
To avoid unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency, the aggregate shall be obtained
from a source which will ensure a uniform quality.
H. During the progress of construction, the Owner will have tests made to determine whether the
concrete, as being produced, complies with the standards of quality specified herein. These
tests will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, ASTM 179 and ASTM C 157.
The testing expense during construction will be borne by the Contractor. Four (5) cylinder
specimens will be cast and tested for each 50-cubic yards of concrete placed, or at least once per
day per structural concrete placement. One (1) test cylinder will be tested at 7 -days, one (1) at
14-days, and two (2) at 28-days. The remaining cylinder will be held to verify test results if
needed. Air content and concrete slump shall be tested and recorded at the time the test
cylinders are taken. The costs of additional tests, including non-destructive tests and core
drilling, needed to verify or investigate the quality of concrete that is questionable as to meeting
the specification shall be borne by the Contractor.
I. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner, and the
Contractor shall provide assistance to the Engineer in obtaining samples and disposal and
cleanup of excess material.
J. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete:
1. Concrete is expected to reach a higher compressive strength than that which is indicated
in Paragraph 2.05, B., as compressive strength. The strength level of the concrete will be
considered satisfactory if the average strength of the two (2) 28-day specimens equals or
exceeds the required strength and no individual specimen strength falls below the
required strength by more than 500 psi. Where an individual strength test falls below the
required strength by more than 500 psi, the Engineer shall have the right to ask for cores
taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and ACI 318, all at the Contractors expense.
2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be
taken to increase the compressive strength for all subsequent batches of the type of
concrete affected.
3. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements and these specifications, is subject
to removal and replacement at the cost of the Contractor.
K. Shrinkage Tests: Additional shrinkage tests will be made by the Engineer during construction
to ensure continued compliance with these specifications.
L. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94.
M. The Engineer shall have access to and have the right to inspect all batch plants, cement mills
and supply facilities providing products under these specifications. Batch plants shall have
current certificates that all scales have been tested and are certified within the tolerances as set
forth in the National Bureau of Standards Handbook No. 44.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
N. Construction Tolerances: The Contractor shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform
finishing operations so as to ensure that the completed work is within the tolerances specified
herein. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished
from tolerances. Tolerance is the specified permissible variation from lines, grades or
dimensions shown. Where tolerances are not stated in these specifications, permissible
deviations will be in accordance with ACI 347.
The following construction tolerances are hereby established and apply to finished walls and
slab unless otherwise shown:
Structural Component Tolerance
Variation of the constructed In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;
linear outline from the In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch.
established position in plan.
Variation from the level or In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;
from the grades shown. In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch.
Variation from the plumb. In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;
In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch.
Variation in the thickness of Plus 1/4-inch; Plus 1/2-inch.
slabs and walls.
Variation in the locations and Plus or minus 1/4-inch.
sizes of slab and wall openings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from
galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
E. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1
steel.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
c. Portland Cement shall contain no more than 0.60 percent total alkalies. The term
"alkalies" is defined as the sum sodium oxide (Na2O), potassium oxide (K2O),
calculated as sodium oxide (.658 K2O). Only one (1) brand of cement shall be
used for exposed concrete in any individual structure. The cement shall be suitably
protected from exposure to moisture until used. Certified mill test reports for each
shipment of cement to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer. Mill test reports
shall include the alkali content.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. Water shall be clean and free from objectionable
quantities of silty organic matter, oils, chlorides, alkali, salts and other impurities. The water
shall be considered potable, for the purpose of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of
the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (over 1000
mg/l TDS) shall not be used.
2.4 AGGREGATES
A. All concrete aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the Engineer, shall be non-
reactive, sound, uniformly graded and free of deleterious material in excess of allowable limits
specified. Combined aggregates shall be well graded from coarse to fine sizes, and be
uniformly graded between screen sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and
consolidation characteristics. Lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted.
Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33.
1. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel or crushed
stone made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings, organic
matter or other foreign substances. Thin or elongated pieces having a length greater than
four (4) times the average thickness shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) by weight.
Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of the following percentages by
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
weight, and in no case shall the total of all deleterious substances exceed one and one-
half percent (1.5%):
a. Soft Fragments 1.5%
b. Shale 1.5%
c. Coal and Lignite 0.25%
d. Clay Lumps 0.25%
e. Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve 0.50%
f. *Except that when material finer than No. 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, the
maximum amount maybe 1%.
Except as otherwise specified or approved in writing by the Engineer, coarse
aggregate shall be graded as specified in ASTM C 33, size No. 57.
2. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate for concrete or mortar shall consist of clean, natural sand
or a combination of natural and manufactured sands that are hard and durable.
Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of the following percentages by
weight of contaminating substances. In no case shall the total exceed three percent (3%):
a. Removed by Decantation (Dirt, Silt, Etc.) 3%
b. Shale 1%
c. Clay Lumps 1%

Fine aggregate shall not contain strong alkali or organic matter which gives a color darker
than a standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. Fine aggregate shall
have a fineness modulus not less than 2.50 or greater than 3.00. Except as otherwise
specified, fine aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM C 33.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Proportion and mix in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. All concrete shall contain five percent (5%), plus or minus one percent (1%) entrained air
of evenly dispersed air bubbles at the time of placement. The air -entraining agent shall
contain no chloride and conform to ASTM C 260, or U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Specifications CRD-C13. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a
portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical
batcher capable of accurate measurement. The Engineer, or Owner and his duly
authorized representatives reserve the right, at any time, to sample and test the air -
entraining agent or the air content of concrete received on the job by the Contractor. Air
entrainment in the concrete shall be tested by ASTM C 138, ASTM C 231 or ASTM C
173. If any sample tested does not have the specified air content, a second test shall be
performed. If the second test does not meet the specified air content, the concrete
represented by the test shall be removed from the job.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
2. Retain one or more chemical admixtures from six subparagraphs below.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
4. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
5. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
6. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
7. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
8. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture: Concrete waterproofing system shall be of the crystalline
type that chemically controls and permanently fixes a non-soluble crystalline structure
throughout the capillary voids of the concrete. The system shall cause the concrete to become
sealed against the penetration of liquids from any direction and shall protect the concrete from
deterioration due to harsh environmental conditions.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers/Product:
• Xypex Admix C-500
• BASF Masterlife 300D
• Or Approved Equal
2.6 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
B. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and
chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
D. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl
rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch.
E. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,
bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to
concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.
2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
B. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
2.8 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C
156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface.
D. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a normal
thickness of 6 mils.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating. Curing compound shall be Hunt Process Clear ARB as manufactured by Hunt
Process Co., Santa Fe Springs, CA; Dayton Clear Resin Cure as manufactured by Dayton
Superior, Miamisburg, OH; or equal. The curing compound shall contain a fugitive dye so that
areas of application will be readily distinguishable.
2.9 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica
fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used,
by not less than 40 percent.

1. Class C Fly Ash
a. Loss on ignition, maximum 1%
b. SO3 content, maximum 4%
c. Moisture content, maximum 1%
d. R = (CaO - 5%)/(Fe2O3), maximum 4.5

2. Class F Fly Ash
a. Loss on ignition, maximum 1%
b. SO3 content, maximum 3%
c. Moisture content, maximum 1%
d. R = (CaO - 5%)/(Fe2O3), maximum 1.5
3.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 9
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Minimum Cement W/C per cubic yard (94 lb sacks): 6.0
4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus ½ inch or minus 1 inch or 8 inches for concrete with verified
slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
5. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1 percent at point of delivery.
6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
7. Type of Work: Slabs on grade, footings, floor slabs, and all other concrete items not
specified elsewhere.
E. Proportion site work concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50
3. Minimum Cement W/C per cubic yard (94 lb sacks): 6.0
4. Slump Limit: 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump
of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal
maximum aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch.
6. Air Content: 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal
maximum aggregate size 3/8 inch or less.
7. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
8. Type of Work: Site work Concrete.
F. Proportion Lean concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.60
3. Minimum Cement W/C per cubic yard (94 lb sacks): 4.5
4. Slump Limit: 3 inches, plus ½ inch or minus 1 inch or 8 inches for concrete with verified
slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
5. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1 percent at point of delivery.
6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
7. Type of Work: Lean Concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.13 TRIAL BATCH AND LABORATORY TESTS
A. Before placing any concrete, the Contractor shall submit the certified trial batch results of each
class of concrete having a 28-day strength of 3,500 psi or higher, based on the preliminary
concrete mixes submitted by the Contractor. All concrete shall conform to the requirements of
this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractors preliminary mix
design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. The trial
batch shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and admixture proposed for the project.
The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain three
(3) drying shrinkage, and six (6) compression test specimens from each batch. The costs for the
trial batch tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. The determination of compressive strength will be made by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch
high cylinders; made, cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39.
Three (3) compression test cylinders will be tested at 7-days and three (3) at 28-days. The
average compressive strength for the three (3) cylinders tested at 28-days for any given trial
batch shall not be less than one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the specified
compressive strength.
C. A standard sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch shall be performed
according to the requirements for ASTM C 136. Values shall be given for percent passing each
sieve.\
2.14 SHRINKAGE LIMITATION
A. Drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage
length of 10-inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C 157
modified as follows: Specimens shall be removed from molds at an age of 23 + hours after trial
batching, shall be placed immediately in water at 70 degrees F. +3 degrees F. for at least thirty
(30) minutes, and shall be measured within thirty (30) minutes thereafter to determine original
length and then submerged in saturated lime water at 73 degrees F. +3 degrees F. Measurement
to determine expansion expressed as a percentage of original length shall be made at age 7-days.
This length at age 7-days shall be the base length for drying shrinkage calculations ("0" days
drying age). Specimens then shall be stored immediately in a humidity control room
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 11
maintained at 73 degrees F. +3 degrees F. and fifty percent (50%) +4 percent relative humidity
for the remainder of the test. Measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as percentage of
base length shall be made and reported separately for 7, 14, 21 and 28-days of drying after 7-
days of moist curing.
The drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen shall be computed as the difference
between the base length (at "0" days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. the
average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens shall be computed to the nearest
0.0001-inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average
of that test age by more than 0.0004-inch, the results obtained from that specimen shall be
disregarded. Results of the shrinkage test shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 percent of
shrinkage. Compression test specimens shall be taken in each case from the same concrete used
for preparing during shrinkage specimens. These tests shall be considered a part of the normal
compression tests for the project. Allowable shrinkage limitations shall be specified herein.
B. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch, as
measured at 21-day drying age or at 28-day drying age (specified in Paragraph 2.07), shall be
0.036 percent or 0.042 percent, respectively. The Contractor shall only use a mix design for
construction that has first met the trial batch shrinkage requirements.
C. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch
maximum shrinkage requirement by more than twenty-five percent (25%).
D. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction, the Contractor shall take all
necessary action, at no additional cost to the Owner, for securing the specified shrinkage
requirements. These actions may include changing the source of aggregates, cement and/or
admixtures; reducing water content ratio; washing or aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the
number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to
minimize shrinkage or the effects of shrinkage.
2.15 GROUT
A. Grout shall be a mixture of one part Portland cement to 4-1/2 parts sand. Water content shall be
such that the grout can be readily spread, yet not wet enough to cause trouble with surface water
or laitance, or failure to stay in place after screeding. All grout mixes and mixing procedures
shall be submitted in accordance with section 013300-Contractor Submittals, and shall be
subject to review and approval by the Engineer prior to commencing the grouting operations.
B. Procedures for Grout placement shall be approved by the equipment supplier, to insure that no
equipment is overstressed, as well as proper placement tolerances. Equipment Supplier shall
have final say on grouting procedures and final tolerances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Mixing equipment shall be subject to the Engineers approval. Mixers shall be of the stationary
plant or truck mixer type. Adequate equipment and facilities shall be provided for accurate
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 12
measurement and control of all materials and for readily changing the proportions of the
material. The mixing equipment shall be maintained in good working order and shall be
capable of combining the aggregates, cement and water within the specified time into a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the mixture without segregation.
Cement and aggregate shall be proportioned by weight.
B. B. The batch plant shall be capable of controlling and delivering of all material to within one
percent (1%) by weight of the individual material. If bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed
on a separate visible scale which will accurately register the scale load at any stage of the
weighing operation from zero to full capacity.
Cement shall not come in contact with aggregate or with water until the materials are in the
mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water. The procedure of mixing cement with
sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for delivery to the jobsite for final mixing and an
addition of mixing water will not be permitted. Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted.
The entire batch shall be discharged before recharging. The volume of the mixed material per
batch shall not exceed the manufacturers rated capacity of the mixer.
Each mixer shall be equipped with a device for accurately measuring and indicating the quantity
of water entering the concrete, and the operating mechanism shall be such that leakage will not
occur when the valves are closed. Each mixer shall be equipped with a device for automatically
measuring, indicating and controlling the time required for mixing. This device shall be
interlocked to prevent the discharge of concrete from the mixer before the expiration of the
mixing period.
Transit-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C 94. After the
drum is once started, it shall be revolved continuously until it has completely discharged its
batch. Water shall not be admitted to the mix until the drum has started revolving. The right is
reserved to increase the required minimum number of revolutions allowed, if necessary, to
obtain satisfactory mixing, and the Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation
because of such an increase or decrease.
C. Mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site of the work and discharge shall be completed
within one (1) hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates. In hot weather or under
conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the
concrete is 85 degrees F. or above, the time between the introduction of the cement to the
aggregates and discharge shall not exceed forty-five (45) minutes. The use of non-agitating
equipment for transporting concrete will not be permitted.
D. Truck mixers shall be equipped with counters so that the number of revolutions of the drum
may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable type and shall be actuated at the
time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. Concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less
than seventy (70) revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the
manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the
manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be
in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of
revolution of mixing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 13
3.2 PREPARATION OR SURFACES FOR CONCRETING
A. Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly and uniformly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of
any concrete. These surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time concrete
is placed thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud and debris at the time of
placing concrete.
B. The surfaces of all horizontal construction joints shall be cleaned of all latence, loose or
defective concrete and foreign material. Such cleaning shall be accomplished by sandblasting
followed by thorough washing. All pools of water shall be removed from the surface of
construction joints before the new concrete is placed.
C. No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded,
reinforcement steel and preparation off surfaces involved in the placing have been completed
and accepted by the Engineer at least four (4) hours before placement of concrete. All
reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar items shall be set and secured in the
forms where shown or by shop drawings and shall be acceptable to the Engineer before any
concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the responsibility of the Contractor. All surfaces
of embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from concrete previously
placed shall be cleaned of all such grout before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed.
D. All form surfaces in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all previous
concrete, dirt and other surface contaminants prior to use. Damaged form surfaces shall not be
used.
Wood form surfaces in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an approved release agent
prior to form installation. The release agent shall be non-staining and non-toxic after thirty (30)
days. Mill scale and other ferrous deposits shall be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the
contact surface of steel forms. All steel forms shall have the contact surfaces coated with an
approved release agent. The release agent shall be effective in preventing discoloration of the
concrete from rust and shall be non-toxic after thirty (30) days.
E. Where concrete is to be cast against old existing concrete, the old concrete shall be thoroughly
roughened to exposed, hard aggregate by sandblasting or chipping. Any additional surface
preparation shall be as called for in the drawings.
F. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until all water entering the space to be filled with
concrete has been properly cut off or diverted out of the forms and clear of the work. No
concrete shall be deposited under water or allowed to rise on any concrete until the concrete has
attained its initial set. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground
water, if required, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and will be subject to review by
the Engineer.
G. Pipe, conduit, dowels, sleeves and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete
construction shall be adequately positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete. There
shall be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between embedded items and any of the concrete
reinforcement. Securing embeddments in position by wiring or welding them to the
reinforcement will not be permitted.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 14
3.3 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete except where grating will
be installed.
3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended tape.
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 15
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Placement of concrete shall conform to the requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, 304
and 318, except as modified herein.
B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
F. No concrete shall be placed without prior inspection of the forms, reinforcing and embedded
items and approval from an authorized representative of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
notify the Engineer at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of any scheduled concrete
placement and shall call for final inspections no later than four (4) hours in advance of the
scheduled placement. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least two (2) hours in advance
of setting the opposite side of wall forms so that the construction joint preparation, water stop
installation and reinforcing steel inspections can be conducted. It is the Contractors
responsibility to see that the forms are properly cleaned and oiled before being set, the
construction joints properly prepared, reinforcing steel is securely and properly supported in the
correct position and that all embedment items including electrical conduit is correctly installed
before calling for inspections. The Engineer may at his option require the use of placement
cords if deemed necessary.
G. Concrete which upon or before placing is found not to conform to the requirements specified
herein shall be rejected and immediately removed from the work. Concrete which is not placed
in accordance with these specifications, or which is of inferior quality, shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
H. No concrete shall be placed during rain or snow storms, unless completely covered to prevent
storm water from coming in contact with it. Sufficient protective covering material shall be
kept on hand at all times should rain or snow storms arise during concrete placement operations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 16
I. Concrete shall be deposited at or near its final position to avoid segregation caused by re-
handling or flowing. Concrete shall not be deposited in large quantities in one place and
worked along the forms with vibrator or other means. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed
during the placing process and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the
forms more than 2-feet in horizontal direction. Concrete shall be deposited in forms in
horizontal layers not to exceed 24-inches in depth and shall be brought up evenly in all parts of
the form. The rate of placement of concrete in forms shall not exceed 5 -feet of vertical rise per
hour. As the concrete is placed it shall be consolidated thoroughly and uniformly by
mechanical vibration to secure a dense mass, close bond with reinforcement and other
embedded items and smooth surface. The mechanical vibrator shall penetrate not only the
freshly placed concrete, but also the previously placed lift to ensure the lifts become monolith.
New concrete shall be placed against previously placed concrete, not away from it. When
concrete is placed on a slope, placement shall begin at the lower end of the slope and progress
to the upper end for the full width of the placement. Consolidation by mechanical vibration
shall follow directly behind placement and the rate of placement shall never get ahead of the
consolidation crew. Concrete placement shall continue without avoidable interruption, in a
continuous operation until the end of the placement is reached.
J. The drop of concrete into slab or wall forms shall be vertical. Concrete shall not be dropped
through reinforced steel, but deposited in forms using a hopper with a drop chute to avoid
segregation and to keep mortar from coating the reinforcement steel and forms above the in -
place concrete. In no case shall the free fall of concrete exceed 4-feet below the end of the
hopper or chute.
K. If it takes more than 20-minutes to get back to place concrete over concrete previously placed,
the depth of the layers being placed at one time shall be reduced, and/or placing equipment
increased, until it is possible to return with the placing operation to previously placed concrete
within 20-minutes. If concrete is to be placed over previously poured concrete and more than
20-minutes have elapsed, then a layer of grout not less than 1/2-inch thick shall be spread over
the surface before placing the additional concrete.
L. The placement of concrete for slabs, beams or walkways cast monolithically with walls or
columns shall not commence until the concrete in the walls or columns has been allowed to set
and shrink. The time allowed for shrinkage shall be not less than one (1) hour.
M. Concrete shall be placed with the aid of approved mechanical vibrators. Vibration shall be
supplemented by manual forking or spading adjacent to the forms on exposed faced in order to
secure smooth dense surfaces. The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated around
reinforcement, pipes or other shapes built into the work. The vibration shall be sufficiently
intense to cause the concrete to flow and settle readily into place and to visibly affect the
concrete over a radius of at least 18-inches.
Sufficient vibrators shall be on hand at all times to vibrate the concrete as placed. In addition to
the vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, the Contractor shall have on hand one
(1) spare vibrator in serviceable condition. No concrete shall be placed until it has been
ascertained that all vibrating equipment, including spares, is in serviceable condition.
Special care shall be taken to place the concrete solidly against the forms so as to leave no
voids. Every precaution shall be taken to make all concrete solid, compact and smooth, and if
for any reason the surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, such concrete
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 17
shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer. No defective work shall be patched or repaired
without the prior inspection and approval of the Engineer.
N. The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90 degrees F. or less
than 40 degrees F. in moderate weather, and not less than 50 degrees F. in weather during which
the mean daily temperature drops below 40 degrees F. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated
to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep the temperature of the mixed concrete, as
placed, from falling below the specified minimum temperature. If concrete is placed when the
weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F., the Contractor
shall employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water using ice or
placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete, as it is placed, below
90 degrees F. The Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation on account of the
foregoing requirements.
O. Concrete shall not be placed on a frozen subgrade or subgrade that contains frozen materials.
All ice and snow shall be removed from inside forms and from reinforcing steel and embedded
items. the temperature of all surfaces that the concrete will contact shall be raised above the
freezing point for at least 12-hours prior to placing new concrete.
The minimum temperature of fresh concrete as mixed shall be 60 degrees F. for ambient
temperature above 30 degrees F.; 65 degrees F. for ambient temperature 0 degrees F. to 30
degrees F.; and 70 degrees F. for ambient temperature below 0 degrees F. The minimum
temperature of fresh concrete after placing shall be 55 degrees F. for the first 72-hours.
The use of calcium chloride shall not be permitted.
In general, the Contractor shall adhere to the recommendations as outlined in ACI Standard 306
for cold weather concreting, except as required herein.
3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities. Fill tie holes and depressions and bug-holes ¼ inch or
larger in width or depth with mortar.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces to be covered by backfill or coated with below grade
waterproofing systems.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces in water channels, below water surface of basins, inside meter
and valve vaults, inside cells of hydraulic splitter boxes and weirs.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 18
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one -
half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part
portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water.
Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout
will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a
swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
4. Formed concrete surfaces inside buildings and machine rooms and all exposed exterior
surfaces of foundations, basins, vaults, hydraulic structures and curbs.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture. Surface irregularities shall not exceed ¼ inch.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet
waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or floor slabs to be covered with grouted
tile or topping grout and slabs to be covered with built-up roofing.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free
of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 19
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces all building and machine room floors, basin floors not
receiving a grout topping, channel floors, top of interior walls, top of interior curbs, steps
and walkways.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to exterior walkways, curb, gutter,
sidewalk and steps, top of valve or meter vaults, electrical pull boxes and catch basins. While
concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. The schedule for finished unformed surfaces shall be as follows:

Unformed Concrete Surface Schedule

Area
Finish

Grade slabs and foundations to be covered with
concrete or fill material. Scratch Finish

Floor slabs to be covered with grouted tile or
topping grout and slabs to be covered with built-up
roofing. Float Finish

All building and machine room floors, basin floors
not receiving a grout topping, channel floors, top
of interior walls, top of interior curbs, steps and
walkways. Trowel Finish

Exterior walkways, curb, gutter, sidewalk and steps,
top of valve or meter vaults, electrical pull boxes and catch basins. Fine-Broom Finish
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 20
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
D. Immediately following the first frost in the fall, the Contractor shall be prepared to protect all
concrete against freezing.
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Refer to General Conditions and Summary of Work to determine who
will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION 033000
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 1
SECTION 034100 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes precast structural concrete.
1.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings,
support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.
2. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units, including
connections at member ends and to adjoining construction.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Material certificates.
D. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.
E. Source quality-control reports.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural
concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation
of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant as follows:
a. Group C, Category C2 – Pre-stressed Hollowcore and Repetitively Produced
Products.
B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures, testing requirements, and quality-
control recommendations for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for
Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design precast structural concrete units.
B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and with design recommendations in PCI MNL 120,
"PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast
structural concrete units indicated.
C. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand
design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Select material and minimum thicknesses to provide indicated
fire rating.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 3
C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60,
deformed bars, assembled with clips.
D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M or
ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement
in place according to PCI MNL 116.
2.3 PRESTRESSING TENDONS
A. Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270, uncoated, seven-wire, low-relaxation strand.
1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with
ACI 423.7 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.7.
Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.
2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.
3. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement.
4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33/C 33M.
Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or
quarry) for Project.
D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or
strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight
of admixture.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 4
2.5 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water -soluble chloride ion
content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to
ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and
Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-
minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of
cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of
type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to
reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less
than 40 percent.
B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318 or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion by either laboratory trial batch or field test data
methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-
weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
E. Water Absorption: Limit water absorption to 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume,
tested according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.
F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.
G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 5
H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or concrete placement.
1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to
supporting and adjacent construction.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or
prestressing strand without Engineer’s approval.
E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses and specified in-place loads.
G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post -tensioning
methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.
H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from
forming in precast concrete units.
J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by vibration without dislocating or damaging
reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air
voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.
K. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
L. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that does
not show in finished structure.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 6
M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat
or by accelerated heat curing using live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until
compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on
performance or appearance of final product.
N. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements
in PCI MNL 116 and meet Engineer’s approval.
2.8 CASTING INSULATED WALL PANELS
A. Cast, screed, and consolidate wythe supported by mold.
B. Place insulation boards abutting edges and ends of adjacent boards. Insert wythe connectors
through insulation, and consolidate concrete around connectors according to connector
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cast, screed, and consolidate top wythe to meet required finish.
2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each
finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances as well as position
tolerances for cast-in items.
2.10 COMMERCIAL FINISHES
A. Commercial Grade: Remove fins and protrusions larger than 1/8 inch and fill holes larger than
1/2 inch. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces must have true, well-defined surfaces. Air holes,
water marks, and color variations are permitted. Limit form joint offsets to 3/16 inch.
B. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish to
concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch caused by air bubbles, normal color variations,
form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch
in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in.. Major or unsightly imperfections,
honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch.
C. Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch in diameter with sand-cement
paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8 inch in width that occur
more than once per 2 sq. in.. Grind smooth form offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch. Repair
surface blemishes due to holes or dents in molds. Discoloration at form joints is permitted.
D. Grade A Finish: Repair surface blemishes and fill air holes with the exception of air holes 1/16
inch in width or smaller, and form marks where the surface deviation is less than 1/16 inch.
Float apply a neat cement-paste coating to exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap
to remove loose particles. Discoloration at form joints is permitted. Grind smooth all form
joints.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 7
E. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating
screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor
indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or
defects are not permitted.
F. Smooth, steel trowel finish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with
straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish.
G. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 to precast concrete units that receive
concrete topping after installation.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements
and ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and
ASTM C 1712/C 1712M.
B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with
requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range.
Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast
structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary structural framing, shoring, and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are complete.
1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
2. Remove projecting lifting devices and use plastic patch caps or sand-cement grout to fill
voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when
recess is exposed.
3. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids
between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs.
C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon
as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of Engineer.
E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to
precast, prestressed concrete units.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 8
F. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M
for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
H. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections and joints and open
spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings.
Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces
with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding
the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.
B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method
recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect.
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.
1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and
appearance of units have not been impaired.
B. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
C. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when
repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete
surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment
to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
written recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning
operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 034100

GROUTING MORTAR
036000-1
SECTION 036000 – GROUTING MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, finish and cure the following types of grouting mortars as
called for herein and as shown in the Contract Documents

1. Non-Shrink Grout: This type of grout shall be used wherever grout is shown or called for in
the Contract Documents, unless another type is specifically referenced.

2. Topping Grout: This type of grout shall be used for grouting clarifier bottoms.

3. Epoxy Grout: This type of grout shall be used for anchor bolt or reinforcing steel
embedment, repairs and resurfacing.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete. 033000
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Specifications, codes and standards are listed under Section 033000 entitled, "Cast-In-Place
Concrete", and those additional commercial standards as follows:

CRD-C 621-85 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout

ASTM C 109 Standard Test Method for Compressive (Latest Edition)
Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -inch or
50-mm Cube Specimens)

ASTM C-827-87 Standard Test Method for Early Volume Change of
Cementitious Mixtures
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Non-Shrink Grout: Submit manufacturer’s technical data including compressive strength and
expansion data at plastic, flowable and fluid consistencies. Also submit manufacturer’s
applications manual containing instructions and recommendations for mixing, handling, placement
and appropriate uses for each type of non -shrink grout used in the work.

B. Topping Grout: Provide certified mix design including proportions and gradations of all materials
and compressive strength test results from at least one (1) trial batch. Tests shall be performed by a
certified testing laboratory. All costs for such mix design and trial batch tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.

GROUTING MORTAR
036000-2
C. Epoxy Grout: Submit manufacturer’s technical data including strengths and application manual of
instructions for mixing, handling and placing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mix design tests for topping grout shall be performed per the standards referenced herein.

B. During the progress of construction the Engineer may have tests made of each type of grout used in
the work to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. These tests will be made in
accordance with the standards referenced herein. The test expense during construction, except for
the mix design and trial batch tests, will be borne by the Owner. The costs of additional tests
including non-destructive tests and core drilling needed to verify or investigate the quality of
questionable work or material shall be borne by the Contractor.

C. Grout for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

D. If any grout fails to meet the requirements of these specifications, immediate corrective action shall
be taken for all subsequent batches. Grout already in place which fails to meet these requirements
is subject to removal and replacement with all costs borne by the Contractor.

E. Construction tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03300 entitled, "Cast -In-Place Concrete",
except as modified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non-gasliberating, non-metallic, cement-based
grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer’s instructions shall be printed on each bag
or other container in which the materials are packaged.

B. Non-shrink grouts for use as herein specified shall conform to the Corps of Engineers
specifications for Non-Shrink Grout, CRD -C621-85 and to these specifications. The grout shall
have a 28-day compressive strength of 6,000 psi or greater.

C. Non-shrink grouts shall be as manufactured by: Tremcrete Systems Incorporated, Woodland,
California; Gifford-Hill & Company, Inc., Dallas, Texas; or approved equal.
2.2 TOPPING GROUT

A. Cement topping grout for clarifiers or channels shall be composed of one part cement, three parts
sand, and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. The
minimum compressive strength at 28-days shall be 4,000 psi.

B. Cement grout materials shall be as specified in Section 033000 entitled, "Cast-In-Place Concrete".

GROUTING MORTAR
036000-3
2.3 EPOXY GROUT

A. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non-shrink, one-hundred percent (100%) solids system. The
epoxy grout system shall have three components; resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate,
all premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non -reactive
diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous
reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unless
specifically recommended by the manufacturer. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall
be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. Manufacturer’s
instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged.

B. The mixed epoxy grout system shall have a minimum working life of 45 minutes at 75 degrees F.
The epoxy grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 24 -hours and
10,000 psi in 7-days.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 033 000 entitled, "Cast-In-Place Concrete", for
cement topping grout and as recommended by the manufacturer of non -shrink grouts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING NON-SHRINK AND EPOXY GROUT

A. All forming, mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing and consolidated of non -shrink and
epoxy grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. Curing shall be as specified herein.

END OF SECTION 036000

MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
055200-1
SECTION 05520 - MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate and install miscellaneous metalwork and
appurtenances, complete and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of the Building Code
and the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions
of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of this Section.

B. Products and their delivery, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the
following trade standards, codes or specifications.

C. Commercial Standards:

Aluminum Assn. AA-M32 C22A41

AISC Specifications and Commentary

AISI Specifications and Commentary

ASTM A 36/A36M Specification for Structural Steel

ASTM A 48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on
Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel
Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip

ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware

ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded
Standard Fasteners

ASTM A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A 575 Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,
M-Grades

ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
055200-2
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual

1.03 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of all miscellaneous metalwork shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review in accordance with Section 01300 entitled, "Contractor Submittals".

B. Welders Qualifications: Welders shall submit certified qualifications for the type of welding
being performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard: All structural steel shapes, plates, bars and their products shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 36.

B. Corrosion Protection: Unless otherwise shown, miscellaneous metalwork of fabricated steel,
which will be used in a corrosive environment and/or will be submerged in water/wastewater
shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900 entitled, "Painting and Coating", and shall
not be galvanized prior to coating. All other miscellaneous steel metalwork shall be hot -dip
galvanized after fabrication as specified herein.

C. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel metalwork shall by of Type 316 stainless steel.

2.02 STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS

A. Steel pipe handrails which may be partially or wholly submerged or which are located inside
a hydraulic structure shall be entirely of Type 316 stainless steel. All other steel pipe
handrails shall be standard 1-1/2 inch black steel pipe made up by welding and hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.

2.03 METAL GRATING AND FLOOR HATCHES

A. General: Metal grating and floor hatches shall be of the design, sizes and types shown.
Aluminum in contact with other metal or concrete shall have the contact surface shop -
painted per System 10 specified under Section 09800 entitled, "Protective Coatings".

B. Metal Grating: Metal grating shall be of aluminum or stainless steel as shown. No single
piece of grating shall weigh more than 80-lbs. unless specifically detailed otherwise.
Aluminum shall be 6061T6 Alloy Bearing Bars and 6063T5 Alloy Cross Bars. Stainless
steel shall be Type 316. All grating shall be completely banded. Grating shall be rated at 150
lb/sq. ft.

C. Floor Hatches: Floor hatches shall be of steel or aluminum as shown. Hatches shall be
double-swing and shall be furnished with two (2) stay bars designed to hold the cover in an
open position and provide a railing around the opening. The hatch shall be designed to
provide storage for the stay bars when the hatch is closed. The hatch shall have four (4)
flush handles and a gutter or moat-type edge drain complete with drain connection. Steel

MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
055200-3
hatches shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

2.04 SEAT ANGLES AND SUPPORTS

A. Seat angles for grating shall be aluminum or stainless steel. All support angles buried,
submerged or below top of hydraulic structures shall be stainless steel.

2.05 BOLTS AND ANCHORS

A. Galvanized Bolts: Except where otherwise shown or specified, all bolts, anchor bolts and
nuts shall be steel, galvanized after fabrication as specified herein. Threads on galvanized
bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they retain their normal
clearance after hot-dip galvanizing.

B. Steel for Bolts: Except as otherwise specified herein, steel for bolts, anchor bolts and cap
screws shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 307 Grade B, or threaded
parts of ASTM A 36 and shall meet the following additional requirements:

1. The nut material shall be free-cutting steel.

2. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts. Threads shall
be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the American Standard
for Screw Threads. All bolts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads and nuts
shall be Heavy Hexagon Series.

3. The length of all bolts shall be such that after joints are made up, each bolt shall
extend through the entire nut, but in no case more than 1/2 -inch beyond the nut.

C. Stainless Steel Bolts: Unless otherwise shown, all bolts, anchor bolts, washers and nuts
which are buried, submerged or below the top of the wall inside any hydraulic structure shall
be of Type 316 stainless steel.

D. Unless otherwise shown, expanding-type anchors shall be steel expansion type. Lead
caulking anchors will not be permitted. Size shall be as shown. Expansion type anchors
which are to be embedded in grout may be steel. Non -embedded buried, submerged or
below top of hydraulic structure anchors shall be entirely stainless steel.

2.06 POWER-DRIVEN PINS

A. Power-driven pins shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabrication and Erection: Except as otherwise shown, the fabrication and erection of
structural steel shall conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel
Construction "Manual of Steel Construction".

B. Aluminum Railings: Aluminum railing is specified in Section 05521.

MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
055200-4
C. Steel Railings: Field welding of steel pipe handrail joints will be permitted only if approved
by the Engineer.

3.02 WELDING

A. Method: All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as
described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other
pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the
AWS Standards governing same.

B. Quality: In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped,
supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld
reinforcement shall be as specified for the AWS Code. Upon completion of welding, all
weld splatter, flux, slag and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be
repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance with uniform weld contours and dimensions.
All burrs, spatter and sharp corners of material shall be ground smooth prior to coating.

3.03 GALVANIZING

A. All structural steel plates, shapes, bars and fabricated assemblies required to be galvanized
shall, after the steel has been thoroughly cleaned of rust and scale, be galvanized in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 123. Any galvanized part that becomes
warped during the galvanizing operation shall be straightened. Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and
similar threaded fasteners, after being properly cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM A 153. Field repairs to galvanizing shall be made using
"Galvinox", "Galvo-Weld", or approved equal.

END OF SECTION 055200
Sealants, Caulking, and Below
Grade Waterproofing
079200-1
SECTION 079200 - SEALANTS, CAULKING AND BELOW GRADE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall perform all caulking, sealing, moisture protection and appurtenant work
complete and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Joints In Concrete. Section 032900

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Federal Specifications:

TT-S-00230C(2) Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single
Component, (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing
in Buildings and Other Structures).

TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base, (For
Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building and
Other Structures).

B. Commercial Standards:

ASTM D 41 Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing.

ASTM D 226 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

ASTM D 312 Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing.

ASTM D 4551 Standard for PVC Flexible Sheeting for Concealed
Water Containment Membranes.

1.04 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, samples, including color
samples of all the caulking and sealant materials and other moisture protection materials he
proposes to use. The samples shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and
product identification and shall be submitted along with the manufacturer's technical data
and application instructions.

B. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturer's technical literature, specifications,
warranty and installation instructions.

Sealants, Caulking, and Below
Grade Waterproofing
079200-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANTS AND CAULKING MATERIALS

A. All caulking and sealing materials shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Sealant for joints in concrete is specified under Section 032900, entitled "Joints in
Concrete".

2. Sealant for general exterior and/or interior architectural use shall be 2 -part
polyurethane, gun grade, such as Products Research Corp "210"; Progress Unlimited
"Iso-Flex 2000"; or equal. Sealant for interior use may be 1-part acrylic trypolymer
sealant, such as Tremco's "Mono"; Dap One-Part Acrylic; or equal.

3. The sealants used with aluminum doors, windows, storefronts and frames shall be
silicone sealant conforming to Federal Specifications TT -S-001543A (Class A) and
TT-S-00230C(2) (Type II, Class A).

4. Filler material shall be resilient, closed-cell polyethylene foam and/or bond breakers
of proper size for joint widths. It shall be compatible with sealant manufacturer's
product.

5. Primers shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's printed instructions for
caulking and sealants.

6. Cleaning and cleanup solvents shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's
printed instructions for caulking and sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All work under this Section and all testing, where applicable, shall be performed in
accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, specifications and installation
instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified herein; and,
except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to assure
performance of the waterproofing system.

B. Authorized Installers: Caulking, sealants and moisture protection shall be complete systems
and installed only by installers authorized and approved by the respective manufacturers.

C. Sub-Slab Membrane: A sub-slab membrane shall be installed under all new building floor
slabs with vinyl composition tile finishes and at other locations designated in the Contract
Documents.

D. Showers: Showers shall be provided with a shower pan membrane waterproofing system as
specified herein for moisture protection.

3.02 SEALANT FILLED JOINTS
Sealants, Caulking, and Below
Grade Waterproofing
079200-3

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the on -site services of the sealant
manufacturer's representative prior to sealant work to inspect the joints to be sealed and to
instruct the installer in the proper use of the materials. Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be
clean, dry and free of dust, loose mortar and other foreign materials. Ferrous metal surfaces
shall be cleaned of all rust, mill scale and other coatings by wire brush, grinding or
sandblasting. Oil and grease shall be removed by cleaning in accordance with sealant
manufacturer's printed recommendations. Protective coatings shall be removed from all
aluminum surfaces against which caulking or sealing compound is to be placed. Bituminous
or resinous materials shall be removed from surfaces to receive caulking or sealants. Where
required by the manufacturer, sides of joints of porous materials shall be primed immediately
prior to caulking or sealing.

B. Sealant depth in expansion joints shall be 1/2 the width of joint, but not less than 1/8 -inch
deep and 1/4-inch wide nor more than 1/2-inch deep and 1-inch wide. All joints shall have a
rigid filler material installed to proper depth prior to application of sealant.

C. A full bead of sealant shall be applied into the joint under sufficient pressure with the nozzle
drawn across sealant to completely fill the void space and to ensure complete wetting of
contact area to obtain uniform adhesion. Sealants shall be tooled immediately after exposure
with caulking tool or soft bristled brush moistened with solvent. The finished sealant filled
joint shall be slightly concave unless detailed otherwise.

D. After application of sealant and caulking materials, adjacent materials which have been
soiled shall be cleaned and left in a neat, clean, undamaged or discolored condition. On
porous surfaces, excess sealant shall be removed per sealant or caulking manufacturer's
printed instructions.

END OF SECTION 079200

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-1
SECTION 220050 – GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several other
sections of this specification.

B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following:

1. Steel Piping
2. Copper Piping
3. Cast-Iron Pressure Piping
4. Cast-Iron Soil Piping
5. Plastic Piping
6. Grooved Joint Piping
7. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products.

C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished as part of factory - fabricated equipment, are specified as
part of equipment assembly in other Division - 22 sections.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe
fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications:

1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of similar
nature.

2. Licensed as a firm in the contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah.

3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and
all other work in progress by the contractor.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-2
4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or
apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.

C. Welding Certification:

1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months.

2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313.

3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at
the job site.

4. The contractor shall submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the
Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on
the project until so certified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and
dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing
manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system.

B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.

C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical
fitting. Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.

1.5 REFERENCES:

A. Codes and Standards:

1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.

2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping
work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay, and similar units of pipe, provide
factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through
shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and
moisture from inside of pipe and tube.

B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-3
C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by
packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall
thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated,
provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply
with governing regulations and industry standards. Use United States (domestic) manufactured
pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe.

B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and
pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe,
tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with
governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's
recommendations where applicable. Use domestic manufactured fittings only. Do not use
foreign manufactured fittings.

2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:

A. Black Steel Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A 53.

B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.

C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.

D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.

E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691.

F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting.

G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4.

H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.

I. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300 lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by Installer for
proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and
metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated.

J. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250oF. Equal to Walter Vallet Company V-line insulating
coupling.

K. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.

L. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material
group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Material Group: Group 1.1.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-4

2. End Connections: Buttwelding.

3. Facings: Raised-face.

4. Steel Pipe Flanges For Waterworks Service: AWWA C207.

M. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for
threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe.

N. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined
by Installer to comply with installation requirements.

O. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less
than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe
size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples).

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service;
hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated.

B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.

C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280.

D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.

E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.

F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.

G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.

H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.

I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24.

J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated.

2.4 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:

A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401.

B. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C 564 and
stainless steel clamp holding band.

D. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with same
standards (ASTM A 74).

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-5

E. Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564.

F. Lead/Oakum Joint Materials: Provide products complying with governing regulations for use
in service indicated.

2.5 PLASTIC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS:

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 1785. Schedule 80.

B. PVC Fittings:

1. Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D 2467.

2. Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D 2464.

C. Polypropylene Pipe: Piping and fittings shall be manufactured to Schedule 80 iron pipe
dimension, from virgin unpigmented polypropylene pipe grade material, without the addition of
normal antioxidants or slip agents. The pipe shall be furnished in 10 foot lengths, cylindrical
and straight, and sterile capped at time of manufacture. Pipe and fittings shall meet ASTM
D2146, but without additives, and be manufactured to meet dimensional tolerances of ASTM
D1785.

Fittings to have electric resistance coils.

2.6 ACID RESISTANT CAST IRON:

A. Bell and spigot type, high silicon iron alloy "Duriron” or approved equal, with chemical
resistant packing and caulked lead joints.

B. POLYPROPYLENE PIPE: Orion Blueline, flame retardant, Schedule 40, with Schedule 40
fittings, heat fusion welded joints. Alternate manufacturers, GSR, Enfield. Meet material
standards of ASTM-D4101, joint standards of ASTM-D2657.

2.7 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS POLYETHYLENE LINED AND ENCASED:

A. Ductile iron pipe materials shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

B. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10
for diameters 3-inch through 48-inch. Ductile iron fittings larger than 48-inch shall conform to
the above referenced standard with the necessary modifications for the larger size.

C. Polyethylene lining material shall be functional polyethylene complying with ANSI/ASTM
D1248, compounded without an inert filler except 3% carbon black to resist ultraviolet rays
during above ground storage of the pipe and fittings. The polyethylene shall be chemically
bonded to the interior of the pipe and fittings. The polyethylene lining shall cover the inner
surfaces of the pipe and fittings from the plain or beveled spigot and through the entire gasket
seat in the bell. The ling shall extended on the exterior surface of the beveled spigot end to a
point past the gasket seat area at a minimum thickness of 10 mils.

D. Material for the polyethylene encasement shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C105/A21.5.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-6

E. All elastomer gaskets used for ductile iron pipe shall be of neoprene (CR) material.

F. All buried bolts and nuts used in the assembly of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be Cor-Ten
steel bolts as manufactured by NSS Industries, or approved equal.

G. The pipe and fittings shall be of the diameter shown and shall be of pressure Class 350, except
that where mechanical couplings are used and the pipe is grooved, the ductile iron pipe shall be
of special thickness Class 53.

H. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints, push-on joints, flanged
joints and restrained joints as required.

1. Mechanical and push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

2. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

3. Restrained joints shall be "Lok-Ring" Restrained Joint by American Ductile Iron Pipe,
"TR FLEX" Restrained Joint by U.S. Pipe, "Mechanical Lock Joint" by Pacific States
Cast Iron Pipe Company, or equal.

I. Polyethylene Lining:

1. All surface areas which will be exposed to liquids and gases shall be cleaned so as to
remove all deleterious materials. After cleaning, the lining compound shall be applied to
all surface areas so as to obtain a uniform and smooth integral lining.

2. The lining in the barrel area shall have a nominal thickness of 40 mils. and minimum
thickness of 35 mils. However, the lining in the bell area may taper from a 35 mil
minimum thickness at the edge of the barrel area to 10 mil minimum thickness at the
edge of the gasket socket. The 10 mil. minimum lining shall also continue form inside
the barrel area, around the spigot end of the pipe and along the outside of the next pipe to
a point past the total gasket engagement of the next pipe section. This is a minimum
requirement. The thickness of linings shall be determined by using a dry file thickness
magnetic gauge.

3. Lining Material must pass the following immersion tests (35 mil. minimum dry film
thickness) without disintegration, blistering of cracking:

Test Temperature Duration

75% H2S04 70 deg. F 45 days
10% H2S04 140 deg. F 45 days
10% H2S04 70 deg. F 45 days
30% H2S04 140 deg. F 45 days
25% H2S04 70 deg. F 45 days
5% H2S04 140 deg. F 45 days
5% H2S04 70 deg. F 45 days

4. Each piece of pipe shall be tested and shall have an absence of holidays when tested by a
suitable holiday detector. In all cases the barrel area of the pipe shall be tested using a

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-7
dry conductive probe. A wet sponge test shall be used in the bell interior and exterior of
the spigot.

5. The pipe manufacturer shall issue a certification that states that the pipe and lining meet
the following standards and specifications:

a. All ductile iron pipe and fittings have a polyethylene interior lining of 40 mils. in
the barrel area, 10 mils. minimum in the bell area and 10 mils. minimum on the
exterior of the spigot end.

b. Each piece of pipe and each fitting have been checked for holidays utilizing a
suitable testing voltage with a dry conductive probe in the barrel area and a
suitable testing voltage with a wet sponge in both the bell area and the exterior of
the spigot end, and not holidays were found. Holiday testing shall conform to
ASTM G62-87 and NACE Standards RP-02-74 and RP0188-90 (latest revisions).

J. Exterior Coating of Pipe:

1. The exterior surfaces of ductile iron pipe which will be exposed to the atmosphere inside
structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then give a shop coat of rust-
inhibitive primer conforming to the requirements of Division 09000 entitled, "Protective
Coating". This exposed piping shall not be coated with the bituminous coating by the
manufacturer prior to delivery

2. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased per System C-9, see Division
09800.

2.8 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: (Only where acceptable.)

A. General: As Installer's option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for
piping systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230oF (110oC), excluding steam
piping and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, flanged, or
threaded methods, and may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections,
expansion joints, expansion compensators, or vibration reducers.

B. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or
shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal.
Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree
of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature.
(Victaulic style 77 or approved equal) For rigid joints (Victaulic "Zero Flex" style 07 or
approved equal).

1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.

2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.

3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized.

C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure
serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated
by ASTM D 2000.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-8
1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification.

2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.

D. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi.

1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts.

E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging
machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter
around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with
nuts and bolts.

F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings.

1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.

2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.

3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B for 2" to
20".

4. Steel: ASTM A 234.

G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment.

1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.

2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.

H. Specialties:

1. Inline strainers.

2. Suction diffusers.

I. Grooves: Conform to the following:

1. Standard Steel: Square cut.

2. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.

3. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606.

J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of
one of the following:

1. ITT Grinnell Corp.

2. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

3. Victaulic Co. of America.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-9

4. Gustin-Bacon

5. Grippin.

6. Or Approved Equal.

2.9 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer uniformity: conform with the requirements specified in Basic Mechanical
Requirements, under "Product Options."

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
piping materials and specialties which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1. Pipe Escutcheons:

a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
b. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
c. Grinnell
d. Or Approved Equal.

2. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:

a. Epco Sales, Inc.
b. Victaulic Company of America
c. Or Approved Equal.

3. Dielectric Unions:

a. Eclipse, Inc.
b. Perfection Corp.
c. Watts Regulator Co.
d. Or Approved Equal.

4. Strainers:

a. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
c. Spirax Sarco.
d. Victaulic Co. of America. (low pressure applications only)
e. Watts Regulator Co.
f. Or Approved Equal.

5. Expansion Joints:

a. Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc.
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
c. Keflex, Inc.
d. Metraflex Co.
e. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-10
f. Or Approved Equal.

6. Flexible Connectors:

a. Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc.
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
c. Keflex, Inc.
d. Metraflex Co.
e. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
f. Or Approved Equal.

2.10 PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw.
Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe
is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings.

B. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure
service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces;
female threaded ends.

C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe
materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar
metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

D. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an inert and non-
corrosive, thermoplastic lining.

E. Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching
piping system materials. Screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/64" perforations at
233 per square inch.

1. Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating for low pressure applications, and
250 psi pressure rating for high pressure application.

2. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

3. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

4. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

5. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile-iron or malleable-iron body and
access end cap, access coupling with EPDM gasket.

2.11 EXPANSION JOINTS:

A. Rubber Expansion Joints: Construct of duck and butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges,
internally reinforced with steel retaining rings. Provide steel retaining rings over entire surface
of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes, and provide external control rods.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-11

B. Expansion Joints for Grooved Piping: Provide expansion joints constructed of cut grooved
short pipe nipples and couplings, designed by manufacturer to suit intended service. Select
couplings and gasket materials to match balance of piping system.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:

A. Braided Flexible Pump Connector: Stainless steel annular corrugated metal surrounded with a
woven braid of high tensile stainless steel flange connection. Minimum 125 psi pressure
rating, similar to Keflex KSSPC or approved equal.

B. Flexible Connector: Stainless steel annular, close pitch hose with stainless steel braid. Flanged
or threaded connection, Minimum 125 psi pressure rating, similar to Keflex KFCS or approved
equal.

2.13 SLEEVES:

A. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A.

2.14 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS:

A. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure
plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal
and electrical insulation.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by
Installer to comply with installation requirements.

Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined
by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing solders in domestic
water applications.

Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.

Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS.

C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by
Installer to comply with installation requirements.

Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler
metal materials.

D. Gaskets For Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel
flanges, unless otherwise indicated.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-12

E. Piping Connectors For Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or
elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit
to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.

MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping connectors of
the following:

1. Fernco, Inc.
2. Mission.
3. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently- leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated
service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with
adequate and accessible union, flanges, etc., for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of
valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of
reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance.
Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance with codes.

Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain)
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and
column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead
construction, columns and other clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate
insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and
occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as indicated. Provide high point vents, low point drains with valves and extension to
drain for all piping.

C. All piping in press room, mechanical rooms, fan rooms, etc., shall be exposed. Do not conceal
or imbed piping in walls, floors or other structures.

D. Make changes in direction or size with manufactured fittings. Anchor and support piping for
free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building.

E. Piping shall be arranged to maintain head room and keep passageways clear.

F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate
maintenance.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-13
G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, gas cocks, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size
within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc.

H. All piping shall be erected to insure proper draining. Air piping shall pitch down in the
direction of flow a minimum of 1" per 40 feet. Domestic water and utility water shall slope
down a minimum of 1" per 40 feet towards the drain (low point). Refrigerant suction line shall
slope a minimum of 1" per 10 feet towards compressor. Soil, waste, vent, and roof drain lines
shall slope in accordance with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code.

I. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball
valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.

J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6" shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6" and larger
shall be sheet metal.

K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, or
floors, the fire rated integrity shall be maintained.

L. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

M. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing or regulating valve,
solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.

N. Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and
plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated.

O. Install Flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the
final connection to each piece of equipment.

P. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems
(gas, compressed air).

Q. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems
(water). Insulating fittings are not required between bronze valves and steel pipe or between
copper coil headers and steel pipe.

R. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping in or through, electrical room, transformer
vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures or above electrical
gear unless authorized and directed. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through
electrical spaces.

3.2 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

A. Make all necessary provisions for expansion and contraction of piping.

B. Use grooved joint couplings, expansion compensator, offsets or loops as required to prevent
undue strain.

C. At piping connection to heat exchangers provide expansion (joint) as shown on drawings.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-14
3.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:

A. At pumps, engines and at all rotating or vibrating pieces of equipment, provide and install
flexible connectors to accommodate alignment and vibration.

B. At pumps provide and install a series of three grooved joint couplings or braided flexible pump
connectors.

C. At engines provide and install flexible connector.

D. Install owner furnished flex connectors for digester gas and natural gas.

3.4 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

A. All underground steel pipes shall be wrapped with Scotchwrap No. 50 tape to give not less than
two complete layers on the underground piping system, or piping shall have "X-tru Coat",
factory applied plastic protective covering, or pipe shall be coated and wrapped with coal tar
enamel and Kraft paper, all with coated and taped joints.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp
dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on
male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31.

D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized
industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of
tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings.
Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth
and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

E. Welded:

1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.

2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:

3. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0oF (-18oC) where possible,
with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF.

4. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
slag, metal particles and dirt.

5. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8
welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-15
6. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will
ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and
non-metallic inclusions.

7. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to
comply with requirements.

8. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is
indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

9. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe of
size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.

F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.

G. Lead Joints: Tightly pack joint with joint packing material. Do not permit packing to enter
bore of finished joint. Clean joint after packing. Fill remaining joint space with one pouring of
lead to indicated minimum depth measured from face of bell. After lead has cooled, calk joint
tightly by use of hammer and caulking iron.

H. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.

I. Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and
with applicable industry standards:

1. Heat Joining of Thermoplastic Pipe: ASTM D 2657.

2. Making Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D 2235, and ASTM F 402.

J. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in
pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE:

A. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks
and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not
be placed directly on rough ground, but shall be supported in a matter which will protect the
pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site. All pipe damaged prior to Substantial
Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor.

B. If the contractor makes a field cut of polyethylene lined pipe, he shall comply with the
recommendations of the pipe manufacturer in applying an approved field coating to the pipe
end and in allowing proper drying time before pipe assembly. In all cases, as a minimum, a 10
mil. coating shall be applied to the pipe end and shall overlap the polyethylene ling by 2-inches
and extend around the end of the pipe and along the outside of the pipe a minimum of 10-inches
and shall also be allowed to dry before pipe assembly. In addition, the overlapped surface of
the polyethylene lining shall be roughed up to produce a 3 to 5 mil. profile over the entire
surface to secure proper adhesion of the field coating.

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-16
C. Repair of the damaged sections of the polyethylene lining shall be in accordance with the lining
manufacturer's recommendations or as specified above so that the repaired area is equal to the
undamaged lined area in all respects. All damaged lined areas and holidays shall be repaired
immediately.

D. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to ensure that there are no
damaged portions of the pipe. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating show
defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. such damaged lining or coating
shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed.

E. The pipe shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. Before placement of the
pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance
which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this
purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any
interruption to the work. As pipe laying progresses, the contractor shall keep the pipe interior
free of all debris. The contractor shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt,
rocks and any other debris following completion of pipe laying prior to testing and disinfecting
the completed pipeline.

F. Pipe shall be laid directly on the imported bedding material. No blocking will be permitted and
the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe.
Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe is
laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent joint loading at the bells or
couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints
to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of
coating on field joints.

G. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the
Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the
deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters or by the use of additional fittings. However,
in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the
pipe manufacturer.

H. The openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials have been polyethylene lined
in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to prevent unauthorized access by
persons, animals, water or any undesirable substance. At all times, means shall be provided to
prevent the pipe from floating.

I. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pie shall be thoroughly cleaned and a clean
rubber gasket lubricated with an approved vegetable-based lubricant shall be placed in the bell
groove. The spigot end of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated with a vegetable-
based lubricant. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the
previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the
spigot into the bell will not be permitted.

J. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

3.7 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING:

A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and
prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water

GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
220050-17
before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints,
supports and accessory items.

1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.

B. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601.

3.8 PIPING TESTS:

A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping
system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before
testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping
system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each
section with water or air and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.

1. Required test period is 2 hours.

2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or
pressure rating.

3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi
test pressure.

4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is
observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

B. Notifications: At least 10 days prior to commencement of required testing, notice shall be
submitted for review. Tests shall be made prior to painting insulating or covering of any joints
and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping.

C. Inspections: Services of an authorized ASME inspector shall be furnished, not an employee of
Contractor, to visually inspect piping while under hydrostatic pressure. Copies of inspection
shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not hydrostatically tested may be x-
ray tested.

D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and
re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31.

G. Test waste, drain and vent systems in accordance with local plumbing code and these
specifications. Repair failed sections by disassembly and reinstallation.

H. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent
requirements.

END OF SECTION 220050

VALVES
220523-1
SECTION 220523 – VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. Furnish and install all valves complete and in accordance to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings for each
type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of
components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of valve.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of Division 1.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and
sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service.
B. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.
C. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure
rating clearly marked on valve body.
D. Codes and Standards:
1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking System
for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions".
2. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or
welded-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 "Face-to-Face and End-to-End
Dimensions of Ferrous Valves".
3. For all valves: Provide EPDM gaskets on valves on air lines from the blowers.

VALVES
220523-2
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. Features:
1. Adjustable packing gland
2. RPTFE seats and seals
3. Blowout proof stem
4. 200 psig water, CWP, non-shock
5. Temperature range, 50°F to 200°F
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
ball valves which may be incorporated in the work are:

1. Apollo
2. Watts
3. Or approved equal.
2.2 PLASTIC BALL VALVES(1/2” – 6”)
A. All valves shall be true-union design with 2-way blocking capability. PTFE seats shall have
elastomeric backing cushions to provide smooth even stem torque and to compensate for wear.
B. Valve shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi at 70ºF.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
ball valves which may be incorporated in the work are:

1. Asahi America, Inc.
2. George Fischer Sloane
3. Dura Plastic Products, Inc.
4. Apollo
5. Hayward
6. Or approved equal
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES
A. Features:
1. 316 SS Ball Construction
2. SS Body construction
3. RPTFE seat
4. Threaded
5. Full Port
6. Two piece body design
7. Solid Ball Construction
8. SS Lever and Nut
9. Blow out proof stern design

VALVES
220523-3
10. Nylon lever grip
11. 150 psi rated
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
ball valves which may be incorporated in the work are:
1. Apollo Valves
2. Watts
3. Or approved equal.
2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. The rubber flapper swing check valve shall have a heavily constructed cast iron body and cover
in accordance with ASTM A126 Grade B. The body shall be long pattern design (not wafer)
with integrally cast-on end flanges. The flapper shall be Buna-N, or other elastomer, having an
O-ring seating edge and be internally reinforced with steel.
B. Flapper to be captured between the body and the body cover in a manner to permit the flapper
to flex from closed to full open position. Flapper shall be easily removed without the need to
remove the valve from line. Check Valves to have full pipe size flow area. Seating surface to
be on a 45 degree requiring the flapper to travel only 35 degrees from closed to full open
position for minimum headloss. Valve has non-slam closure characteristics.
C. Buna-N flapper which creates an elastic spring effect to assist the flapper to close against a
slight head to prevent or minimize slamming.
D. Valve designed for 175 psi differential pressure for water, sewage, oil or gas (higher pressure
available). The valve shall be suitable for buried service, in which case, stainless cover bolts
must be furnished.
E. When necessary to prime or backflush a clogged pump, an external backflow device can be
furnished—sizes 3” and larger.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
swing check valves which may be incorporated in the work are:
1. APCO
2. Flomatic
3. Or approved equal.
2.5 WAFER CHECK VALVES
A. Check valve shall be cast iron, seat and plug bronze.
B. The seat and plug shall be hand replaceable. The seating surfaces shall be metal to metal or
resilient (Buna-N) to metal.
C. The valve plug shall have a central shaft and spring loaded. The spring must be stainless steel
316. The spring shall be helical or conical in form.

VALVES
220523-4
D. All materials of construction shall be certified in writing to conform to ASTM specifications as
follows:
1. Body Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Gr.B
2. Seat & Plug Bronze ASTM 584
3. Seat w/ Buna-N Seal Bronze Buna-N
4. Spring Stainless Steel ASTM A313 T316
5. Exterior Paint Universal Primer FDA Approved for Potable Water
6. Or approved equal.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. APCO
2. Flomatic
3. Or approved equal.
2.6 POTABLE / UTILITY WATER GATE VALVES
A. Description: The valves shall be suitable for an ordinary waterworks service intended to be
installed in a normal position as indicated in the Plans. All valves shall be Mueller, AVK, or
approved equal, with non-rising stem valves. CPVC valves shall be Ashai/America, or
approved equal.

The minimum requirements for all gate valves shall, in design, material and workmanship,
conform to the standards of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 for Resilient-Sealed Gate Valves.
All materials used in the manufacture of waterworks gate valves shall conform to the AWWA
Standards designed for each material listed. All gate valve operating stems shall be equipped
with a two (2) inch operating nut. All gate valves shall open counterclockwise.

Where static line pressure exceeds 125 psi, only 250 psi working-pressure valves shall be used.
B. Materials:

1. Manufacture and Marking: The valves shall have the name or mark of the manufacturer,
year valve casting was made, size and working pressure plainly cast in raised letters on
the valve body.

2. Type and Mounting: The valve bodies shall be ductile iron, mounted with approved non-
corrosive metals. All wearing surfaces shall be bronze or other approved non-corrosive
material. Contact surfaces shall be machined and finished in the best workmanlike
manner, and all wearing surfaces shall be easily renewable.

3. Valve Seats: Resilient seats shall be applied to the gate and shall seat against a corrosion-
resistant surface. The surface may be either metallic or non-metallic, applied in a manner
to withstand the action of line fluids and the operation of the sealing gate under long-term
service. A metallic surface shall have a corrosion resistance equivalent to or better then
bronze. A non-metallic surface shall be in compliance with ANSI/AWWA C550.
Resilient seats shall be bonded or mechanically attached to the gate. The method used for
bonding or vulcanizing shall be proved by ASTM D429; either method A or method B.
For method A, the minimum strength shall not be less than 250 psi (1,725 kPa). For
method B, the peel strength shall not be less than 75 lb/in. (9.3 kg/m).

VALVES
220523-5
4. All exposed mechanical attaching devices and hardware used to retain the resilient seat
shall be made of a corrosion-resistant material.

5. End Connections: The dimensions push-on end connections shall conform to the
dimensions of the AWWA Standard C111/A21.11. The dimensions for the mechanical
joint connections shall conform to the ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

6. The end flanges of flanged valves shall conform in dimensions and drilling to the
standard ANSI B16.1 for ductile iron flanges and flanged fittings, Class 125, unless
specifically provided otherwise. The bolt holes shall straddle the vertical center line.

7. Gate Valve Stem Seals: Unless otherwise designated in the Approved Plans, all gate
valves up to and including 12-inch in size shall be furnished with O-ring Stem Seals.
Number, size and design shall conform to the AWWA Standards for gate valve O-Ring
Stem Seals. For all valves over 12", the stem seals shall be conventional type stuffing-
box with graphite packing per AWWA Standard No. C600-18.1.

8. Installation of Gate Valves: All gate valves shall be inspected upon delivery in the field
to insure proper working order before installation. They shall be set and jointed to the
pipe in the manner as set forth in the AWWA Standards for the type of connection ends
furnished. The valves shall also be carefully inspected for injury to the outer protective
coatings.

2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES (CLASS 150B)

A. Components

1. Bodies: Valves bodies shall be constructed of ASTM-A126, Class B cast iron for
flanged, mechanical joint, push-on, mechanical x flanged, and push-on x flanged valves.
Flanged valves shall be fully faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI Standards B16.1,
Class 125

2. Seat: Rubber body seats shall be of one piece construction, simultaneously molded and
bonded into a recessed cavity in the valve body protecting the leading edge of the seat
from shearing force of the line flow. Seats may not be located on the disc or be retained
by segments and/or screws. For wafer style valves, the seat shall cover the entire inner
surface of the valve body and extend over the outside face of the valve body to form a
flange gasket.

3. Bearings: Valve bearings shall be of a self-lubricating, nonmetallic material to
effectively isolate the disc-shaft assembly from the valve body. Metal-to metal thrust
bearings in the flow stream are not allowed.

4. Disc: The disc shall be an on-center, lens-shaped design to afford minimal pressure drop
and line turbulence. Materials of construction shall be: ASTM A126, Class B cast iron
disc and a stainless steel type 316 edge with a minimum width equal to the width of disc
edge.
Discs shall be retained by stainless steel pin, extending through the full diameter of the
shaft to withstand the specified line pressure up to valve rating and the torque required to
operate the valve. Disc stops located in the flow stream are not allowed.

VALVES
220523-6
5. Shafts: Valve shaft shall be stainless steel type 304. At the operator end of the valve
shaft, a packing gland utilizing “V” type chevron packing shall be utilized. “O” ring and
“U” cup packing is not allowed.
6. Painting: All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and free from grease before
painting. The valve surfaces except for disc edge, rubber seat and finished portions shall
be a minimum of 8 mils Ameron 370.

B. Operators

1. Operators and component parts: AWWA C504, unless otherwise specified in these
Specifications.

2. Provide with counter-clockwise opening manual operators.

a. Compute operation torque of each valve and operator in accordance with Appendix
of AWWA Standard C504 for velocity of 16 fps and applicable pressure drop across
valve.
b. Operators: Sized for bi-directional flow and 450 ft-lb input torque.

3. Required input torque with maximum handwheel pull of:

a. 80 lbs. for hand wheels and chain wheels, or
b. 150 ft.-lbs. for operating nuts.

4. Hand wheels shall have a maximum diameter of 24-inches.

5. Totally enclosed, permanently lubricated and sealed gear reducers. A vent shall be
provided between the valve trunnion and actuator base to prevent infiltration of fluid into
the actuator.

a. Self-locking with open and close stops provided to limit valve disc travel.
b. Traveling nut type.
c. Submit calculations for valve torque requirements to Engineer as part of Shop
Drawing submittal package. Velocity for dynamic torque must be 16 fps.
d. Valve operators, as manufactured by:
i. Mueller Co.
ii. DeZurik
iii. or approved Equal

6. Provide butterfly valves 3 inches in diameter and larger, and butterfly valves which are
not directly buried or submerged, with manual hand wheels and position indicators.
Install valves with valve shaft in horizontal position unless otherwise specified.

7. Provide butterfly valves which are directly buried or submerged with 2-inch square
operating nut and do not equip with position indicator unless otherwise specified.

8. Valves located in vaults: Provide adequate clearance for handwheel operation.
a. Orientate handwheel as shown in Drawings.

C. Manufacturers

VALVES
220523-7
1. Butterfly valves, as manufactured by:
a. Muller Co.
b. Bray
c. Ashi/America (CPVC Butterfly Valves)
d. Or approved Equal
2.8 AIR VACUUM AND RELIEF VALVES
A. Combination Air Valves (single body, double orifice) are used to allow large volumes of air to
escape or enter thru the larger diameter air / vacuum orifice when filling or draining a pipeline.
B. When the pipeline is filled and under pressure the large air / vacuum orifice shall stay closed,
but the smaller diameter air release orifice shall remain operative and open to allow small
pockets of accumulating air to escape automatically and independently of the large orifice. The
large air / vacuum orifice shall shut off when the free acting center guided plug is raised into
the orifice by the lifting force of the CONCAVE bottom float. The large orifice shut-off shall
be “WITHOUT SPILLING”. The Float* shall be heavily constructed stainless steel
(hermetically sealed) having a concave bottom impact area to provide immediate resistance to
flow and instant upwards movement to shut off the large orifice “WITHOUT SPILLING”. The
Buna-N seat must be fastened to the valve cover without distortion for drop tight shut-off.
C. Materials
1. Body & Cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 GR.
2. Concave Float* Patented Stainless Steel ASTM A240 T304
3. Float Stem Stainless Steel ASTM A581 T303
4. Needle & Seat Buna-N
5. Plug (1”, 2”, 3”, 4”) Brass ASTM B124 (6” Size) Stainless Steel
ASTM A240 T304
6. Leverage Frame Cast Iron ASTM A126 GR. B.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Apco Willamette
2. Valmatic
3. Vent-O-Mat
4. Or Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:

Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in
branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible
and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.

VALVES
220523-8
Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with
stems pointed downward from horizontal plane.
B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper
manner to receive insulation.
C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install
valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections.
1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: One of the following, at Installer's option:

a. Threaded valves.
b. Flanged valves.
2. Pipe Size 2-1/2" and Larger:

a. Flanged valves.
b. Grooved joint valves.
D. Valve System: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide
inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.
E. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise
indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
testing, adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace
packing to stop leaks, replace valve if leak persists.
B. Valve Identification: Tag each valve in accordance with Division-15 section "Mechanical
Identification".
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION:
A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitates maintenance.
B. Provide chain operators for any valves located more than 8 feet above finished floor. This
means double acting lever handles for quarter turn valves, or chain wheels for multi -turn
valves. Arrange valves and set up chain length for proper operation.

END OF SECTION 220523

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-1
SECTION 221030 – DUCTILE IRON PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all ductile iron pipe, fittings, transitions,
connections and appurtenant work, complete and in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Piping, General. Section 15050

B. Water Pipeline testing Section 02666

1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Commercial Standards:

ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-mortar lining for Ductile Iron and Gray
Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.

ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile
Cast Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids.

ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Fittings, 3-inch through 48-inch for Water and
Other Liquids, Gray Iron and Ductile Iron.

ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray
Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe with
Threaded Flanges.

ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.

ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 Mechanical Joints (MJ), Push-on joints.

ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, in Metal
Molds or Sand Lined Molds for Water and Other
Liquids.

ANSI/AWWA C209 Cold Applied Coatings for the Exterior of
Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for
Steel Water Pipelines.

ANSI/AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines.

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-2
ANSI/AWWA C600 Water Mains and Appurtenances, Installation of
Ductile Iron.

ANSI/ASTM D 1248 Polyethylene Lining Material for Ductile Iron
Pipe and Fittings.

ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement.

ASTM A 746 Installation of Ductile Iron Pipe for Gravity
Sewers.

1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other
products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications and as specified
in the referenced standards. Certification shall include physical and chemical properties
of pipe materials and hydrostatic test reports.

B. All expenses incurred in sampling and testing for certifications shall be borne by the
Contractor.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured with the material, have the dimensions, be within
the tolerances and meet the testing requirements set forth in ASTM A746 and ANSI
A21.51. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in nominal 18-foot or 20-foot laying
lengths and shall have the lining called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the
provisions of the referenced standards, as supplemented by the requirements herein.

C. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional
samples of any material including lining and coating samples for testing by the Owner.
The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Mortar lined and polyethylene encased ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA
C151, C104, C105, C214 and D1248, subject to the following supplemental
requirements. The pipe shall be of the diameter and class shown, shall be furnished
complete with rubber gaskets as indicated in the Contract Documents and all specials and
fittings shall be provided as required under the Contract Documents.

B. The pipe shall be handled by use of wide slings, padded cradles or other devices
acceptable to the Engineer, designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe lining
and/or coating. The use of chains, hooks or other equipment which might injure the pipe
lining and coating will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be safely and properly
supported to prevent accidental rolling. The Contractor shall be fully liable for the cost
of replacement or repair of pipe which is damaged.

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-3

C. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20-foot with shorter lengths provided as required
by the Drawings.

D. The pipe shall have a smooth dense interior surface and shall be free from fractures,
defects and roughness.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Ductile iron pipe materials shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51.

C. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C110/A21.10 for diameters 3-inch through 48-inch. Ductile iron fittings larger than 48-
inch shall conform to the above referenced standard with the necessary modifications for
the larger size.

C. Cement for mortar lining shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C104/A21.4; provided, that cement for mortar lining shall be Type II or V. A fly ash or
pozzolan shall not be used as a cement replacement.

D. Not used.

E. Material for the polyethylene encasement shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

F. All elastomer gaskets used for ductile iron pipe shall be of neoprene material.

G. All bolts, nuts, and washers, which are buried, submerged or below the top of the wall
inside any hydraulic structure used in the assembly of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall
be of Type 316 Stainless Steel.

2.3 DESIGN OF PIPE

A. Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C150/A21.50, as applicable and as modified in this Section. The pipe furnished shall be
either mortar-lined or polyethylene-lined as called out in the Contract Documents.
Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased.

B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected and marked according to
applicable requirements previously stated and except as hereinafter modified, shall
conform to ANSI/AWWA C151.

C. The pipe and fittings shall be of the diameter shown and shall be of pressure Class 350
for pipe sizes twelve inches and below and pressure Class 250 for pipe fourteen inches to
twenty inches and pressure class 200 for twenty four inch pipe and pressure class 150 for
thirty inch and above, except that where mechanical couplings are used and the pipe is
grooved, the ductile iron pipe shall be of special thickness Class 53.

D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints, push -on joints,
flanged joints and restrained joints as required.

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-4
1. All Mechanical and push-on joints may conform to ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or
C110/A21.10.

2. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

3. Restrained joints shall be "Lok-Ring" Restrained Joint by American Ductile Iron
Pipe, "TR FLEX" Restrained Joint by U.S. Pipe, "Mechanical Lock Joint" by Pacific
States Cast Iron Pipe Company, or equal.

E. For bell-and-spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots
shall be such that when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket
itself, will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly
installed. The Contractor shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete
with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data
indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions.
In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be
submitted.

2.4 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING

A. Except as otherwise provided herein, interior surfaces of ductile iron pipe, fittings and
specials to be furnished with cement-mortar lining shall be cleaned and lined in the shop
with cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSI/AWWA C104.
If lining is damaged or found faulty at delivery site, the damaged or unsatisfactory
portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications.

B. The minimum lining thickness shall be as follows:

Nominal Pipe Diameter Minimum Lining Thickness
(inches) (inches)
3-12 1/8
14-24 3/16
30-54 1/4

C. For all pipe and fittings with plant-applied cement mortar linings, the Contractor shall
provide a polyethylene or other suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on all
special openings. All bulkheads shall be substantial enough to remain intact during
shipping and storage until the pipe is installed.

2.5 EXTERIOR COATING OF PIPE

A. The exterior surfaces of ductile iron pipe which will be exposed to the atmosphere inside
structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then give a shop coat of rust-
inhibitive primer conforming to the requirements of Section 09800 entitled, "Protective
Coating." This exposed piping shall not be coated with the bituminous coating by the
manufacturer prior to delivery.

B. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE

A. All pipe, fittings, etc. shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact
shocks and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground, but shall be supported in a manner
which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site in accordance
with Paragraph 2.01, herein. All pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to ensure that there
are no damaged portions of the pipe. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or
coating show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged
lining or coating shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and
installed.

C. The pipe shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. Before placement of
the pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign
substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times
thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be
closed during any interruption to the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the Contractor
shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall completely clean the
interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, rocks and any other debris following completion of
pipe laying prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline.

D. Pipe shall be laid directly on the imported bedding material. No blocking will be
permitted and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the
full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of
handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe
to prevent joint loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed
outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for
field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints.

E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other
causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be
made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters or by the use of additional
fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed the maximum
deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

F. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any
time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of
the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will be
backfilled before the formation of ice and frost occurs.

G. The openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials have been cement-
mortar lined in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to prevent
unauthorized access by persons, animals, water or any undesirable substance. At all
times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating.

H. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned and
a clean rubber gasket lubricated with an approved vegetable-based lubricant shall be

DUCTILE IRON PIPE
221030-6
placed in the bell groove. The spigot end of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned and
lubricated with a vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then
be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position.
Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted.

I. All valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury to any part of the valve. All
joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The Contractor shall
adjust all stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to ensure proper
operation. All valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the
location shown.

END OF SECTION 221030
PVC PIPE
221040-1
SECTION 221040 - PVC WATER PIPE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This specification applies to the installation of PVC plastic pressure pipe (cast
iron size), together with fittings and metallic locator tape to be placed above the
pipe.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. All piping shall be PVC pipe conforming to either AWWA C900 (12” diameter
and below) or AWWA C905 for larger diameters. The DR for all PVC pipe shall
be 18 or specified.

2.02 THRUST BLOCKING

A. Concrete used for thrust blocking shall be in accordance with the drawings and
shall be furnished and installed be the Subcontractor.

2.03 METALLIC LOCATOR TAPE

A. 3” wide metallic tape.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE LAYING

A. All PVC plastic pipe installation shall proceed on a stable foundation, with joi nts
closely and accurately fitted. Joints shall be clean and dry, and a joint lubricant as
recommended by the pipe supplier shall be applied uniformly at the mating joints
surfaces to facilitate easy positive joint closure.

B. Pipe shall be installed with uniform bearing under the full length of the barrel,
with suitable excavations being made to receive pipe bells.

C. Select material shall be compacted around the pipe to firmly bed the pipe in
position. If adjustment of position of a pipe length is required after being laid, it
shall be removed and re-jointed as for a new pipe. When pipe laying is not in
progress, the ends of the pipe shall be closed with a tight-fitting stopper to
prevent the entrance of foreign material.

D. Service lines and laterals must be assembled so that no strain is placed on the
pipe during or after backfill operations. After laying of the pipe is completed, it
shall be center loaded with backfill and bedding to prevent arching and whipping
under pressure. Center loading should be done carefully so that joints will be
completely exposed for examination.
PVC PIPE
221040-2

E. In addition to the above requirements, all pipe installation shall comply with the
specific requirements of the pipe manufacturer.

3.02 PIPE BEDDING

A. All pipes shall be protected from lateral displacement and possible damage
resulting from impact or unbalanced loading during backfilling operations by
being adequately bedded.

B. A groove shall be excavated in the bottom of the trench to receive the bottom
quadrant of the pipe. Before preparing the groove, the trench-bottom shall be
filled and compacted to an elevation sufficiently above the grade of the pipe so
that, when completed, the pipe will be true to line and grade. Bell holes shall be
excavated so that only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing from the trench
bottom.

C. Pipe bedding materials placed at any point below the midpoint of the pipe shall
be deposited and compacted in layers not to exceed 10 inches in uncompacted
depth. Deposition and compaction of bedding materials shall be done
simultaneously and uniformly on both sides of the pipe. Compaction shall be
accomplished with hand or mechanical compactors. All bedding materials shall
be placed in the trench with hand tools or other approved method in such a
manner that they will be scattered alongside the pipe and not dropped into the
trench in compacted masses. Bedding materials shall be loose earth, free from
lumps; sand or gravel, free from rocks larger than one-inch diameter; with all
materials free form roots, sod, or other vegetable matter.

D. Pipe bedding shall be select imported granular material. Select bedding shall
consist of placing compacted granular material on each side of and to the level of
12 inches above the top of pipe.

3.03 CUTTING, CLEANING AND INSPECTION

A. Cutting of pipe for closure pieces or for other reasons shall be done in a neat,
square and workman like manner using a method which will not damage the
pipe. Before installation, each pipe shall be inspected be the Subcontractor for
defects. All pipe and fittings shall be cleaned and free of dirt and debris, both
inside and outside, before assembly.

3.04 SEPARATION OF WATER LINES AND SEWER

A. Where water mains cross over sewer lines the water main shall be laid at such an
elevation that the bottom of the water main is 18-inches or more above the top on
the sewer. When these conditions cannot be met the Engineer shall be contacted
for additional specifications and procedures for such crossings. Water service
laterals must conform to all requirements given herein for the separation of water
and sewer lines.

PVC PIPE
221040-3

3.05 THRUST BLOCKING

A. Thrust blocking shall be installed at all bends, tees, hydrants, crosses, valves,
plugs and any other location as specified in the drawings. Thrust blocks shall be
poured against undisturbed soil, and the pipe joints must be left accessible.
Bearing areas for thrust blocks shall be as shown in the drawings. Thrust blocks
shall be formed neatly and plastic membrane shall be place between pipe and
concrete.

3.06 METALLIC LOCATOR TAPE

A. Locating wire shall be laid along with the PVC pipe, 1 foot directly above the
pipe. Care shall be taken to keep the wire in line with the pipe and to avoid and
breaks in the wire. The wire shall be cad welded to all valves and fire hydrants.
Along with testing of the waterline, the locating wire shall be tested for
conductivity. Any breaks in the wire shall be excavated and repaired.

END OF SECTION 221040

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE & FITTINGS
221050-1
SECTION 221050 – HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 TERMS AND CONDITIONS

A. Scope. This specification covers requirements for high-density polyethylene pipe and
fittings for general purpose applications. All work shall be performed in accordance with
these specifications.

B. Referenced Standards. All standard specification, i.e., Federal, ANSI, ASTM, etc., made
a portion of these Specifications by reference, shall be the latest edition and revision
thereof.

1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacture’s product specifications according to
the requirements of section 013300 entitled, “Contractor Submittals”.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Qualification of Manufacturers. The Manufacturer shall have manufacturing and quality
control facilities capable of producing and assuring the quality of the pipe and fittings
required by these Specifications. The Manufacturer’s production facilities shall be open
for inspection by the Customer or his Authorized Representative. Qualified
Manufacturers shall be approved by the Project Engineer.

B. Materials. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be
PE4710 high density polyethylene meeting cell classification 445574C per ASTM D
3350; and shall be listed in the name of the pipe and fitting Manufacturer in PPI1 TR-4,
Recommended Hydrostatic Strengths and Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe and
Fittings Compounds, with a standard grade HDB rating of 1600 psi at 73°F. The
Manufacturer shall certify that the materials used to manufacture pipe and fittings meet
these requirements.

1. Typical material properties shall be submitted to the project design engineer for
analysis. These properties are to be used for engineering evaluation and are not to be
misconstrued as specification minimums.

C. Interchangeability of Pipe and Fittings. Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be supplied
by the same Manufacturer. Pipe and fittings from different Manufacturers shall not be
interchanged.

1. Polyethylene Pipe. Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with
ASTM F 714, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter,
or ASTM D 3035, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled
Outside Diameter and shall be so marked. Each production lot of pipe shall be tested
for (from material or pipe) melt index, density, % carbon (from pipe), dimensions
and either quick burst or ring tensile strength (equipment permitting).

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE & FITTINGS
221050-2

2. Polyethylene Fittings & Custom Fabrications. Polyethylene fittings and custom
fabrications shall be molded or fabricated by the pipe manufacturer. Butt fusion
outlets shall be made to the same outside diameter, wall thickness, and tolerances as
the mating pipe. All fittings and custom fabrications shall be fully rated for the same
internal pressure as the mating pipe. Pressure de-rated fabricated fittings are
prohibited.

a. Molded Fittings. Molded fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with
ASTM D 3261, Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing, and shall be so marked. Each
production lot molded fittings shall be subjected to the tests required under
ASTM D 3261.

b. Fabricated Fittings. Fabricated fittings shall be made by heat fusion joining
specially machined shapes cut from pipe, polyethylene sheet rock, or molded
fittings. Fabricated fittings shall be rated for internal pressure service equivalent
to the full service pressure rating of the mating pipe. Directional fittings 16” IPS
and larger such as elbows, tees, crosses, etc., shall have a plain end inlet for butt
fusion and flanged directional outlets. Part drawing shall be submitted for the
approval of the Project Engineer.

i. Back-up Rings & Flange Bolts. Flange adapters shall be fitted with lap joint
flanges pressure rated equal to or greater than the mating pipe. The lap joint
flange bore shall be chamfered or radiused to provide clearance to the flange
adapter radius. Flange bolts and nuts shall be Grade 2 or higher.

D. Manufacturer’s Quality Control. The pipe and fitting manufacturer shall have an
established quality control program responsible for inspecting incoming and outgoing
materials. Incoming polyethylene materials shall be inspected for density, melt flow rate,
and contamination. The cell classification properties of the material shall be certified by
the supplier, and verified by Manufacturer’s Quality Control. Incoming materials shall
be approved by Quality Control before processing into finished goods.

Outgoing materials shall be checked for:

• Outside diameter, wall thickness, and eccentricity as per ASTM D2122 at a
frequency of at least once/hour or once/hour, whichever is less frequent.
• Out of Roundness at a frequency of at least once/hour or once/coil whichever is less
frequent.
• Straightness, inside and outside surface finish, markings and end cuts shall be
visually inspected as per ASTM F714 on every length of pipe.

Quality Control shall verify production checks and test for:

• Density as per ASTM D1505 at a frequency of at least once per extrusion lot.
• Melt Index as per ASTM D1238 at a frequency of at least once per extrusion lot.
• Carbon content as per ASTM D1603 at a frequency of at least once per day per
extrusion line.
• Quick burst pressure (sizes thru 4-inches as per ASTM D1599 at a frequency of at
least once per day per line.

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE & FITTINGS
221050-3
• Ring Tensile Strength (sizes above 4-inches equipment permitting) as per ASTM
D2290 at a frequency of a least once per day per line.
• ESCR (size permitting) as per ASTM F1248 at a frequency of at least once per
extrusion lot.

X-Ray inspection shall be used to inspect molded fittings for voids, and knit line strength
shall be tested. All fabricated fittings shall be inspected for joint quality and alignment.

1. Permanent Records. The Manufacturer shall maintain permanent QC and QA
records.

E. Compliance Tests – Manufacturer’s inspection and testing of the materials. In case of
conflict with Manufacturer’s certification, the Contractor, Project Engineer, or Customer
my request retesting by the Manufacturer or have retests performed by an outside testing
service. All retesting shall be at the requestor’s expense, and shall be performed in
accordance with the Specifications.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 JOINING

A. Heat Fusion Joining. Joints between plain end pipes and fittings shall be made by butt
fusion, and joints between the main and saddle branch fittings shall be made using only
saddle fusion procedures that are recommended by the pipe and fitting Manufacturer.
The Contractor shall ensure that persons making heat fusion joints have received training
in the Manufacturer’s recommended procedure. The Contractor shall maintain records of
trained personnel, and shall certify that training was received not more than 12 months
before commencing construction. External and internal beads shall not be removed.

1. Heat Fusion Training Services. Upon request, the Manufacturer shall provide
assistance in the Customer’s recommended butt fusion and saddle fusion procedures
to the Contractor’s installation personnel, and to inspectors representing the
Customer.

B. Mechanical Joining. Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be joined together or to other
materials by means of flanged connections (flange adapters and back-up rings) or
mechanical couplings designed for joining polyethylene pipe or for joining polyethylene
pipe to another material. Mechanical couplings shall be fully pressure rated and fully
thrust restrained such that when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations, a longitudinal load applied to the mechanical coupling will cause the
pipe to yield before the mechanical coupling disjoins. External joint restraints shall not
be used in lieu of fully restrained mechanical couplings.

B. Branch Connections. Branch connections to the main shall be made with saddle fittings
or tees. Polyethylene saddle fittings shall be saddle fused to the main pipe per 3.01.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General. The Manufacturer shall package products for shipment in a manner suitable for
safe transport by commercial carrier. When delivered, a receiving inspection shall be
performed, and any shipping damage shall be reported to the Manufacturer within 7 days.

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE & FITTINGS
221050-4
Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations, and this
specification. All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure a safe working
environment in accordance with applicable codes and standards.

B. Large Diameter Fabricated Fittings. Fabricated directional fittings 16-inch IPS and larger
shall be butt fused to the end of a pipe. The flanged directional outlet connections shall
be made up in the trench.

C. Foundation & Bedding. Pipe shall be laid on grade and on a stable foundation. Unstable
or mucky trench bottom soils shall be removed, and a 6-inch foundation or bedding of
compacted Type 4 material shall be installed to pipe bottom grade. Excess groundwater
shall be removed from the trench before laying the foundation or bedding and the pipe.
A trench cut in rock or stony soil shall be excavated to 6-inches below pipe bottom grade,
and brought back to grade with compacted Type 4 bedding. All ledge rock, boulders and
large stones shall be removed.

D. Pipe Handling. When lifting with slings, only wide fabric choker slings capable of safely
carrying the load, shall be used to lift, move, or lower pipe and fittings. Wire rope or
chain shall not be used. Slings shall be of sufficient capacity for the load, and shall be
inspected before use. Worn or defective equipment shall not be used.

E. Underground installation. When placing pipe underground maintain standard as outlined
by ASTM D2774 and AWWA Manual of Practice M55 2006.

3.3 TESTING

A. QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. Butt Fusion Testing. On every day butt fusions are to be made, the first fusion of the
day shall be a trial fusion. The trial fusion shall be allowed to cool completely, then
fusion test straps shall be cut out. The test strap shall be 12-inches (min) or 30 times
the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and 1-inch (min) or 1.5
times the wall thickness in width. Bend the test strap until the ends of the strap touch.
If the fusion fails at the joint, a new trial fusion shall be made, cooled completely and
tested. Butt fusion of pipe to be installed shall not commence until a trial fusion has
passed the bent strap test.

Pressure Testing. The initial pressure test can be conducted before the line is
backfilled. However, it is advisable to cover the pipe at intervals or particularly at
curves to hold the pipe in place during pressure test. Flanged connections may be left
exposed for visual leak inspection. The main shall be tested after the final
installation is completed.

Test pressure should not exceed 1.5 times the rated operating pressure of the pipe or
the lowest rated component in the system. The initial pressure test shall be applied
and allowed to stand without make up pressure for a sufficient time to allow for
diametric expansion or pipe stretching to stabilize. This usually occurs within 2 to 3
hours. After this equilibrium period, the test section can be returned to the 1.5 times
operating pressure, the pump turned off, and a final test pressure held for 2 hours.

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE & FITTINGS
221050-5
Allowable amounts of make-up water for expansion during pressure test is shown in
Chart 6, taken from PPI technical report TR 31/9-79. There shall be no visual leaks
or pressure drops greater than 5 PSI during the final test period.

Under no circumstances shall the total time under test exceed 3 hours at 1 ½ times
the pressure rating. If the test is not completed because of leakage, equipment
failure, or other reason, the test section shall be permitted to ‘relax’ for 8 hours before
the next testing sequence. Pneumatic pressure testing is NOT allowed.

END OF SECTION 221050

PIPELINE TESTING
221066-1
SECTION 221066 – PIPELINE TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall perform flushing and testing of all pipelines and appurtenant piping complete,
including conveyance of test water from Owner-designated source to point of use and all disposal
thereof, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS

A. All test equipment, temporary valves, bulkheads or other water control equipment and materials
shall be determined and furnished by the Contractor subject to the Engineer's review.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 -hours in advance of any planned testing and
shall review the testing procedures with the Engineer.

B. Unless otherwise provided herein, water for testing pipelines shall be furnished by the Owner;
however, the Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the
Owner-designated source to the points of use.

C. All pipelines shall be tested. All testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.

D. Disposal or release of test water from pipelines, after testing shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES

A. Prior to hydrostatic testing, all pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. The
Contractor shall test all pipelines either in sections or as a unit. The Contractor shall be responsible
for ascertaining that all test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure
without damage to, or movement of, the adjacent pipe. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents
are open during filling.

B. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the
air can be released through the air valves at a reasonable velocity and all the air within the pipeline
shall be properly purged. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled it shall be allowed to
stand under a slight pressure for at least 24-hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as

PIPELINE TESTING
221066-2
applicable, to absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pockets. During
this period, bulkheads, valves and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found,
corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer shall be taken.

C. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of 4-hours.
The test pressure for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 133% of the pipe pressure
class shown or specified measured at the lowest point of the pipeline being tested. The test
pressure for yard piping shall be as shown or specified on the Piping Schedule measured at the
lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. All leaks shall be repaired in a manner acceptable
to the Engineer.

D. All piping shall have no leakage. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, the
Contractor shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to
repair the leaks and shall again test the pipelines.

END OF SECTION 221066

HDPE Liner
310519.17-1
SECTION 310519.17 - HDPE GEOMEMBRANE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This specification includes furnishing and installing HDPE geomembranes. The HDPE
formulated sheet density includes 0.940 g/cc or greater. Geomembranes with both smooth
and textured surfaces are included.

B. Included procedures, specifications and methods will be adhered to in strict accordance with
the engineer’s specifications and drawings and changes must be requested and approved
from the engineer.

C. Reference Standards. All standard specification, i.e., Federal, ANSI, ASTM, Geosynthetic
Research Institute (GRI), etc., made a portion of these Specifications by reference shall be
the latest edition and revision thereof.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following to the Project Engineer or Property Owner, for review and approval,
within a reasonable time, to expedite shipment and/or installation of the Geomembrane:

1. Documentation of Manufacturer's Qualifications (as specified in subsection 1.03.B);

2. Manufacturer's Quality Control Program Manual (or descriptive documentation);

3. Material Properties Sheet, (including at a minimum all properties specified in GRI GM
13 and test methods used);

4. Material Sample;

5. Documentation of Installer's qualifications, (as specified below);

a. Submit a list of at least ten facilities completed by installer. (For each installation,
provide the name and type of facility, facility location, date of installation, name and
telephone number of facility contact, type and thickness of geomembrane used and,
surface area of the installed geomembrane.)

b. Submit resumes or qualifications of the Installation Supervisor, Master Seamer and
Technicians assigned to this project.

c. Installer’s Quality Control Program

6. Material and Liner Installation Warranties;

a. Submit a copy of all material warranties.

b. Submit a copy of all liner installation warranties.

B. Shop Drawings

HDPE Liner
310519.17-2

1. Submit copies of shop drawings for engineer's approval within a reasonable time. Shop
drawings shall show the proposed panel layout identifying seams and details. Seams
should generally follow the direction of the slope. Butt seams or roll-end seams should
not occur on a slope unless approved by the Owner's Representative. However, if
allowed, these seams should be staggered.

2. Placement of geomembrane should not occur until Owner's Representative has received
and approved the shop drawings.

C. Additional Submittals (To be provided during and after installation is complete.)

1. Manufacturer's warranty

2. Geomembrane installation warranty

3. Daily written acceptance of sub-grade surface

4. Low-temperature seaming procedures, if applicable

5. Prequalification test seam samples

6. Field seam non-destructive test results

7. Field seam destructive test results

8. Daily field installation reports

9. Installation record drawing

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Geomembrane Manufacturers:
1. Agru America, Inc. or approved equal.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have at least five (5) years experience
in the manufacturing of the specified or similar geomembrane product.

C. Installer's Qualifications

1. The Geomembrane Installer shall have at least three (3) years experience installing the
specified or similar geomembrane.

D. A Field Installation Supervisor performs and assumes responsibility throughout the
geomembrane installation including geomembrane panel layout, seaming, patching, testing,
repairs, and all other outlined responsibilities.

E. Seaming shall be performed under the direction of a Master Seamer (who may also be the
Field Installation Supervisor or Crew Foreman) with seaming experience of a minimum of at
least five (5) years of the geomembrane type specified or similar product, using the same
type of seaming apparatus to be used in the current project. During the seaming, the Field
Installation Supervisor and/or Master Seamer are present.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-3

F. Qualified technicians employed by the Geomembrane installer complete all seaming,
patching, testing, and other welding operations.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Manufacturer labels must be on all rolls delivered to the project.

B. A firmly affixed label attached to the selvage edge, shall clearly state the manufacturer's
name, product identification, material thickness, roll number, roll type, roll dimensions and
roll weight.

C. The Manufacturer protects the Geomembrane from mud, dirt, dust, puncture, cutting or any
other damaging or deleterious conditions.

D. Continuously and uniformly supported, rolls are stored away from high traffic areas on a
smooth, level surface. Chocks keep the rolls secure when necessary.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install Geomembrane in the presence of standing water, while precipitation is
occurring, during excessive winds, or when material temperatures are outside the limits
specified in Section 3.03.B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturing Quality Control

1. The test methods and frequencies used by the manufacturer for quality control/quality
assurance of the above geomembrane prior to delivery, shall be in accordance with the
latest revision of the GRI GM 13 for HDPE geomembrane, or modified as required for
project specific conditions.

2. The manufacturer's geomembrane quality control certifications, including results of
quality control testing of the products must be supplied to the Owner's Representative to
verify that the materials supplied for the project are in compliance with all product and
or project specifications. The certification, signed by a responsible party employed by
the manufacturer, such as the QA/QC Manager, Production Manager, or Technical
Services Manager, includes lot and roll numbers and corresponding shipping
information.

3. The Manufacturer provides production/manufacturing Certification that the
geomembrane and welding rod supplied for the project are from the same material type
and are compatible.

2.02 GEOMEMBRANE

HDPE Liner
310519.17-4
A. The geomembrane shall consist of new, first quality products designed and manufactured
specifically for the purpose of this work. The product will satisfactorily complete testing
demonstrating its suitability and durability for the purposes intended. The geomembrane rolls
shall be seamless, high density polyethylene (HDPE - Formulated Sheet Density ≥ 0.94g/cc)
containing no plasticizers, fillers or extenders and shall be free of holes, blisters or
contaminants, and leak free verified by 100 percent in line spark or equivalent testing. The
geomembrane supplied is a continuous sheet with no factory seams in rolls. The
geomembrane will meet the property requirements as shown in (GRI GM 13 for HDPE).

B. Material conformance testing by the Owner's Representative, if required, will be conducted
using in-plant sampling or as specified for the project.

C. The geomembrane seams shall meet the property requirements as shown in Table 1 or as
required by project specifications

Table 1: Seam Strength and related Properties of Thermally Bonded Smooth and Textured High
Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Geomembrane (English Units)
Geomembrane Nominal Thickness 30
Mils
40
mils
50
mils
60
mils
80
mils
100
mils
120
mils
Hot Wedge Seams (1)
shear strength (2), lb/in. 57 80 100 120 160 200 240
shear elongation at break (3), % 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
peel strength (2), lb/in. 45 60 76 91 121 151 181
peel separation, % 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Extrusion Fillet Seams (1)
shear strength (2), lb/in. 57 80 100 120 160 200 240
shear elongation at break (3), % 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
peel strength (2), lb/in. 39 52 65 78 104 130 156
peel separation, % 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Notes (Used also for hot air and ultrasonic seaming methods)
1. Value listed for shear and peel strength are for 4 out of 5 test specimens; the 5th specimen can be low
as 80% of the listed values.
2. Elongation measurements should be omitted for field testing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION

A. The sub grade shall be prepared in accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
The geomembrane sub grade shall be uniform and free of sharp or angular objects that may
damage the geomembrane prior to installation of the geomembrane.

B. The Geomembrane Installer and Owner’s Representative shall inspect the surface before
covering with the geomembrane on each day's operations to verify suitability.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-5

C. The Geomembrane Installer and Owner’s Representative shall provide daily a written
acceptance of the surface before covering with the geomembrane. During installation, the
Installer and Owner’s Representative must ensure daily surface maintenance ensuring sub -
grade suitability.

D. Prior to placement of the geomembrane, the Installer and Owner’s Representative must
repair all sub grade damaged by construction equipment and deemed unsuitable for
geomembrane deployment. The Installer and Owner’s Representative provides approval for
all repairs. All damage and repair protocol including contractor and Installer responsibilities,
are outlined in the preconstruction meeting.

3.02 GEOMEMBRANE PLACEMENT

A. The Owner’s Representative approves all applicable certifications and quality control
certificates listed in subsection 1.02 within the timeframe specified in the Contract
Documents. If the material does not meet project specifications, the Contractor removes it
from the work area.

B. The geomembrane installation must follow the limits shown on the project drawings and
essentially as shown on approved Panel Placement Drawings. Submit any changes made to
Panel Placement Drawings before deployment of liner materials. The Installer must receive
approval for the changes prior to deployment of liner materials.

C. When temperatures are lower than 32 degrees F, unless approved by the Owner’s
Representative, no geomembrane material can be unrolled and/or deployed. The Owner’s
Representative may adjust the minimum temperature for material deployment. The Installer
and Owner’s Representative defines temperature limitations during the preconstruction
meeting. Only deploy the quantity of geomembrane anchored and seamed together in one
day.

D. No vehicular traffic shall travel on the geomembrane other than an approved low ground
pressure vehicle or equivalent. It is suggested that a test pad simulating the methods to be
used and showing that no damage to the liner will result, be performed prior to
implementation of the proposed method.

E. Use sand bags or equivalent ballast as necessary temporarily holding the geomembrane
material in position under the foreseeable and reasonably - expected wind conditions. Sand
bag material shall be sufficiently close- knit to prevent fines from working through the bags
and discharging on the geomembrane.

F. Installer and Owner’s representative should not place geomembrane if moisture prevents
proper sub grade preparation, panel placement, or panel seaming. Defined in the
preconstruction meeting, the moisture limitations provide direction for the Installer and
Owner’s representative.

G. Damaged and rejected panels (or portions) shall be marked, removed from the work area,
and the removal recorded/documented.

H. The geomembrane should not "bridge over" voids or low areas in the sub grade. The
geomembrane shall rest in intimate contact with the sub grade.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-6
I. Wrinkles caused by panel placement or thermal expansion should be minimized .

J. Considerations on Site Geometry: In general, seams shall be oriented parallel to the line of
the maximum slope. In corners and odd shaped geometric locations, minimization of the
total length of field seams is required. Seams shall not be located at low points in the sub -
grade unless geometry requires seaming at such locations and if approved by the Owner's
Representative.

K. All panels must overlap prior to the seaming process. This overlap affects a weld and allows
for proper testing. In no case shall this overlap be less than 3-inches.

L. Sharp stones or other hard objects that could potentially damage the membrane should not be
within 1-inch of the surface to be lined.

M. Sub-grade should be firm, unyielding and able to support deployment equipment without
damage or rutting to the sub-grade.

3.03 SEAMING PROCEDURES

A. Cold weather installations should follow guidelines as outlined in GRI GM9.

B. The seaming process shall not occur when liner temperatures are less than 32 degrees F
unless the Installer and/or Owner’s Representative complies with the following conditions.

1. The seaming of the geomembrane at material temperatures below 32 degrees F only
transpires when the Geomembrane Installer can demonstrate the following to the
Owner's Representative using pre-qualification test seams.

a. Field seams comply with the project specifications.

b. The safety of the crew ensured.

c. Geomembrane material can be fabricated (i.e. pipe boots, penetrations, repairs. etc.)
at sub-freezing temperatures.

2. The Geomembrane Installer shall submit to the Owner's Representative for approval,
detailed procedures for seaming at low temperatures, possibly including the following:

a. Preheating of the geomembrane,

b. Using a tent or other device preventing heat loss during seaming and rapid heat loss
subsequent to seaming,

c. Completion of a number of test welds to determine appropriate seaming parameters.

C. If the geomembrane sheet temperature is above 170 degrees F as measured by an infrared
thermometer or surface thermocouple, seaming transpires only with the approval by the
Owner’s Representative. This approval depends upon the recommendations by the
manufacturer and on a field demonstration by the Geomembrane Installer using
prequalification test seams to demonstrate that seams comply with the s pecification.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-7
D. Seaming shall primarily be performed using automatic fusion welding equipment and
techniques. Use of extrusion welding takes place where fusion welding is not possible such
as at pipe penetrations, patches, repairs and short (less than a roll width) runs of seams.

E. In the case of fish mouths or excessive wrinkles at the seam overlap section, cut along the
ridge of the wrinkles on the back into the panel if necessary. Terminate the cut with a
keyhole cut (nominal ½-inch diameter hole) minimizing the crack/tear propagation. Then,
seam the overlay. Patch the key hole cut with an oval or round patch of the same base
geomembrane material extending a minimum of 6-inches beyond the cut in all directions.

F. When extrusion welding 60 mil (1.5mm) or greater HDPE, it is advisable to bevel the top
portion of the seam in a lengthwise direction to maximize intimate contact of material and
improve continuity of weld.

G. Prior to seaming, confirm the area for welding is free of moisture, dirt and any foreign matter
that can affect the integrity of the weld on an ongoing basis.

H. Take precaution and safety of the liner technicians, in extreme heat or cold, which can affect
the health of the individuals.

I. Seaming should run through the Anchor Trench to terminate at the end of the sheet goods.

3.04 PIPE AND STRUCTURE PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEM

A. Provide penetration-sealing system as shown in the Project Drawings.

B. Construct all penetrations from the base geomembrane material, flat stock, prefabricated
boots and accessories as shown on the Project Drawings. In the case of Structured Liners
such as SuperGripNet™, DrainLiner™ or similar materials offered by Agru America, Inc,
use the smooth or textured liner of the same density for such fabrications. Weld the pre -
fabricated or field fabricated assembly to the geomembrane as shown on the Project
Drawings to prevent leakage. Once complete, test the assembly as outlined in section 3.05. If
the Installer cannot perform the field non-destructive testing, attachments will be field spark
tested by standard holiday leak detectors in accordance with ASTM 6365. Spark testing
should be done in areas where both air pressure testing and vacuum testing is not possible.

1. Equipment for Spark testing shall be comprised of but not limited to; a hand held holiday
spark tester, and conductive wand that generates a high voltage.

2. The testing steps performed by the Geomembrane Installer include:

a. Place an electrically conductive tape or wire beneath the seam prior to welding.

b. Complete a calibration test on a trial seam containing a non-welded segment
ensuring the identification of such a defect (non-welded segment) under the planned
machine settings and procedures.

c. Upon completion of the weld, enable the spark tester and hold approximately 1-inch
above the weld moving slowly over the entire length of the weld in accordance with
ASTM 6365. If no spark occurs, the weld is leak free.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-8
3. A spark indicates a hole in the seam. The Geomembrane Installer locates, repairs, and
retests the faulty area.

4. When flammable gasses are present, use special care and precautions in the area to be
tested.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner’s Representative must receive information prior to all pre qualification and
production welding and testing, or as agreed upon in the pre construction meeting.

B. Prequalification Test Seams

1. The Geomembrane Installer tests seams and prepares seams verify seaming parameters
(speed, temperature and pressure of welding equipment) are adequate.

2. Each welding technician creates seams and tests each in accordance with ASTM D 4437
at the beginning of each seaming period. Welding technicians test the seaming under the
same conditions and with the same equipment and operator combination as production
seaming. The test seam shall be approximately 10 feet long for fusion welding and 3 feet
long for extrusion welding with the seam centered lengthwise. At a minimum, each
welding technician creates one test seam after seaming 4–6 hours; additional tests may
be required with changes in environmental conditions.

3. Two 1-inch wide specimens shall be die-cut by the Geomembrane Installer from each
end of the test seam. The specimens tested by the Geomembrane Installer require using a
field tension meter testing both tracks for peel strength and shear strength. Each
specimen should fail in the parent material and not in the weld, “Film Tear Bond"(F.T.B.
failure). When the seam separation is equal to or greater than 25 percent of the track
width, it is a failed test.

4. Table 1 provides the minimum acceptable seam strength values obtained for all
specimens tested. Four specimens out of five must meet the acceptable seam strength
values for consideration as passing.

5. If a test seam fails, the welding technician must immediately conduct an additional test
seam. If the additional test seam fails, the welding technician rejects the seaming
apparatus. The technician must correct the apparatus deficiencies and produce a
successful test seam before using the apparatus for any other/additional production
seaming.

6. The technician labels a sample from each test seam. The label indicates the date,
geomembrane temperature, number of the seaming unit, technician performing the test
seam and pass or fail description. The technician then gives the sample to the Owner's
Representative for archiving.

C. Field Seam Non-destructive Testing

1. The technician completes non-destructively tests over the full seam length before the
Geomembrane Installer covers it. Numbered or otherwise designated, each seam’s label
includes the location, date, test unit, name of tester and outcome of all non-destructive

HDPE Liner
310519.17-9
testing. Once recorded, the technician submits the information to the Owner's
Representative.

2. Testing should be done as the seaming work progresses, not at the completion of all field
seaming, unless agreed to in advance by the Owner's Representative. All defects found
during testing shall be numbered and marked immediately after detection. The
technician must repair, retest, and remark all defects indicating the acceptable
completion of the repair.

D. Non-destructive testing shall be performed using vacuum box, air pressure or spark testing
equipment.

E. Experienced technicians familiar with the specified test methods perform all non-destructive
tests. The Geomembrane Installer demonstrates all test methods verifying the validity of said
test procedures for the Owner's Representative.

F. The Geomembrane Installer tests all extrusion seams using a vacuum box in accordance with
ASTM D 4437 and ASTM D 5641 and the following equipment and procedures:

1. Equipment for testing extrusion seams is not limited to but should include:

a. A vacuum box assembly consisting of a rigid housing,

b. A transparent viewing window,

c. A soft rubber gasket attached to the base,

d. Port hole or valve assembly and a vacuum gauge,

e. A vacuum pump assembly equipped with a pressure controller and pipe connections,

f. A rubber pressure/vacuum hose with fittings and connections,

g. A plastic bucket,

h. wide paintbrush or mop, and

i. A soapy solution.

2. The Geomembrane Installer must charge the vacuum pump and adjust the tank pressure
to approximately 5 psig.

3. The Geomembrane Installer shall create a leak tight seal between the gasket and
geomembrane interface by wetting a strip of geomembrane approximately 12-inches by
48-inches (length and width of box) with a soapy solution, placing the box over the
wetted area, and then compressing the box against the geomembrane. The Geomembrane
Installer shall then close the bleed valve, open the vacuum valve, maintain initial
pressure of approximately 5 psig for approximately 3-4 seconds. The Installer must
continuously examine the geomembrane through the viewing window for the presence of
soap bubbles, indicating a leak. If no bubbles appear after 3 -4 seconds, consider the area
leak free. Once the area is leak free, depressurize the box and move it over the next
adjoining area with an appropriate overlap and the process repeated.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-10

4. All areas where soap bubbles appear shall be marked, repaired and then retested.

5. At seam locations where the Installer is unable to non-destructively test, such as pipe
penetrations, the Installer must substitute alternate non -destructive spark testing (as
outlined in section 3.04.B.2) or equivalent.

6. All seams that are vacuum tested shall be marked with the date tested, the name of the
technician performing the test and the results of the test.

G. Double Fusion seams with an enclosed channel shall be air pressure tested by the
Geomembrane Installer in accordance with ASTM D 5820 and ASTM D 4437 and the
following equipment guidelines and procedures.

1. Equipment for testing double fusion seams shall be comprised of but not limited to: an
air pump equipped with a pressure gauge capable of generating and sustaining a pressure
of 30 psig, mounted on a cushion to protect the geomembrane; and a manometer
equipped with a sharp hollow needle or other approved pressure feed device.

2. The Geomembrane Installer completes all testing activities. Both ends of the seam to be
tested are sealed and a needle or other approved pressure feed device inserted into the
tunnel created by the double wedge fusion weld. The air pump shall be adjusted to a
pressure of 30 psig, and the valve closed. Allow 2 minutes for the injected air to come to
equilibrium in the channel, and sustain pressure for 5 minutes. If pressure loss does not
exceed 4 psig after the five-minute period, the Installer considers the seam leak tight.
Release pressure from the opposite end verifying pressure drop on needle to ensure
testing of the entire seam. The needle or other approved pressure feed device shall be
removed and the feedhole sealed.

3. If loss of pressure exceeds 4 psig during the testing period or pressure does not stabilize,
the Geomembrane Installer locates, repairs and retests the faulty area.

4. Record all results of the pressure testing on the liner at the seam tested and on a pressure
testing record.

5. If release of pressure from opposite end of tested seam does NOT deflate seam, the
Installer takes measures to determine the cau se and remedies to air test 100 percent of
the seam under scrutiny.

H. Destructive Field Seam Testing

1. The Installer analyzes one destructive test sample per 500 linear feet seam length or the
Geomembrane Installer shall take another predetermined length in accordance with GRI
GM 14 from a location specified by the Owner's Representative. The Geomembrane
Installer receives the sample locations without advance notice of the locations. The
Geomembrane Installer cuts samples as directed by the Owner’s Representative before
the complete installation and as seaming progresses.

2. All field samples shall be marked with their sample number and seam number including
the sample number, date, time, location, and seam number recorded. The Geomembrane
Installer shall repair all holes in the geomembrane resulting from obtaining the seam
samples. All patches shall be vacuum box tested or spark tested. If the installation of a

HDPE Liner
310519.17-11
permanent patch over the test location the same day of sample collection is not possible,
place a temporary patch either tack welded or hot air welded over the opening until
affixing a permanent patch.

3. Testing requires the destructive samples size at least 12-inches wide, 36-inches long,
with the seam centered lengthwise. The sample shall be cut into three equal sections and
distributed as follows: one section given to the Owner's Representative as an archive
sample; one section given to the Owner's Representative for laboratory testing as
specified in paragraph 3.05.H.5 below; and one section retained by the Geomembrane
Installer for field testing as specified in paragraph 3.05.H.4 below.

4. For field-testing, the Geomembrane Installer shall cut 10 identical 1-inch wide replicate
specimens from his sample. The Geomembrane Installer shall test five specimens for
seam shear strength and five for peel strength. The Geomembrane Installer performs peel
tests on both the inside and outside weld tracks. To be acceptable, four (4) of five (5) test
specimens must pass the stated criteria in Table 1 with less than 25 percent separation. If
four (4) of five (5) specimens pass, the sample qualifies for testing by the testing
laboratory if required.

5. If the specifications require an independent seam testing, conduct the testing in
accordance with ASTM 5820 or ASTM D4437.

6. Prepare and submit all reports of the results of examinations and testing to the Owner's
Representative.

7. For field seams, if a laboratory test fails, it is an indicator of the possible inadequacy of
the entire seamed length corresponding to the test sample. The Geomembrane Installer
should take additional destructive test portions at locations indicated by the Engineer;
(typically 10 feet) on either side of the failed sample) and perform additional laboratory
seam tests. Passing tests shall be an indicator of adequate seams. Failing tests shall be an
indicator of non-adequate seams. When seams fail the destructive test, the Installer re-
seams or repairs seams with a cap-strip. Cap-strip seams shall be non-destructively
vacuum box tested until achieving adequacy of the seams. The Geomembrane Installer
must destructively test all Cap strip seams exceeding 150 feet in length.

8. The Installer keeps all samples out of critical areas such as in the bottom of ponds and
other locations such as slopes and sumps.

I. Identification of Defects

1. The Installer and Owner’s Representative inspects panels and seams during and after
panel deployment to identify all defects, including holes, blisters, un -dispersed raw
materials and signs of contamination by foreign matter.

J. Evaluation of Defects: The Installer must complete a non -destructive test for each suspect
location on the liner (both in seam and non -seam areas) using one of the methods described
in Section 3.05.B. Each location failing non-destructive testing is marked, numbered,
measured and posted on the daily "installation" drawings and subsequently repaired.

1. If a destructive sample fails the field or laboratory test, the Geomembrane Installer shall
repair the seam between the two nearest passed locations on both sides of the failed
destructive sample location.

HDPE Liner
310519.17-12

2. All repairs of defective seams, tears or holes use either re-seaming or applying an
extrusion welded cap strip process.

3. Re-seaming may consist of either:

a. Removing the defective weld area and re-welding the parent material using the
original welding equipment; or

b. Re-seam the defective weld area by extrusion welding along the overlap at the
outside seam edge left by the fusion welding process.

c. Cap stripping entire faulty seam.

4. The Installer repairs blisters, larger holes, and contamination by foreign matter using
required patches and/or extrusion weld beads. Each patch shall extend a minimum of 6-
inches beyond all edges of the defects.

5. Locate, measure and record all repairs.

K. Verification of Repairs on Seams: Each repair requires a non -destructive test using either
vacuum box or spark testing methods. An indication of a successful repair includes areas
passing the non-destructive test. Areas failing the tests require re-seaming and retesting until
results show a passing test. Requirements for areas failing the tests include re-seaming and
retesting until passing test results. The Installer records the number, date, location, technician
and test outcome of each patch.

L. Daily Field Installation Reports: At the beginning of each day's work, the Installer shall
provide the Engineer with daily reports for all work accomplished on the previous workday.
Reports shall include the following:

1. Total amount and location of geomembrane placed

2. Total length and location of seams completed, name of technicians doing seaming and
welding unit numbers

3. Drawings of the previous day's installed geomembrane showing panel numbers, seam
numbers and locations of non-destructive and destructive testing

4. Results of pre-qualification test seams

5. Results of non-destructive testing

6. Results of vacuum testing of repairs

7. Prior to covering the liner, report all Destructive test results.

8. Perform and complete all quality assurance no more than 72 hours after geomembrane
deployment.

3.06 LINER ACCEPTANCE

HDPE Liner
310519.17-13
A. The Owner’s Representative accepts the Geomembrane liner when:

1. The entire installation is completed or an agreed upon subsection of the installation is
finished.

2. The Installer submits all completed QC documentation to the owner.

3. Verification of the adequacy of all field seams and repairs and associated geomembrane
testing is complete.

4. All submittals are accepted.

3.07 ANCHOR TRENCH

A. Construct as specified on the project drawings.

3.08 DISPOSAL OF SCRAP MATERIALS

A. On completion of installation, the Geomembrane Installer shall dispose of all trash and scrap
material in a location approved by the Owner, remove equipment used in connection with the
work herein, and shall leave the premises in a neat acceptable manner. Finally, remove all
scrap material from the surface of the geomembrane.

3.09 MATERIAL WARRANTY

A. Material manufacturer shall guarantee material against defects and premature aging from
environmental conditions on a pro rata basis for a specified period of time acceptable to
owner and manufacturer.

3.10 GEOMEMBRANE INSTALLATION WARRANTY

A. The Geomembrane Installer shall guarantee the geomembrane installation against defects in
the installation and workmanship for a time period satisfactory to all parties commencing
with the date of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 310519.17
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.
7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain
Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed
from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-
control and plant-protection measures are in place.
E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.
B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Engineer.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in
place.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. A utility interruption form, as provided by the Owner, shall be completed and returned to
the Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire
suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security and
utilities sections and Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective
Demolition."
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches
below exposed subgrade.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 4
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate
new construction.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials.
Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling
facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 311000
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 1
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf, and grasses and plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks, pavements.
5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward
capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional
excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for
changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 2
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor to notify Engineer of excavation plans a minimum of 48 hours in advance.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth moving operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in
any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 3
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-
inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. The gradation shall have the
following gradation requirements:
1-1/2 inch Gradation
Sieve Size Percentage Passing Tolerance
1-1/2-inch 100 0
3/4-inch 86 ±5
1/2-inch 72 ±5
No. 4 48 ±5
No. 16 26 ±3
No. 200 8 ±2

3/4 inch Gradation
Sieve Size Percentage Passing Tolerance
3/4-inch 100 0
1/2-inch 85 ±7
No. 4 61 ±6
No. 16 33 ±5
No. 200 9 ±2
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Bank Run Fill: Imported granular material free from rock or gravel larger than 6-inches in any
dimension with less than fifteen percent (15%) passing the No. 200 sieve. Bank-run fill shall be
placed in finished lifts not to exceed 8 inches and compacted to 95% of maximum dry density
per ASTM D-698.

Sieve Size Percentage Passing

3-inch 100
3/8-inch 40-50
No. 8 35-65
No. 50 10-30
No. 200 5-15
I. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. The gradation shall have the following gradation
requirements:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing
1-1/2-inch 100
3/4-inch 90-100
3/8-inch 40-100
No. 4 5-40
No. 8 0-5
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 4
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide
and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is
buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving
operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavations shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered including
removal or relocation of all obstructions that would interfere with the proper execution of the
Work. The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades shown on the plans
or ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all supports and
shoring that may be required for safety of excavations and protection of adjacent structures and
all pumping, ditching or other measures necessary for the removal or exclusion of water,
including taking care of storm water, groundwater and wastewater reaching the site of the Work
from any source so as to prevent damage to the Work or adjoining property. Excavations shall
be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 5
requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction
(29CFR1926).
B. Excavations beneath structures shall be carried to the grades shown or specified. Over -
excavations ordered by the Engineer that are not shown or specified and the resulting backfill
will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been established,
otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. After the required
excavation or over-excavation has been completed the exposed surface shall be scarified to a
depth of 6-inches, brought to optimum moisture content and rolled with heavy compaction
equipment to obtain ninety percent (90%) of maximum density.
C. Excavation under roadways and areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate
base. After the required excavation has been completed the exposed surface shall be scarified
brought to optimum moisture content and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain
ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum density.
D. The subgrade area beneath embankments shall be excavated to remove the top 8-inches of
native or topsoil material. Where the subgrade is sloped the excavation shall be benched.
E. The Contractor shall keep separate and stockpile from required excavations all topsoil
consisting of the top 8-inches of native material. The Contractor shall place and grade this
topsoil material as the top 6-inches on areas requiring landscaping, if applicable, to the extent it
remains available.
F. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the completion of any structural excavation and
shall allow the Engineer at least 24-hours review period before the exposed foundation is
scarified and compacted or is covered with any structural backfill materials.
G. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site selected by
the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer.
H. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
I. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use
narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop
exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and
Plant Protection."
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 6
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Unless otherwise shown or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open -cut
trenches. The bottom of the trench shall have a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of
the pipe plus 24-inches. Trenches for pipelines smaller than 8-inches shall be excavated
uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. Trenches for pipelines 8 inches and larger,
unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, shall be excavated uniformly to the grade 6 -inches
below the grade of the outside bottom of the pipe. The over-excavation shall be replaced with
material as indicated in the Geotechnical Report (Section 319000). The pipe bedding shall be
compacted by mechanical means suitable to the Engineer to eighty-five percent (85%) of
relative density. The trench bottom shall be uniformly graded so that each pipe section when
first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the entire length of the pipe.
Where granular backfill under footings encases an underdrain piping system or has a thickness
of 18-inches or greater or where shown on the Drawings, a layer of soil stabilization fabric shall
be placed under the first horizontal layer of granular backfill. Soil stabilizer fabric shall be
Mirafi 500, Contech C200, or equal. The sloping or vertical side slopes shall receive a layer of
Mirafi 140 NL, Contech C-45NW, or equal.
B. The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be the length
necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed and backfilled in a single day. The
Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to backfill all trenches at the end of each day.
When this is not possible, barricades with warning lights meeting OSHA requirements shall be
provided, set and maintained.
C. All pipeline and utility trench excavations shall be kept reasonably free from excess water
during excavation, fine grading, pipe laying, and backfilling operations. Ground water shall be
lowered to the extent necessary to keep the trench free from water and the trench bottom stable
when the work within the trench is in progress. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all
times during construction ample means and equipment with which to properly and promptly
remove and dispose of all water entering the excavation or other parts of the Work whether the
water be surface water or underground water. The Contractor shall dispose of the water from
the Work site in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property.
D. When ordered by the Engineer, whether indicated on the Drawings or not, trenches shall be
over-excavated beyond the depth shown or specified. Such over-excavation shall be to the
depth ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade required. When the over
excavation ordered by the Engineer is 4-inches or greater below the limits shown, additional
payment will be made to the Contractor for that portion of the Work which is located below said
4-inch distance. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for
over-excavation and bedding if such bid items have been established, otherwise payment will be
made in accordance with a negotiated price.
E. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site selected by
the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 7
F. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
G. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-
tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed
roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities.
3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and
Plant Protection."
3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Fill of
unauthorized excavations shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day
compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Engineer.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Engineer.
3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.8 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of water, mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Except for drain rock materials being placed in over-excavated areas of the trench for
dewatering purposes, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation.
C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
D. Trenches under Footings: Any piping which passes below a footing within 6 feet (measured
from the bottom of the footing to the top of the pipe), shall be encased in concrete as detailed in
the drawings.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of as required in the Geotechnical Report (Section 319000).
1. Backfill material shall not be dropped directly on the pipe or utility conduit.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 8
2. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill as required in the Geotechnical Report (Section 319000) to
final subgrade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
H. Pipe-zone and utility trench backfill material shall be spread and compacted in layers not to
exceed 6-inches in thickness. Compaction shall be achieved using mechanical equipment.
Flooding, ponding or jetting shall not be used for compaction unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Pipe zone backfill material shall be manually spread around the pipe so , when
compacted, the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. Piping shall
be protected from lateral displacement and possible damage resulting from impact or
unbalanced loading during backfill operations. Trench zone backfill material shall be uniformly
spread and mechanically compacted in layers not to exceed 12-inches in thickness. Moisture
content shall be uniformly adjusted by wetting or drying as necessary.
I. Pipe zone including bedding compaction requirements shall be ninety-five percent (95%) of
maximum density or eighty-five percent (85%) at relative density whichever is applicable.
J. Trench zone backfill using required excavated material shall be not less than eighty -five (85%)
of maximum density except under paved areas, sidewalks, pipelines, utilities and structures
which shall not be less than ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum density.
K. Aggregate base course materials shall be placed and compacted to not less than ninety-five
percent (95%) of maximum density.
3.9 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations using satisfactory native
material, or imported as required in the Geotechnical Report.
3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 9
3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to AASHTO T-180:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85
percent.
D. Backfill shall not be dropped directly on or against any structure. Backfill shall not be placed
around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained the required strength to support the
loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures shall not be placed until the structures
have been tested for leaks and the structures are full of water while the backfill is being placed.
E. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to walls than a
horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power compaction
equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to
weight limitations or may cause damage to the structure.
3.12 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
3.13 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 10
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as
follows:
1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope
grades.
2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in
layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to AASHTO T-180.
3.14 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to AASHTO T-180.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Refer to General Conditions and Summary of Work to determine who will
engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Engineer.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 11
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property at the Contractor’s expense.
3.18 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into trenches and
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
1. The Contractor shall investigate site and submit a dewatering plan to the engineer for
review
2. The existing drain system may be used for discharging ground water.
3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well point, sumps, suction and
discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water
away from excavations.
4. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rainwater and water removed from excavations to collecting
or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
END OF SECTION 312000

FINISH GRADING
312219-1
SECTION 312219 - FINISH GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, materials, services and equipment indicated on the Drawings
and/or herein specified to complete all Finish Grading Work.

B. Finish grading shall consist of the final grading and shaping of all areas, except
those areas under pavements, slabs and structures, to conform to lines, elevations
and shapes as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Re-vegetation of all cleared or stripped areas disturbed by construction activities

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Subgrade: Subgrade shall mean surfaces upon which additional specified
materials are to be placed, prepared or constructed.

B. Rough Grading: Rough grading shall mean the act that includes the spreading or
placement of specified materials to the tolerances defined as final rough grade.

C. Final Rough Grade: Final rough grade shall mean the establishment of grades to a
0.15 foot plus or minus tolerance of grades required to accomplish the work
described in other sections of the specifications on the drawings (i.e. landscape
work, finish grading, concrete work, asphalt work, etc.)

D. Finish Grading: Finish grading shall mean the act that includes the spreading or
placement of specified materials to establish the tolerances defined as final finish
grade.

E. Final Finish Grade: Final finish grade shall mean the establishment of grades to a
plus or minus tolerance of final grades as indicated on drawings. Tolerances are
specified in applicable sections of the specifications (i.e. concrete, asphalt, finish
grading, etc.).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval at the source of supply or upon
delivery.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All spot elevations to be staked for verification and approval by the Engineer.

B. Finish grade tolerance shall be within plus or minus 0.15 foot of final grades
indicated on drawings.

FINISH GRADING
312219-2
C. Finished grades shall conform to shapes, spot elevations and contours, as indicated
on drawings, with uniform levels or slopes between finished elevations or between
finished elevations and existing elevations.

D. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor will engage a soil testing service for
quality control testing during finish grading operations. All testing will be
coordinated with Engineer and his inspector.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IMPORTED FILL MATERIALS

A. As required in Section 312000 – Earth Moving

2.03 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural loam and shall be capable of sustaining vigorous
plant growth. Topsoil shall be approved native soils stripped from the site prior to
excavation. It shall be free of stones, lumps, clods of hard earth, plants or their roots,
sticks and other extraneous matter. The soil shall contain no noxious weeds or their
seeds. It shall not be used for planting operation while in a frozen or muddy condition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conduct work in an orderly manner and so as to not create a nuisance. Dirt shall not be
permitted to accumulate on streets or sidewalks not to be washed into storm sewers.

B. Finished grades shall be established using materials as specified.

C. Finish grade tolerance shall be within plus or minus 0.15 foot of final grades indicated
on drawings.

D. Finished grades shall conform to shapes, spot elevations and contours, as indicated on
drawings, with uniform levels or slopes between finished elevations and existing
elevations.

E. Finished grades shall be established to provide after settling, adequate drainage in a
uniform way so no water pockets or ridges will be created.

3.02 FINISH GRADING

A. Fine grade all landscaped areas to a smooth, loose and uniform surface.

B. Finish grades of all landscaped areas shall be established with topsoil material, as
specified, spread to a depth of two (2) inches.

C. Contractor is responsible to spread excess excavated soil material from plant pits in
surrounding planting beds.

FINISH GRADING
312219-3
D. Finished grade of planting areas shall be one (1) inch below top of curb, walls, concrete
slabs, and mow strips or redwood headers.

END OF SECTION 312219

DEWATERING
312319-1
SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install all labor, equipment, material, and related services to dewater all
applicable portions of the project.

B. Dewatering may be necessary for construction requiring deep excavations.

C. Provide all necessary dewatering during construction of the entire project.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit dewatering plan for all applicable excavations.

1.03 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Protect the project site and adjacent property to avoid any damage caused by dewatering
and pumping.

B. All dewatering discharge shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Insure that no erosion occurs and that no contamination of the adjacent low areas occurs
due to dewatering.

D. Soil borings made at the site are shown on the plans and complete soil boring reports are
included in this specification document. Groundwater level readings at the time of the
borings are included on the logs. Borings and groundwater levels are for informational
purposes only and are not to be taken as wholly representative of all conditions
throughout the project site.

E. The Contractor shall furnish all power, pumps and other apparatus necessary for the rapid
and proper execution of the dewatering. All costs associated with dewatering during
construction shall be included in the Lump Sum bid. The risk associated with correctly
determining the appropriate dewatering cost shall be borne by the Contractor. Regardless
of the bid value of dewatering, the Contractor shall complete any and all dewatering work
necessary to construct this project in accordance with plans and specifications. No
additional compensation will be paid by the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor is advised to carefully view the site to determine to what extent
dewatering will be necessary for construction of the various structures. The choice of
dewatering equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Dewatering by pumping from sump pits will be acceptable if this method is able to keep
the excavation dry.
DEWATERING
312319-2

C. If pumping from sump pits is not able to maintain a dry excavation, dewatering shall be
accomplished by means of well points, vacuum well points, deep wells, or a combination
of these methods.

D. Contractor shall remove from the site, all sand, silt, and debris accumulated during
dewatering operations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DEWATERING

A. All dewatering shall be carried out in accordance with an approved plan. Plan must be
approved by the Engineer prior to any dewatering operations.

B. All dewatering shall be done to insure no erosion or pollution results.

C. Dewatering shall be of such magnitude necessary to insure all excavations are acceptable
for the construction requirements.

D. The Contractor shall insure that the dewatering is operated continuously, 24 hours per
day, if necessary.

E. Upon completion of the operation, the areas shall be cleaned of all debris and equipment
and shall be returned to original or better condition.

3.02 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees required by the Department of
Natural Resources and other regulatory agencies for dewatering wells or water
appropriation.

END OF SECTION 312319
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 1
SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned-in-place support
and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points
to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and
superimposed and construction loads.
1. Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING
A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation
grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular
intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed
faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120
out of vertical alignment.
B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as
required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.
C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.
3.2 SHEET PILING
A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical
edges to form a continuous barrier.
B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in
writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60
inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a
horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
3.3 TIEBACKS
A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.
B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.
1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of
excavation support and protection system.
C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and
hydrostatic pressures.
3.4 BRACING
A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent
work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work
unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 3
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation
support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains
open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with
original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Engineer if changes in elevations or positions
occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to
avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and
utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches
below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.
END OF SECTION 315000

PROTECTION AND RELOCATING UTILITIES
330112-1

SECTION 330112 - PROTECTING AND RELOCATING UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials as required to locate and protect
underground and above utilities.

B. Coordinate work with all other trades.

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The location of existing utilities, ditches, conduits, and underground structures shown
on the plans are approximate only.

B. The location of above ground and underground facilities and structures has been
inferred from other records and are in no way guaranteed. Determination of actual
location is Contractor’s sole responsibility.

C. Unless specified otherwise, the raising or lowering or relocation of portions of
interfering utilities is the responsibility of the utility company or utility owner.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 312000 – Earth Moving

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Contact “Blue Stakes” at 1-800-662-4111 to stake and mark the location of utilities in
the Work.

B. Contact other utility owners which “Blue Stakes” do not mark, to have them locate their
facilities.

3.02 UTILITIES THE BE RELOCATED BY OTHERS

A. Support and protect natural gas lines, telephone, electric, oil, television, water lines,
sanitary sewers, storm drains, etc., in those areas where these facilities parallel, cross
over, or under the Work.

B. Notify the utility company so that arrangements can be made to protect or relocate the
utility facility.

PROTECTION AND RELOCATING UTILITIES
330112-2

3.03 UTILITIES TO BE RELOCATED BY CONTRACTOR

A. When installing a new water main next to an existing main the Contractor shall take
care to protect the existing line, including service laterals, valves, fittings, and thrust
blocks. Obsolete water mains shall be abandoned in place after being disconnected and
the openings plugged.

B. Notify affected property owners at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to interruption of
service.

C. Do not interrupt service unless coordinated with utility companies and affected property
owners for periods lasting longer than four (4) hours and in no case overnight.

D. Perform Specified utility relocations in accordance with standards and practices
generally accepted for the utility being relocated.

3.04 REPAIR OF DAMAGED UTILITIES

A. Report damages of utility lines to affected utility owner or utility company and
Engineer.

B. Coordinate repairs through utility owner or utility company at no additional cost to the
owner.

END OF SECTION 330112

TESTING FOR WATER PIPELINES AND CONCRETE TANK S
330112.11-1
SECTION 330112.11 – TESTING FOR WATER PIPELINES AND CONCRETE
TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Work under this specification includes the general requirements for water pipeline and concrete
tank testing. The information given in this section is intended to emphasize only certain
provisions of the AWWA Standards and provide supplemental information. Where there is
conflicting information between this section and the AWWA Standards, the AWWA Standards
shall be followed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Pipelines

A. After each section of pipeline for the water supply has been laid, the valves installed,
and the trenches partially backfilled, the Contractor shall subject the pipe to a
hydrostatic pressure and leakage test. Refer to Section 221066 for pipeline testing
requirements.

3.02 Tanks

A. Leak Test: Comply with the Utah State Division of Drinking Water requirements. The
following are the procedures for the leak test:

1. After construction and prior to backfill, fill tank with potable water to test for leaks.
2. Fill the tank with potable water to the overflow pipe level.
3. Allow 72 hours for concrete to absorb any water in the tank.
4. Top off the water level to overflow pipe level.
5. Let water sit in tank for 24 hours.
6. If there is a drop-in water level, the tank shall be drained and cracks shall be
repaired.
7. Retest until no leaks exist.

B. Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior of water storage tanks.

END OF SECTION 331305
SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-1
SECTION 331136 SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150.
2. ASTM International (ASTM): A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS): 11.6, Submersible Pump Test.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
5. UL.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to ratings
and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Field elevations, in NAVD 88, for the pump elevations, static water level, transducer
location, and overflow elevation in receiving storage tank.
2. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.
3. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of
materials of construction, including cable seal details.
4. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump
efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity.
Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum
submergence required at guarantee point.
5. For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every 50 rpm over the
operational range.
6. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
7. Motor nameplate data.
8. Adjustable frequency drive nameplate data
9. Factory-finish system.
10. L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA.
11. If required, wiring for motor protection module.
12. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required.
13. Written certification from pump and motor manufacturers showing compliance with
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 and NSF/ANSI Standard 372.
B. Informational Submittals:
SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-2
1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
3. Factory and Field Performance Test Reports and Log.
4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, that factory finish system meets requirements
specified herein.
5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of 1 year and 5 years.
Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and
maintenance with current price information.
6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and
during startup and for future maintenance.
7. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Submersible, Well Pump and Motor: Designed for continuous operation under submerged or
partially submerged conditions. Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group,
and division location in accordance with NFPA 70.
B. Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating system complete
with pump, drive, and speed controller.
C. Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer.
D. Components and materials shall be certified in compliance with the Safe Drinking Water Act and
other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification from an accredited
certification organization recognized by the authority having jurisdiction that products,
components, and materials furnished comply with NSF/ANSI 61, with maximum lead content in
accordance with NSF/ANSI 372.
2.2 SUPPLEMENT
A. Specific requirements are attached to this section as a supplement.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at head-capacity point on pump curve.
B. Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump application and cable sizing
shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length
to reach junction boxes without strain or splicing.
C. Motor Protection Module: If required, provide pump with a motor protection module for remote
mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named submersible pump manufacturer and
motor protection module. If pump and motor protection module other than first named
manufacturer is provided, provide revised wiring for the motor protection module.
SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-3
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment
tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.
B. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pump:
1. Factory Performance Test:
a. In accordance with HIS 11.6,
b. Include test data sheets, curve test results, performance test logs.
2. Conduct on each pump.
3. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
a. Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at 2/3, 1/3, and shutoff
conditions.
B. Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions such that unit is properly aligned,
plumb, and level, properly supported.
3.2 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum
person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.
2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. 1/2 person-day for facility startup.
4. 1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel. Training shall not
commence until accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed
by Engineer.
3.3 SUPPLEMENT
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this Specification.
SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-4
1. Pump Data Sheet.
END OF
SECTION 331136

SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-5
OAKLEY WELL PUMP DATA SHEET

Pump Name:

Manufacturer and Model Number: (1)
(2) Or Approved Equal

SERVICE CONDITIONS

Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Groundwater
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 52 Max Min
Abrasive (Y/N) N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N):N
Altitude (Feet above Mean Sea Level): 6762
Static Water Level (Feet below Surface Grade): -70 feet
Anticipated Pump Setting (Feet below Surface Grade): 210
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Primary Design Point:

Capacity (US gpm): 1000 gpm Rated:
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): 80 ft Rated:
Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 80
Secondary Design Point:

Capacity (US gpm): Rated:
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated:
Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%):

SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP
331136-6
DESIGN AND MATERIALS

Pump Type: Submersible
Bowl: As per ASTM A48
Bowl Wear Rings: Bronze or SS as per Manufacturer Recommendation
Bowl Lining: Porcelain Enamel
Bowl Bearings and Bearing Adaptor: Bronze or SS as per Manufacturer
Recommendation
Thrust Washer: Bronze or 304 SS
Impeller: Bronze or 304 or 316 SS
Pump Shaft Material: 416 SS
Taper Lock Material: Carbon Steel or SS
Pump/Motor Coupling Material: 416 SS
DRIVE MOTOR

Horsepower:40 Voltage: Phase: Synchronous Speed (rpm):

Other Features: Inverter Duty Rated or Manufacture VFD compliance verified

REMARKS: Bearing over-temperature protection required. Prior to pump submittal,
Contractor to provide field elevations, in NAVD 88, for the pump elevations, static water
level, transducer location, and overflow elevation in the receiving storage tank.